Tesla Model X | Owner's Manual

MODEL X OWNER'S MANUAL 2019.36.1 North America

Contents Contents Overview.............................................................2 Charging...........................................................171 Interior Overview.........................................................................2 Electric Vehicle Components.............................................. 171 Exterior Overview....................................................................... 3 Battery Information................................................................173 Touchscreen Overview..............................................................4 Charging Instructions............................................................ 175 Opening and Closing..................................... 6 Maintenance................................................... 181 Keys and Doors............................................................................6 Maintenance Schedule........................................................... 181 Windows....................................................................................... 15 Tire Care and Maintenance..................................................183 Rear Trunk.................................................................................... 16 Cleaning..................................................................................... 190 Front Trunk.................................................................................. 18 Wiper Blades and Washer Jets..........................................193 Interior Storage and Electronics........................................ 20 Fluid Reservoirs.......................................................................194 Sun Visors....................................................................................23 Jacking and Lifting.................................................................196 Seating and Safety Restraints..................24 Parts and Accessories........................................................... 197 Front and Rear Seats.............................................................. 24 Specifications............................................... 198 Seat Belts.....................................................................................29 Identification Labels.............................................................. 198 Child Safety Seats.................................................................... 32 Vehicle Loading.......................................................................199 Airbags.......................................................................................... 41 Dimensions and Weights.....................................................201 Driving.............................................................. 46 Subsystems.............................................................................. 203 Wheels and Tires................................................................... 206 Driver Profiles............................................................................ 46 Steering Wheel..........................................................................49 Roadside Assistance..................................214 Mirrors...........................................................................................52 Contacting Tesla Roadside Assistance...........................214 Starting and Powering Off....................................................54 Instructions for Transporters.............................................. 215 Gears............................................................................................. 56 Lights............................................................................................ 58 Consumer Information...............................218 Instrument Panel.......................................................................62 Wipers and Washers............................................................... 68 Easter Eggs............................................................................... 218 Brakes........................................................................................... 69 About this Owner Information......................................... 220 Traction Control........................................................................ 73 Disclaimers.................................................................................221 Park Assist...................................................................................74 Reporting Safety Defects....................................................223 Vehicle Hold................................................................................76 Declarations of Conformity................................................224 Acceleration Modes................................................................. 77 Trip Information........................................................................ 79 Getting Maximum Range...................................................... 80 Rear View Camera....................................................................82 Dashcam...................................................................................... 83 Active Spoiler.............................................................................85 Towing and Accessories........................................................ 86 Autopilot..........................................................96 About Autopilot........................................................................96 Traffic-Aware Cruise Control................................................99 Autosteer...................................................................................106 Autopark......................................................................................113 Summon.......................................................................................115 Smart Summon......................................................................... 118 Lane Assist..................................................................................121 Collision Avoidance Assist...................................................124 Speed Assist..............................................................................127 Using the Touchscreen..............................129 Controls...................................................................................... 129 Climate Controls..................................................................... 140 Maps and Navigation.............................................................146 Media and Audio..................................................................... 152 Phone...........................................................................................155 Air Suspension......................................................................... 157 Calendar.....................................................................................160 Security Settings......................................................................161 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver......................................164 Connecting to Wi-Fi...............................................................167 Software Updates...................................................................168 Mobile App................................................................................170

Interior Overview Overview Interior Overview 1. Interior door handles (Opening Doors from the Interior on page 9) 2. Traffic-Aware Cruise Control (Traffic-Aware Cruise Control on page 99) and Autosteer (Autosteer on page 106) 3. High beams (High Beam Headlights on page 60), Turn signals (Turn Signals on page 61), Wipers and washers (Wipers and Washers on page 68) 4. Steering wheel buttons - left (Using Left Steering Wheel Buttons on page 49) 5. Instrument panel (Instrument Panel on page 62) 6. Steering wheel buttons - right (Using Right Steering Wheel Buttons on page 50) 7. Gear selector (Shifting Gears on page 56) 8. Touchscreen (Touchscreen Overview on page 4) 9. Glovebox button (Glove Box on page 20) 10. Cabin climate control (Climate Controls on page 140) 11. Power window switches (Opening and Closing on page 15) 12. Exterior mirror adjustment switches (Mirrors on page 52) 13. Seats (Front and Rear Seats on page 24) 14. Steering column adjuster (hidden from view in the above image) (Steering Wheel on page 49) 15. Horn (Horn on page 51) 16. Brakes (Brakes on page 69) 17. Accelerator pedal (Acceleration Modes on page 77) 18. Hazard warning lights (Hazard Warning Flashers on page 61) 19. Cup holders (Cup Holders on page 22) 2 Model X Owner's Manual

Exterior Overview Exterior Overview 1. Exterior lights (Lights on page 58) 2. Front doors (Opening and Closing Front Doors from Outside Model X on page 9) 3. Falcon wing doors (Keys and Doors on page 6) 4. Charge port (Charging Instructions on page 175) 5. Active spoiler (optional) (Active Spoiler on page 85) 6. Autopilot cameras (About Autopilot on page 96) 7. Exterior mirrors (Mirrors on page 52) 8. Radar sensor (hidden from view in the above image) (About Autopilot on page 96) 9. Hood/Front trunk (Front Trunk on page 18) 10. Wheels and tires (Wheels and Tires on page 206) 11. Rear view camera (Rear View Camera on page 82 and About Autopilot on page 96) 12. Rear trunk/liftgate (Rear Trunk on page 16) 13. Ultrasonic sensors (Park Assist on page 74 and About Autopilot on page 96) Overview 3

Touchscreen Overview Touchscreen Overview The main components of the touchscreen are Touch to lock/unlock all doors and shown here. The touchscreen is used to trunks. control many features that, in traditional cars, are controlled using physical buttons (for Touch to display the charging screen example, adjusting the heating and air and access charge settings on the conditioning, headlights, etc.). You can also touchscreen. use the touchscreen to customize Model X to suit your preferences. Access information about your Warning: Always pay attention to road Model X. See The Tesla "T" on page and traffic conditions when driving. To 5. minimize driver distraction and ensure the Add, configure, or quickly switch safety of vehicle occupants as well as driver profiles (including Valet Mode other road users, avoid using the and Easy Entry). See Driver Profiles on touchscreen to adjust settings while the page 46. vehicle is in motion. Note: The image below is provided for Displays when a warning notification demonstration purposes only. Depending on is in effect. Touch to display vehicle options, software version and market information about the warning. region, your touchscreen may appear slightly Displays when a software update is different. available (see Software Updates on page 168). Displays when dashcam is ready to be used (you have inserted a supported flash drive into a front USB port). Touch to operate dashcam (see Dashcam on page 83). Touch to enable or disable Sentry Mode to actively monitor the vehicle's surroundings (see Sentry Mode on page 161). Control or program HomeLink devices (if equipped) (see HomeLink Universal Transceiver on page 164). Connected to a Wi-Fi network. Connected to cellular network. Touch to connect to Wi-Fi (see Connecting to Wi-Fi on page 167). Connect to a Bluetooth device (see Pairing a Bluetooth Phone on page 155). Displays the status of the front passenger airbag (applicable only in regions where the airbag can be disabled, as described in Airbags on page 41). 1. This area on the top of the touchscreen displays useful information and provides 2. Controls. Touch to control features and shortcuts to various features. In addition customize Model X to suit your to the time of day and the current outside preferences (see Controls on page 129). temperature, this area displays the 3. Media Player. (see Media and Audio on following icons: page 152). 4 Model X Owner's Manual

Touchscreen Overview 4. Touch the app launcher then choose from 7. The map displays on the touchscreen at all the following apps: times (see Maps and Navigation on page 146). Call. See Phone on page 155. Note: When you touch Controls, choose an app, or expand Media Player, the Calendar. See Calendar on page 160. window displays on top of the map. To close the Controls window, touch Controls again or touch the X in the top corner of Camera. Display the area behind the window. To close an app, touch the X Model X. This area also displays in the top corner of the window. To close automatically whenever you shift into Media Player, drag it all the way down to Reverse. See Rear View Camera on the bottom of the touchscreen or touch page 82. the icon again. Energy. See Getting Maximum Range The Tesla "T" on page 80. Touch the Tesla "T" at the top center of the Charging. See Charging Instructions touchscreen to display: on page 175. • Vehicle name (see Naming Your Vehicle on page 138).* Web. Access the Internet using the • Vehicle configuration.* web browser). • Odometer.* Entertainment. Browse the full library • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).* of games and access video streaming • Version of software currently installed on services, all from your vehicle's your Model X. touchscreen. To launch, Model X must • Acess to release notes associated with the be in Park. currently-installed software version.* Note: Due to vehicle configuration or • Acess to this owner's manual. market region, Entertainment, Arcade, • One-touch access to call Tesla Customer and/or Theater may not be available Support and Roadside Assistance (if on your vehicle. available in your market region). • One-touch access to all discovered Easter Toybox. Shortcut to Eater Eggs. See Eggs (see Easter Eggs on page 218). Easter Eggs on page 218. *You can also display this information by touching Controls > Software. Note: Swiping up on the app launcher displays the most recently used app (provided an app is not currently being displayed). Note: Depending on the market region and vehicle options, your vehicle may not be equipped with some features. 5. Climate Controls (see Climate Controls on page 140). 6. Volume Control (see Volume Control on page 152). Overview 5

Keys and Doors Opening and Closing Keys and Doors Keyless Locking and Unlocking Using the Key Locking and unlocking Model X is convenient. To quickly familiarize yourself with the key, Although you must be carrying a valid key, think of the key as a miniature version of there is no need to use it. Model X has sensors Model X, with the Tesla badge representing around the driver's door that can recognize the front. The key has three buttons on the top the presence of a key within a range of that feel like softer areas on the surface, and a approximately three feet (one meter). So, you metal button on each side representing the can keep your key in your pocket or purse and falcon wing doors. Model X detects it as you approach. When you walk up to Model X carrying your key, the doors automatically unlock if Passive Entry is on (Controls > Safety & Security > Passive Entry). To open the rear trunk, press the switch located under the trunk‡s exterior handle. Note: Model X must detect your key near the driver's door before the doors or rear trunk unlock. Note: If Passive Entry is off, you must use the key to unlock Model X. See Using the Key on page 6. If equipped with the premium upgrade package, and the Automatic Doors setting is turned on, when you walk up to Model X 1. Trunk carrying your key, doors automatically unlock • Double-click to open the rear trunk. and the driver's door partially opens. If not • If equipped with a powered liftgate, equipped, or if this setting is turned off, doors double-click to close the rear trunk. automatically unlock and a door opens when You can also single-click to stop the you press its handle. liftgate when it is moving. Note: You can choose whether you want all • Hold the button down for one to two doors, or just the driver's door, to unlock when seconds to open the charge port door. you approach Model X carrying your key (see 2. Lock/Unlock All Door Unlock Mode on page 12). When carrying your key with you, you can also • Single-click to lock all doors and rear open the rear trunk without having to use the trunk. Hazard warning lights flash key. Simply press the switch located under the once. trunk‡s exterior handle. Driver Door Unlock Note: If a door or the rear trunk is Mode (see Door Unlock Mode on page 12) open, hazard warning lights flash must be off and the vehicle must detect the three times and doors do not lock. But key near the driver's door before opening the you can enable a single-click to both rear trunk. close all doors (and rear trunk) and Model X also locks automatically. If you enable lock them, by turning on the Close All Walk Away Door Lock, Model X locks when with Key Fob setting (touch you walk away carrying your key with you (see Controls > Vehicle > Close All with Key Walk-Away Locking on page 12). Fob). By default, this setting is turned off and you must triple-click the In addition, you can set Model X to sound a button to close and lock all doors. soft horn whenever you car locks or unlocks. To set up, touch Controls > Vehicle > Lock Confirmation Sound. While sitting inside Model X, you can also lock and unlock the vehicle by touching the icon on the touchscreen's status bar or by touching Controls > Quick Controls. 6 Model X Owner's Manual

Keys and Doors • Double-click to unlock. Hazard Radio equipment on a similar frequency can warning lights flash twice. affect the key. If this happens, move the key at Note: If Model X is equipped with the least one foot (30 cm) away from other premium upgrades package and electronic devices (phone, laptop, etc). If the Automatic Doors is enabled (touch key does not work, you may need to change Controls > Vehicle > Automatic its battery. If the key‡s battery is discharged, Doors), doors unlock and the driver's you can open Model X by following the door opens as you approach Model X. unlocking procedure (see Unlocking When the A subsequent double-click opens the Key Doesn't Work on page 13). passenger front door. Caution: Remember to bring the key with 3. Front trunk you when you drive. Although you can • Double-click to open the front trunk. drive Model X away from its key, you will be unable to power it back on after it 4. Falcon wing doors powers off. • Double-click to open/close the Caution: Protect the key from impact, associated falcon wing door. high temperatures, and damage from • Single-click to stop movement of the liquids. Avoid contact with solvents, associated falcon wing door. waxes and abrasive cleaners. Subsequently double-clicking reverses movement of the falcon wing door. Replacing the Key Battery For example if the door was opening, The key‡s battery lasts for approximately a it closes, and vice versa. year with normal use. When the battery is low, Note: Falcon wing doors are designed a message displays on the instrument panel. to proactively detect obstacles that Follow these steps to replace it: prevent the doors from moving when Note: Tesla recommends replacing the battery an obstacle is detected. in all keys at the same time. Warning: Model X falcon wing 1. With the key placed button-side down on doors have several sensors to a soft surface, use a small flat-bladed tool detect the presence of an object or fingernail to release the bottom cover. in the door's path. In most cases, when an object is detected, the door stops moving. However, the sensors are unable to detect all areas under all circumstances, particularly when closing, Therefore, you must monitor the movement of falcon wing doors to ensure the door's path of movement is free of obstacles, staying prepared at all times to proactively intervene to stop the door from contacting an object (including a person). Failure to do Note: If a lanyard is attached to the key, so can cause serious damage or you can release the bottom cover by bodily injury. placing your thumb against the "X" on the You do not need to point the key at Model X, bottom cover, then firmly pulling the but you must be within operating range lanyard toward you (hence pushing the (which varies depending on the strength of key off of its cover). You can also pry the the key‡s battery). cover off by placing a small flat-bladed tool, a fingernail, or the Tesla-provided If Model X is unable to detect the key, the tool against the lanyard cord. touchscreen displays a message indicating that a key is not inside. Place the key where Model X can best detect it, which is below the 12V power socket (see Key Not Inside on page 54). Opening and Closing 7

Keys and Doors 2. Remove the battery by carefully releasing 3. Insert the new battery (type CR2354) with it from the retaining clips at an angle. the ˆ+‡ side facing up. The battery fits snugly so you must slide it into position at an angle toward the Positive contact (the contact located near the center of the key), then press down firmly on the other side, ensuring it is held firmly in its intended position. Note: Tesla recommends using Panasonic CR2354 batteries. These can be purchased through online retailers, local supermarkets, and drug stores. Caution: The battery should press against the spring on the positive contact. Do not place the battery on top of the contact and force it down vertically. Doing so may damage the contact. Note: Wipe the battery clean before fitting and avoid touching the battery's flat surfaces. Finger marks on the flat surfaces of the battery can reduce battery life. 4. Holding the cover at an angle, align the tabs on the widest side of the cover with the corresponding slots on the key, then press the cover firmly onto the key until it snaps into place. 5. Test that the key works by unlocking and locking your vehicle. 8 Model X Owner's Manual

Keys and Doors Attaching a Lanyard Opening and Closing Front Doors The Model X key supports the use of a small from Outside Model X lanyard. To attach a lanyard, release the Model X doors are electrically powered. When bottom cover as described above. Place the you approach Model X carrying the key, you lanyard over the pin on the back side of the can specify that you want to unlock only the key. Re-align the cover and snap into place. driver's door by touching Controls > Vehicle > Driver Door Unlock Mode. If equipped, you can also set the driver's door to open automatically upon your approach. The door partially opens (between 20° and 45° depending on obstacles detected by sensors). Touch Controls > Vehicle > Automatic Doors. If this setting is on, you can Getting More Keys also open the driver's door by double-clicking If you lose a key or require an additional one, the key's lock/unlock button. A subsequent contact Tesla. Model X can recognize up to double-click opens the front passenger door. eight keys. Caution: The front doors may not fully When ordering a new key for Model X, take all open or close automatically when parked available keys with you for reprogramming. on a very steep hill. Never rely on Model X to fully open or close the doors for you when parked on a steep hill. Opening Doors from the Interior Note: Depending on date of manufacture and To open a front door, pull the interior door options chosen at time of purchase, your handle toward you. Model X may not be equipped with automatic doors. Whenever a door is open, the Door Open indicator displays on the instrument panel. Also, the image of the Model X on the touchscreen's Controls > Quick Controls window also provides a visual representation of an open door or trunk. To close doors, you can: • Manually push them shut. • Use the touchscreen (Controls > Quick Controls) to close each individual door (or trunk). You can also use the touchscreen to open and • Single-click or triple-click the key's lock/ close doors when inside Model X. Touch unlock button (if the Close All with Key Controls > Quick Controls, then choose the Fob setting is on, only a single click is door you want to open or close. In addition, if needed to close all doors and trunks—a Model X is equipped with the premium triple-click is needed if the setting is off). upgrades package, when you press the brake Note: Powered doors stop moving if an pedal, the driver's door automatically closes. obstacle is detected. Note: To prevent children from opening falcon Warning: Before allowing an automated wing doors using the interior handles, use the feature to open or close a front door touchscreen, Controls > Vehicle > Child- (rather than doing so manually), it is Protection Lock, to turn on the child- important to check that the area around protection locks (see Child-Protection Lock on the door is free of obstacles (such as page 12). people and objects). You must proactively monitor the door's movement to ensure that it does not contact a person or Opening and Closing 9

Keys and Doors object. Failure to do so can result in To open a falcon wing door from inside Model damage or serious injury. X, press the switch located on the door pillar, or touch the associated door icon on the Opening and Closing Falcon Wing touchscreen (Controls > Quick Controls): Doors Model X has electrically-powered falcon wing doors that easily open and close by pressing a button, using the key, or touching the associated icon on the touchscreen (Controls > Quick Controls). The falcon wing doors are equipped with several sensors that detect the presence of people and objects and, if an object is detected, the door stops moving. Based on detected objects, the doors may adjust their outward and upward movement in an attempt to avoid contacting the object. For example, if an object is detected above Model X, the door's movement may extend further outward but lower, whereas if an object is detected beside the door, the door may extend outward much less. Warning: It is important to keep your Note: If Model X is locked, using the switch hands clear of the falcon wing door (illustrated above) the first time unlocks the frames at all times. Proactively check the associated door. Pulling it a second time door frame area prior to closing, and opens it. monitor the movement of the door during closing to ensure that it does not come To close a falcon wing door, press the button into contact with a person or object. located on the inside of the door. You can also Failure to do so can result in damage or use the key (see Using the Key on page 6), use serious injury. the switch on the door pillar (illustrated Warning: Before opening or closing a above), or touch the associated door icon on falcon wing door, it is important to check the touchscreen (Controls > Quick Controls). that the area around the door is free of obstacles (people and objects). Although the doors have many sensors, it can not detect all objects at all times, particularly when moving. At any given moment, there may be areas near the door that are not in the detection zone. Therefore, when opening or closing a falcon wing door, you and your passengers must stand away from the door as it is moving, while proactively monitoring the door's movement and being prepared to take corrective action at any time. To stop a door from moving, single-click the falcon wing door button on the key, press the Note: To prevent children from opening falcon switch on the door or door pillar, or touch wing doors using the interior switch, turn on the button on the touchscreen. child-protection locks using the touchscreen To open a falcon wing door from outside (Controls > Vehicle > Child- Protection Lock). Model X, press the door handle or press the See Child-Protection Lock on page 12. falcon wing door button on the key (see Using Note: You can configure Model X to open the the Key on page 6). falcon wing doors to a lower height setting by using the touchscreen (Controls > Vehicle > Falcon Door Height). 10 Model X Owner's Manual

Keys and Doors Note: If a falcon wing door detects an obstacle Obstacle Detection while closing, it reverses a few inches before it A falcon wing door stops moving when one of stops moving. its many sensors detects an obstacle, or when Warning: Whenever a front door is the door senses resistance because it has partially open (approximately 20°) as you made contact with an object. The touchscreen are opening or closing the associated displays a warning. In these cases, provided it falcon wing door, you MUST keep your is appropriate to continue opening or closing hands (or any object) away from the the falcon wing door, you can override opening edge of the front door. When a obstacle detection by pressing and holding falcon wing door passes by a partially the switch located on the door pillar, or opened front door, the distance between touching and holding the associated door icon the two doors is very narrow. Objects, on the touchscreen. such as hands or fingers, placed in this When Model X detects a low ceiling (for area, are not detected by sensors and can example, in a garage), it opens the falcon wing therefore become pinched between the doors (and trunk) to a lower height, even if no doors. To avoid bodily injury, it is a good obstacle is detected. You can override this practice to keep your hands away from height and open the doors higher by touching the front door whenever you are opening the associated door icon on the touchscreen or closing a falcon wing door. (Controls > Quick Controls). The touchscreen displays a message asking you if you always want to open the doors to the higher height at this location, and saves your choice. The next time you open the falcon wing doors at this location, Model X opens them to the height you saved. Warning: Before overriding a falcon wing door's default opening height, visually inspect the area to ensure adequate clearance between the door and the detected object. Warning: Applying adhesive products such as wraps, stickers, rubber coating, etc. on the outside of the falcon wing doors can affect the sensors‡ ability to detect obstacles properly. Calibration Warning: When opening or closing a If the falcon wing doors lose calibration, a falcon wing door, it is important to message displays on the touchscreen. To proactively monitor the movement of the calibrate the doors, first ensure that both door to ensure that it does not come into doors have plenty of space to open and close contact with a person or object. Failure to and are clear of passengers, objects, etc. Then do so can cause serious damage or injury. press and hold the Calibrate button until five seconds after calibration is complete. During Caution: Remove accumulation of snow calibration, the lower door opens all the way or ice before opening a falcon wing door. out (requiring extra space on the side of Snow can get inside Model X and ice can Model X), the upper door moves all the way prevent the door from opening. down, and then the lower door closes. Caution: In rainy weather, leaving a falcon wing open while opening the liftgate can Interior Locking and Unlocking result in rain water falling from the liftgate From inside Model X, you can use the into the rear seating area. touchscreen to lock or unlock doors and Note: Falcon wing doors open only when trunks, provided a valid key is inside the Model X is stationary. vehicle. Touch the lock icon on the touchscreen's status bar. Opening and Closing 11

Keys and Doors When you stop Model X and engage the Park open a door within this minute, it does not re- gear, you can choose whether you want doors lock until after all the doors are closed and to unlock or remain locked. To do so, touch you have walked away with the key. Controls > Vehicle > Unlock on Park. When Note: If your vehicle was unlocked using the enabled, doors automatically unlock when you mobile app, it automatically locks after a short engage the Park gear. period of time with all doors closed. If parking You can also unlock doors by pressing the in an area without cellular service, such as an Park button on the end of the gear selector a indoor parking garage, ensure that you have a second time (for example, after pressing it one functional key fob readily available. time to engage the Park gear). Note: If a door or trunk is still open when you lock Model X, it locks when you close it. Door Unlock Mode You can choose to unlock only the driver's door when you approach your vehicle carrying your key or when you shift into Park. To do so, touch Controls > Vehicle > Driver Door Unlock Mode. Child-Protection Lock Model X has child-protection locks on the falcon wing doors and liftgate to prevent them from being opened using interior handles. Use the touchscreen to turn child-protection locks on or off. Touch Controls > Vehicle > Child- Protection Lock. Note: It is recommended that you turn child- protection locks on whenever children are seated in the rear seats. Drive Away Locking Model X automatically locks all doors (including the trunks) whenever your driving speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). Walk-Away Locking Doors and trunks automatically lock whenever you walk away carrying the key or if the key is otherwise not detected by your vehicle (not present, dead battery, etc.). To turn this feature on or off, touch Controls > Vehicle > Walk-Away Door Lock. Note: If Model X detects an authenticated key for five minutes after you exit the vehicle and close all doors, Walk-Away Lock disables and will not lock when you leave with the key. You will need to manually lock your vehicle until after your next drive. Note: If all doors are closed and you use the key to unlock Model X, walk away locking is temporarily suspended for one minute. If you 12 Model X Owner's Manual

Keys and Doors Unlocking When the Key Doesn't Work If Model X does not unlock when you walk up to it, or when you double-click the unlock button on the top of your key, the key‡s battery may be dead. Even if this is the case, you can still use the key to unlock and drive Model X. Note: Although you can still use your key, you should consider using the mobile app to remotely unlock and start the vehicle. Then, replace your key's battery when convenient. To unlock Model X (and disable the security alarm) using the key, first position the key at the base of the door pillar between the front door and the falcon wing door, on the driver's Note: Unlocking Model X using this method side of the vehicle. Then press the driver's disables walk away locking. You must door handle. If Model X doesn't unlock, try manually re-enable walk away locking after adjusting the position of the key and try again. replacing the key‡s battery. The key must be in the correct position for the vehicle to unlock. If Model X still doesn't unlock, remove and reinstall the key's battery and try again. Note: The following illustration assumes a left hand drive (LHD) vehicle. On a right hand drive (RHD) vehicle, the locations are mirrored. To drive Model X after gaining access to the cabin, place the bottom of the key against the center console, immediately below the 12V power outlet, then press and hold the brake pedal to start Model X. Opening and Closing 13

Keys and Doors Opening Interior Doors with No Power If Model X has no electrical power, the front doors open as usual using the interior door handles. To open the rear doors, carefully remove the speaker grille from the door and pull the mechanical release cable down and towards the front of the vehicle. After the latch is released, manually lift up the door. 14 Model X Owner's Manual

Windows Windows Opening and Closing Locking Rear Windows Press down on a switch to lower the To prevent passengers from using the rear associated window. Window switches operate window switches, press the rear window lock at two levels: switch. The switch light turns on. To unlock • To lower a window fully, press the switch rear windows, press the switch again. all the way down and immediately release. • To lower a window partially, press the switch gently and release when the window is where you want it. Warning: To ensure safety, it is recommended that you lock the rear window switches whenever children are seated in the rear seats. Similarly, pull a switch to raise the associated Warning: Never leave children unattended window: in Model X. • To raise a window fully, pull the switch all the way up and immediately release. • To raise a window partially, pull the switch gently and release when the window is where you want it. Warning: Before closing a window, it is the driver‡s responsibility to ensure that all occupants, especially children, do not have any body parts extended through the window‡s opening. Failure to do so can cause serious injury. Opening and Closing 15

Rear Trunk Rear Trunk Opening If Model X detects a low ceiling (for example, in a garage), it opens the rear trunk (and To open the rear trunk, ensure the vehicle is in falcon wing doors) to a lower height, even if Park then do one of the following: no obstacle is detected. You can override this • Touch Controls > Quick Controls > TRUNK height manually by opening the rear trunk to a on the touchscreen. higher height. Model X asks you on the • Double-click the rear trunk button on the touchscreen if you always want to open the key. trunk to the higher height in this location, and • Touch the trunk button on the mobile app. saves your choice. The next time you open the falcon wing doors in this location, Model X • With Model X unlocked, press the switch opens them to the height you saved. located under the rear trunk's exterior Warning: Before opening or closing the handle. liftgate, it is important to check that the Note: If Passive Entry is off, you must use the area around the liftgate is free of key to unlock Model X before you can use the obstacles (people and objects). Although switch to manually open the rear trunk. See the powered liftgate can detect obstacles, Using the Key on page 6. it can not detect all objects at all times. Do not rely on the liftgate to sense an obstruction when opening or closing. You must proactively monitor the liftgate to ensure that it does not come into contact with a person or object. Failure to do so may result in damage or serious injury. Load Limits Secure all cargo before moving Model X, and place heavy cargo in the lower trunk compartment. Caution: To avoid damage, never load When a door or trunk/liftgate is more than 175 lbs (80 kg) on the rear load open, the instrument panel displays floor (above the lower trunk the Door Open indicator light. The compartment) or more than 285 lbs (130 image of your Model X on the kg) in the lower trunk compartment. touchscreen also displays the open Doing so can cause damage. trunk. Closing To stop a powered liftgate while it is moving, To close the powered liftgate, do one of the single-click the rear trunk button on the key following: fob. Then, when you double-click the rear • Touch Controls > Quick Controls > TRUNK trunk button, it moves again, but in the on the touchscreen. opposite direction (provided it was not almost • Double-click the trunk button on the key entirely open or closed when you stopped it). fob. For example, if you single-click to stop the • Press the switch located on the underside liftgate while it is opening, when you double- of the liftgate (see Adjusting Liftgate click, it closes. Opening Height on page 17). To open the rear trunk from inside Model X in If a powered liftgate senses an obstruction the unlikely situation that Model X has no when closing, it automatically opens and power, see Interior Emergency Trunk Release sounds five chimes. Remove the obstruction on page 17. and try closing it again. If it cannot close the second time, powered operation is temporarily disabled. Close it manually to restore powered operation. 16 Model X Owner's Manual

Rear Trunk Note: The power closing feature is also 285 lbs (130 kg) in the lower trunk temporarily disabled if you leave the powered compartment. Doing so can cause liftgate open for more than an hour. damage. Adjusting Liftgate Opening Height Interior Emergency Trunk Release You can adjust the opening height of the An illuminated mechanical release located powered liftgate to make it easier to reach or inside the rear trunk allows you to open the to avoid low-hanging ceilings or objects (for rear trunk from the inside if Model X has no example, a garage door or light): electrical power. This mechanical release also 1. Open the liftgate, then manually lower or allows a person locked inside to get out. raise it to the desired opening height. 2. Press and hold the button on the underside of the liftgate for two seconds until you hear a confirmation chime. 1. Remove the cover by pulling its lower edge very firmly toward you. 2. Pull the cable to release the latch. 3. Push the rear trunk open. Note: The button glows for several hours after a brief exposure to ambient light. Warning: Do not allow children to play 3. Confirm that you have set it to the desired inside the trunk or become locked inside. height by closing the liftgate, then An unrestrained child could suffer serious reopening it. injury or death in a crash. A child could suffer heat exhaustion if trapped in the Accessing the Cargo Area vehicle, especially without climate control on. To access the cargo area inside the Model X rear trunk, push down on the ridged portion of the handle of the cargo cover and then pull up. You can then adjust the position of the cargo cover or completely remove it from Model X. Caution: Never load more than 175 lbs (80 kg) on the rear load floor (above the lower trunk compartment) or more than Opening and Closing 17

Front Trunk Front Trunk Opening 3. Carefully try to lift the front edge of the hood to ensure that it is fully closed. To open the front trunk: 1. Ensure that the area around the hood is free of obstacles. 2. Touch Controls > Quick Controls > FRONT TRUNK on the touchscreen, touch the front trunk button on the mobile app, or double-click the front trunk button on the key. 3. Pull the hood up. Caution: To prevent damage: • Apply pressure only to the green areas shown. Applying pressure to the red areas can cause damage. • Do not close the hood with one hand. Doing so applies concentrated force When a door or trunk/liftgate is in one area and can result in a dent or open, the instrument panel displays crease. the Door Open indicator light. The • Do not apply pressure to the front image of your Model X on the edge of the hood. Doing so can touchscreen also displays the open crease the edge. front trunk. • Do not slam or drop the hood. Warning: Before opening or closing the Warning: Before driving, you must ensure hood, it is important to check that the that the hood is securely latched in the area around the hood is free of obstacles fully closed position by carefully trying to (people and objects). Failure to do so lift the front edge of the hood upward may result in damage or serious injury. and confirming there is no movement. Note: The front trunk locks whenever closed Interior Emergency Release and you lock Model X using either the touchscreen or externally using the key or An illuminated interior release button inside mobile app, you leave Model X carrying your the front trunk allows a person locked inside key (if Walk-Away Locking on page 12 is to get out. turned on), or when Valet mode is active (see Valet Mode on page 47). Closing The Model X hood is not heavy enough to latch under its own weight and applying pressure on the front edge or center of the hood can cause damage. To properly close the hood: 1. Lower the hood until the striker touches the latches. Press the interior release button to open the 2. Place both hands on the front of the hood front trunk, then push up on the hood. in the areas shown (in green), then press Note: The interior release button glows down firmly to engage the latches. following a brief exposure to ambient light. 18 Model X Owner's Manual

Front Trunk Warning: People should never climb inside the front trunk. Never shut the front trunk when a person is inside. Warning: Care should be taken to ensure that objects inside the front trunk do not bump against the release button, causing the trunk to accidentally open. Opening and Closing 19

Interior Storage and Electronics Interior Storage and Electronics Glove Box In addition, Model X has two charge-only USB ports located at the rear of the center console, To open the glove box, press the switch and another charge-only connection located located on the side of the touchscreen. The between the third row seats. glove box locks whenever Model X is locked Note: You can charge four devices externally, using the key or walk-away locking. simultaneously using the two ports at the It also locks when Model X is in Valet mode front of the center console and the two at the (see Valet Mode on page 47). It does not rear of the console. lock when you lock Model X using the lock icon on the touchscreen's status bar. Note: Power is available whenever the vehicle is considered "awake" The vehicle may be awake for many reasons. For example, when using features such as Summon, or when features such as Smart Preconditioning, Cabin Overheat Protection, Keep Climate On, Dog Mode, Sentry Mode, etc. are enabled. The vehicle is also awake whenever the 12V battery is being charged or is in use, during HV charging, when the vehicle is communicating with the mobile app, etc. Leaving an accessory plugged in does not deplete the 12V battery. 12V Power Socket Your Model X has a power socket located on Note: If you leave the glove box open, its light the front of the center console. An additional eventually turns off. 12V power socket is located in the rear trunk. Power is available whenever the instrument Warning: When driving, keep the glove panel and touchscreen are on. box closed to prevent injury to a passenger if a collision or sudden stop occurs. USB Ports Your Model X has two USB ports located on the front of the center console that you can use to connect USB devices. To play audio files stored on a USB drive connected to these ports, see Playing Media from Devices on page 154. You can also use these ports to charge USB devices. The 12V power sockets are suitable for accessories requiring up to 11A continuous draw (15A peak) or a maximum of 150 continuous watts (180 watts peak). Note: Power is available whenever the vehicle is considered "awake" The vehicle may be awake for many reasons. For example, when using features such as Summon, or when features such as Smart Preconditioning, Cabin Overheat Protection, Keep Climate On, Dog Mode, Sentry Mode, etc. are enabled. The vehicle is also awake whenever the 12V battery is being charged or is in use, during HV charging, when the vehicle is communicating 20 Model X Owner's Manual

Interior Storage and Electronics with the mobile app, etc. Leaving an accessory plugged in does not deplete the 12V battery. Note: In situations where Model X is unable to detect the key (low battery, interference, etc.), place it immediately below the 12V power socket in the center console where Model X can best detect it. Warning: The power socket and an accessory‡s connector can become hot. Opening and Closing 21

Interior Storage and Electronics Cup Holders To expose a front cup holder, slide back the armrest. To expose rear cup holders (if available on your vehicle), press and release the cup holder face plate located at the back of the center console. 22 Model X Owner's Manual

Sun Visors Sun Visors The sun visors in Model X are held in place by magnets. To protect occupants from sunlight coming through the windshield, release the sun visor from the pillar and pivot it toward the rear view mirror until the magnet snaps into place. While held in place by the magnet, you can adjust the sun visor and lower the extender to provide maximum shade. To expose the vanity mirror, lower the visor extender then lower the mirror cover. While the cover is lowered, the mirror is exposed and lights are illuminated. To protect front seat occupants from sunlight coming through the side window, lower the sun visor from the pillar then lower the visor extender. Opening and Closing 23

Front and Rear Seats Seating and Safety Restraints Front and Rear Seats Correct Driving Position Adjusting the Front Seats The seat, head support, seat belt and airbags work together to maximize your safety. Using these correctly ensures greater protection. Position the seat so you can wear the seat belt correctly, while being as far away from the front airbag as possible: 1. Sit upright with both feet on the floor and the seat back reclined no more than 30 degrees. 2. Make sure you can easily reach the pedals and that your arms are slightly bent when holding the steering wheel. Your chest should be at least 10 inches (25 cm) from the center of the airbag cover. 3. Place the shoulder section of the seat belt mid-way between your neck and your shoulder. Fit the lap section of the belt tightly across your hips, not across your stomach. Model X seats include integrated head supports that cannot be adjusted or removed. 1. Move seat forward/backward and adjust the seat‡s height and tilt angle up/down. 2. Adjust backrest. 3. Adjust lumbar support. Warning: Before adjusting a front seat, check that the area around the seat is free of obstacles (people and objects). Warning: Do not adjust seats while driving. Doing so increases the risk of a collision. Warning: Riding in a moving vehicle with the seat back reclined can result in serious injuries in a collision, as you could slide under the lap belt or be propelled into the seat belt. Ensure your seat back is reclined no more than 30 degrees when the vehicle is moving. 24 Model X Owner's Manual

Front and Rear Seats Adjusting Second Row Monopost 1. Move seat forward/backward (up/down Seats on the control) and adjust the backrest (left/right on the control). A Model X equipped with monopost seats can 2. Move seat forward/backward. accommodate two or three passengers in the 3. Adjust backrest. second row, depending on the option chosen at time of purchase. There are two ways to Note: The backrest locks into position when adjust the position of these seats: you release the lever. If a backrest is not • Touch Controls > Seats on the locked into position when a driving gear is touchscreen. Press and hold the icon engaged, the instrument panel displays an associated with the seat you want to alert for the unlocked backrest. Adjust the adjust. White icons indicate that the seat backrest again, ensuring it locks into position. can be moved in that direction; gray icons Warning: Before driving, ensure the seat indicate that the seat cannot be moved is locked in position. You may need to pull any farther in that direction. the seat forward or backward until it Note: The front seats may move forward clicks into place. slightly to accommodate the forward Adjusting Second Row Seat Backs movement of the second row seats. • Use the manual adjustments illustrated (Bench Seats) below. In addition to moving a seat If your Model X is equipped with two seating forward/rearward, the manual seat rows, the second row bench seats can adjustments allow you to adjust the accommodate up to three passengers. Use the backrest. Although the control on the mechanical adjustment lever located at the outboard seats is L-shaped, and the side of each outboard seating position to control on the middle seat is circular, they adjust the seat backs. A bench seat is split both provide the same functions. 60/40 so the adjustment lever on the left side moves the seat backs for both the left and center seats, whereas the lever on the right side moves the rightmost seat back only. While pulling and holding the lever, move the seat back to the desired position, and then release the lever. When returning a seat back to its upright position, try moving it forward or back to ensure it is securely latched into position. Seating and Safety Restraints 25

Front and Rear Seats Moving Second Row Bench Seats Note: Only bench seats in seven-seat vehicles can be moved forward and rearward. The bench seats in five-seat vehicles are stationary. Use the mechanical lever located beneath each outboard seating position to move the second row seats forward or rearward. The bench seats have a 60/40 split—therefore, the lever on the left side moves the seat for the left and center seats, whereas the lever on the right side moves only the rightmost seat. Pull and hold the lever while moving the seat forward or rearward. Release the lever when the seat is at the desired location. Warning: Riding in a moving vehicle with Note: You can adjust the position of bench the seat back reclined can result in seats using the mechanical levers only. You serious injuries in a collision, as you could cannot use the touchscreen to adjust bench slide under the lap belt or be propelled seats. into the seat belt. Ensure the backs of occupied seats are reclined no more than 30 degrees when the vehicle is moving. Accessing Third Row Seats (if equipped) - Monopost Seating Folding Second Row Seat Backs A third row ingress button is located on the (Bench Seats) backrest of each second row outboard The second row seat backs on bench seats monopost seat. This button makes it easy for can be folded fully forward so they lay flat and passengers to enter and exit the third row maximize cargo space. Pull up the mechanical seating positions. Touch Controls > Seats > lever located on the side of each outboard Easy Entry and choose how you want this seat (the same lever you use to recline the button to work: seats, as described above), then push the seat • ON - Allows you to tilt and move the back fully forward. The bench seats have a associated outboard seat fully forward, 60/40 split—therefore, the adjustment lever and the center seat partially forward, with on the left side folds the seat backs for both a single-press of the button. the left and center seats, whereas the lever on • OFF - When off, which is recommended if the right folds the rightmost seat back only. a child seat is installed in the second row, Note: Before folding seats fully forward, you must hold the button to move the remove any items from the seats and the rear second row seats forward. footwell. To allow the seat backs to fold completely flat, you may need to move the front seats forward. 26 Model X Owner's Manual

Front and Rear Seats After using the third row ingress button to • Forward movement of second row access third row seats, simply press the button monopost seats cancels if an occupant again to return the seats to their normal adjusts a second row seat while it is position. moving. • When an outboard seat tilts forward after pressing the button, its backrest resets to the forward position and may need to be re-adjusted for comfort. Warning: Use the third row ingress button to access the third row ONLY when the second row seats are unoccupied. Do not rely on Model X to recognize or accommodate occupants seated in the vehicle while using the button. Warning: Always ensure that the seat is locked in position before traveling. Failure to do so increases the risk of injury. Accessing Third Row Seats (if equipped) - Bench Seating A button is located on the backrest of each second row outboard bench seat. This third row ingress button makes it easy for passengers to enter and exit the third row seating positions. Press and release the button on the left outboard seat to tilt and move the combined left and center seats forward. Press and release the button on the right outboard seat to tilt and move the right seat forward. Warning: For vehicles with third row seats, do not use the third row ingress button located on the backrest of a second row outboard seat when a child is seated in the second row. Using the button tilts and moves the seats forward and can squeeze the occupant. Do not rely on Model X to recognize or accommodate occupants seated in the vehicle while using this button. Use this button only when the second row seats Warning: For vehicles with third row are unoccupied. seats, do not use the third row ingress Guidelines for using the third row ingress button located on the backrest of a button: second row outboard bench seat when a • If a front row seat is positioned such that child is seated in the second row. Using the second row seat will collide with it the button allows the combined left and during an easy entry operation, it center seats to be moved forward and automatically moves forward just enough can squeeze the occupant. Use this to accommodate the forward position of button only when the second row seats the second row monopost seat. are unoccupied. Before driving, ensure the seat and the seat back are securely latched into position. Seating and Safety Restraints 27

Front and Rear Seats In some situations, such as when you are from the rear of the vehicle (trunk, suspension, parked on an incline or when the seat's trim etc.). affects the movement of the bench seats after Note: To raise the seats, hold the button on you press the button, the bench seats might the top outside corner of the seat then pull not move forward completely, and you may the seat back upward until it latches into need to push the seats forward gently until place. Try pulling the seat back forward to they reach the end of the track. confirm that it is locked in the upright Warning: After you use the third row position. ingress button to access the third row Warning: Always ensure the seats and seats, push the bench seats back to their seat backs are locked in their upright seating position, ensuring the seats are position before travel. Failure to do so securely latched into position by trying to increases the risk of injury. move them forward and rearward. Failure to do so increases the risk of injury. Warning: The seat must be fully latched Seat Heaters into position before driving. Push or pull The front seats contain heating pads that the seat until you hear the seat "click" operate at three levels from 3 (highest) to 1 into place. (lowest). To operate the seat heaters, see Climate Controls on page 140. Folding Third Row Seat Backs (if If Model X is equipped with the cold weather equipped) package, you can also control seat heaters in all rear seating positions, as well as heated To fold a third row seat, press the button wipers and washer nozzles by touching the located in the top outside corner of the seat. climate controls on the touchscreen (see The button has two detents. Climate Controls on page 140). Warning: To avoid burns resulting from prolonged use, individuals who have peripheral neuropathy, or whose capacity to feel pain is limited because of diabetes, age, neurological injury, or some other condition, should exercise caution when using the climate control system and seat heaters. Seat Covers Warning: Do not use seat covers in Model X. Doing so could restrict deployment of the seat-mounted side air bags if a collision occurs. Also, if the vehicle is equipped with an occupant detection system that is used to determine the status of the passenger front airbag, seat covers may interfere 1. Fold head restraint forward. with this system. 2. Fold seat back forward. Note: Before folding third row seat backs, remove any items from the seats and the footwell. To allow the seat backs to fold completely flat, you may need to move the second row seats forward. Note: Driving with the third row seats backs folded forward might result in increased perceivable noise and/or vibration coming 28 Model X Owner's Manual

Seat Belts Seat Belts Wearing Seat Belts 3. Insert the latch plate into the buckle and press together until you hear a click Using seat belts and child safety seats is the indicating it is locked in place. most effective way to protect occupants if a collision occurs. Therefore, wearing a seat belt is required by law in most jurisdictions. Both the driver and passenger seats are equipped with three-point inertia reel seat belts. Inertia reel belts are automatically tensioned to allow occupants to move comfortably during normal driving conditions. To securely hold child safety seats, all passenger seating positions are equipped with an automatic locking retractor (ALR) that, by pulling the seat belt beyond the length needed for a typical adult occupant, locks the belt into place until the seat belt is unbuckled. The seat belt reel automatically locks to 4. Pull the belt to check that it is securely prevent movement of occupants if Model X fastened. experiences a force associated with hard 5. Pull the diagonal part of the belt toward acceleration, braking, cornering, or an impact the reel to remove excess slack. in a collision. To Adjust the Shoulder Anchor Seat Belt Reminders Height The seat belt reminder on the Model X is equipped with an adjustable instrument panel alerts you if a seat shoulder anchor for each front seat to ensure belt for an occupied driver or that the seat belt is positioned correctly. The passenger seat is unbuckled. If the seat belt should lay flat across the mid-point belt remains unbuckled, the of your collar bone while in the correct driving reminder flashes and an intermittent position (see Correct Driving Position on page chime sounds. If all occupants are 24). Adjust the height of the shoulder anchor buckled up and the reminder stays if the seat belt is not positioned correctly: on, re-buckle seat belts to ensure 1. Press and hold the button on the shoulder they are correctly latched. Also anchor to release the locking mechanism. remove any heavy objects (such as a 2. While holding the button, move the briefcase) from an unoccupied seat. shoulder anchor up or down as necessary If the reminder light continues to so that the seat belt is positioned stay on, contact Tesla. correctly. Warning: Seat belts must be worn by passengers in all seating positions. To Fasten a Belt 1. Ensure correct positioning of the seat (see Correct Driving Position on page 24). 2. Draw the belt out smoothly, ensuring the belt lays flat across the pelvis, chest and mid-point of your collar bone, between the neck and shoulder. 3. Release the button on the shoulder anchor so that it locks into position. 4. Without pressing the button, pull on the seat belt webbing and attempt to move the shoulder anchor downwards to check that it is locked into position. Seating and Safety Restraints 29

Seat Belts Warning: Ensure that the seat belt is Seat Belt Pre-tensioners positioned correctly and that the shoulder anchor is locked into position The front seat belts are equipped with before driving. Riding in a moving vehicle pre‑tensioners that work in conjunction with with the seat belt positioned incorrectly the airbags in a severe frontal collision. The or with the shoulder anchor not locked pre‑tensioners automatically retract both the into position can reduce the effectiveness seat belt anchor and the seat belt webbing, of the seat belt in a collision. reducing slack in both the lap and diagonal portions of the belts, resulting in reduced To Release a Belt forward movement of the occupant. The second row outboard seats are equipped Hold the belt near the buckle to prevent the with shoulder pre-tensioners to retract the belt from retracting too quickly, then press the seat belt webbing to reduce forward button on the buckle. The belt retracts movement of the occupant. automatically. Ensure there is no obstruction that prevents the belt from fully retracting. The belt should not hang loose. If a seat belt does not fully retract, contact Tesla. Wearing Seat Belts When Pregnant Do not put the lap or shoulder sections of the seat belt over the abdominal area. Wear the lap section of the belt as low as possible across the hips, not the waist. Position the shoulder portion of the belt between the breasts and to the side of the abdomen. Consult your doctor for specific guidance. If the pre-tensioners and airbags did not activate in an impact, this does not mean they malfunctioned. It usually means that the strength or type of force needed to activate them was not present. Warning: Once the seat belt pre- tensioners have been activated, they must be replaced. After any collision, have the airbags, seat belt pre-tensioners and any associated components checked and, if necessary, replaced. Testing Seat Belts To confirm that seat belts are operating correctly, perform these three simple checks on each seat belt. Warning: Never place anything between 1. With the seat belt fastened, give the you and the seat belt to cushion the webbing nearest the buckle a quick pull. impact in the event of a collision. The buckle should remain securely locked. 2. With the belt unfastened, unreel the webbing to its limit. Check that unreeling is free from snags, and visually check the webbing for wear. Allow the webbing to retract, checking that retraction is smooth and complete. 30 Model X Owner's Manual

Seat Belts 3. With the webbing half unreeled, hold the adjusted to remove slack. A slack belt tongue plate and pull forward quickly. The greatly reduces occupant protection. mechanism should lock automatically and Warning: Do not make modifications that prevent further unreeling. can interfere with the operation of a seat If a seat belt fails any of these tests, contact belt, or that can cause a seat belt to Tesla immediately. become inoperable. For information about cleaning seat belts, see Warning: When seat belts are not in use, Seat Belts on page 191. they should be fully retracted and not hanging loose. If a seat belt does not fully Seat Belt Warnings retract, contact Tesla. Warning: Seat belts should be worn by all occupants at all times, even if driving for a very short distance. Failure to do so increases the risk of injury or death if a collision occurs. Warning: Secure small children in a suitable child safety seat as described in the Child Safety Seat topic. Always follow the child safety seat manufacturer's instructions when installing. Warning: Ensure that all seat belts are worn correctly. An improperly worn seat belt increases the risk of injury or death if a collision occurs. Warning: Do not wear seat belts over hard, fragile or sharp items in clothing, such as pens, keys, eyeglasses, etc. The pressure from the seat belt on such items can cause injury. Warning: Seat belts should not be worn with any part of the strap twisted. Warning: Each seat belt assembly must be used by one occupant only. It is dangerous to put a seat belt around a child being carried on an occupant‡s lap. Warning: Seat belts that have been worn in a collision must be inspected or replaced by Tesla, even if damage to the assembly is not obvious. Warning: Seat belts that show signs of wear (such as fraying), or have been cut or damaged in any way, must be replaced by Tesla. Warning: Avoid contaminating a seat belt‡s components with any chemicals, liquids, grit, dirt or cleaning products. If a seat belt fails to retract or latch into the buckle, it must be replaced immediately. Contact Tesla. Warning: Do not make modifications or additions that can prevent a seat belt mechanism from taking up slack, or that can prevent a seat belt from being Seating and Safety Restraints 31

Child Safety Seats Child Safety Seats Guidelines for Seating Children Your Model X seat belts are designed for adults and larger children. You must restrain infants and small children in the second and rear row seats only, and you must use a suitable child safety seat appropriate for the child‡s age, weight, and size. Never use child safety seats in the front row passenger seat. Warning: Never seat a child on a seat with an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it. DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the child can occur. Warning: Always ensure that all Model X seats are locked in position before traveling. Failure to do so increases the risk of injury. Pay attention to all warnings displayed on the touchscreen or instrument panel. Warning: Do not use Easy Entry (as described in Driver Profiles on page 46) to automatically move the driver's seat to the full rearward position if a child safety seat is installed on a rear seat behind the driver's seat. With reduced clearance, the movement of the seat may impact a child's legs, cause injury, or dislodge the seat. Warning: For vehicles with third row seats, when a child is seated in a second row monopost seat, the setting for the button that moves a second row outboard seat forward for easy access into the third row should be OFF (touch Controls > Seats > Easy Entry). This ensures that you need to manually hold the button to move the seat, preventing a child seated in the second row from being pushed against the corresponding front seat. See Accessing Third Row Seats (if equipped) - Monopost Seating on page 26. Refer to the following label fitted to the sun visors. Note: The image(s) shown below are representative only and may not be identical to the labels in your vehicle. Model X has an occupancy sensor in the front passenger seat that controls the status of the passenger front airbag (see Airbags on page 41). When driving with a child seat on the front passenger seat, always double- check the status of the passenger front airbag to confirm that it is OFF. To protect an adult subsequently occupying the front passenger seat, check to verify that the passenger front airbag is ON. 32 Model X Owner's Manual

Child Safety Seats Choosing a Child Safety Seat All children age 12 and under should ride in the second and third row seats. Always use a child safety seat suitable for a young child‡s age and weight. The following table is based on child safety seat recommendations determined by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in the United States (for more information, go to www.nhtsa.gov/equipment/car-seats- and-booster-seats). Infants Toddlers Young children Age Birth to 1 year* Over 1 year* 4 years and older, and less than 57 in. (145 cm) tall Weight Up to at least 20 lbs (9 kg)** Over 20 lbs (9 kg) (minimum) Over 40 lbs and up to 40 lbs (18 kg)* (18 kg) Type of child Rear facing (or convertible) Forward facing (or Seat belt safety seat convertible)* retained booster seat Seat position Rear facing only* Forward facing* Forward facing Recommended If combined weight of child If combined weight of child Attach attachment and safety seat is up to 65 and safety seat is up to 65 lbs booster method lbs (29.5 kg), attach using (29.5 kg), attach using either seats using either LATCH** (lower anchor LATCH** (both lower anchors the seat only) or the seat belt only.*** and top tether anchor), or the belt only. If combined weight of child seat belt and upper tether and safety seat is over 65 lbs strap.*** If combined weight of (29.5 kg), attach using the child and safety seat is over 65 seat belt only.*** lbs (29.5 kg), attach using the seat belt and upper tether strap.*** * Many child safety seats currently available allow children to ride rear-facing using the child safety seat‡s integrated 5-point harness for a longer period of time BASED UPON SPECIFIC HEIGHT AND WEIGHT LIMITS. Keep your child in a rear facing seat for as long as possible. CHECK THE CHILD SAFETY SEAT MANUFACTURER‡S INSTRUCTIONS AND CAREFULLY FOLLOW ALL INSTRUCTIONS ** LATCH ("Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children") and ISOFIX are international standards for attachment points for child safety seats in passenger cars that enable compliant child safety seats to be quickly and safely secured. The system has other regional names including LUAS ("Lower Universal Anchorage System") or Canfix in Canada. It has also been called the "Universal Child Safety Seat System" or UCSSS. *** Subject to instructions provided by the child safety seat manufacturer. Warning: Laws that govern how and where children should be carried when traveling in a vehicle are subject to change. It is the driver‡s responsibility to keep up to date on, and comply with, all current regulations in the region(s) where Model X is driven. To check the child passenger safety laws for states in the U.S., go to: http://www.ghsa.org/html/stateinfo/ laws/childsafety_laws.html. Seating and Safety Restraints 33

Child Safety Seats Warning: Do not use LATCH anchors with child safety seats or booster seats that have an integral safety belt where the combined weight of the child plus the child safety seat exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). 34 Model X Owner's Manual

Child Safety Seats Seating Larger Children emergency. Once disengaged, the belt must be fully extended to re-engage the locking If a child is too large to fit into a child safety mechanism whenever you install a child safety seat, but too small to safely fit into the seat. standard seat belts, use a booster seat Always follow the detailed instructions appropriate for the child‡s age and size. provided by the child safety seat Carefully follow the manufacturer‡s manufacturer. General guidelines are provided instructions to secure the booster seat. below. Installing Child Safety Seats 1. Place the child safety seat in Model X, and fully extend the seat belt. Route and There are two general methods used to install buckle the seat belt in accordance with child safety seats: the child safety seat manufacturer‡s • Seat belt retained - these seats are instructions. secured using the vehicle‡s seat belts. • LATCH retained - these seats attach to anchor bars built into the vehicle‡s rear seats. Check the child safety seat manufacturer‡s instructions and the table in this manual to determine which installation method to use. Some child safety seats can be installed using either method. Always follow the child safety seat manufacturer‡s instructions. Installing Seat Belt Retained Child Seats First, make sure that the child safety seat is appropriate for the weight, height, and age of 2. Allow the seat belt to retract, and remove the child. all slack in the seat belt while firmly Avoid dressing the child in bulky clothing and pushing the child safety seat into the do not place any objects between the child Model X seat. and the restraint system. 3. If the seat belt retained child safety seat Adjust harnesses for every child, every trip. has an upper tether, attach it to the back To securely hold child safety seats, all of the seat (see Attaching Upper Tether passenger seating positions are equipped with Straps on page 38). an automatic locking retractor (ALR) that, by Installing LATCH (ISOFIX) Child pulling the seat belt beyond the length needed for a typical adult occupant, locks the Seats belt into place until the seat belt is unbuckled and the webbing is fully retracted. The ALR Lower LATCH anchors are provided in the mechanism operates as a ratchet, winding in second row outboard seats. The anchors are slack and preventing the seat belt from located between the seat's back rest and rear extending any further until it has been cushion. The exact location of each anchor is completely rewound. When installing a child identified by a child safety seat identification safety seat, engage the belt's automatic button, illustrated below. The button is located locking retractor by pulling the seat belt on the seat back, directly above its associated webbing until it is fully extended. The ALR anchor. system engages only when the seat belt is at BENCH SEATS: its maximum extension point. Note: An automatic locking retractor disengages only when the seat belt is unbuckled and fully retracted. The belt can then be worn as a normal belt, sliding freely in and out and locking tight only in an Seating and Safety Restraints 35

Child Safety Seats MONOPOST SEATS: In the second row, install LATCH child safety seats in the outboard seating positions only. Use only a seat belt retained seat in the center position. Note: If Model X is equipped with two seats in the second row, both seats support the use of LATCH child safety seats. Note: Second row outboard seats support the use of upper tether straps (see Attaching Upper Tether Straps on page 38). Warning: Before driving after installing a child seat in the second row, ensure that a "seat unlocked" warning does NOT display on the touchscreen or instrument panel. This warning indicates that the seat is unsafe for an occupant because it was not returned to its safe, locked position. If the touchscreen or instrument panel displays the warning message, move the seat or backrest slightly forward or backward until it locks firmly into position and the message no longer displays. BENCH SEATS: 36 Model X Owner's Manual

Child Safety Seats degrees rearward from its forward-most position). Warning: Do not associate the Easy Entry setting with the driver's profile when a child is seated in the second row. Doing so can cause the driver's seat to push against the child, especially when the child is seated in a forward-facing child seat or booster seat. Do not rely on Model X to recognize or accommodate a child seated in the second row while using this setting. See Easy Entry on page 46. Note: To accommodate large rear-facing Warning: For vehicles with third row LATCH child safety seats, you may need to seats, when a child is seated in a second move the seat in the full rearward position, row monopost seat, the setting for the and move the corresponding front seat button that moves a second row forward to the mid-track position (up to 13 cm outboard seat forward for easy access forward of the rearmost position), raise the into the third row should be OFF (touch seat upward (3 cm from its lowest position), Controls > Seats > Easy Entry). This and angle the seat back to 15 degrees (or 10 ensures that you need to manually hold degrees rearward from its forward-most the button to move the seat, preventing a position). child seated in the second row from being Warning: Do not associate the Easy Entry pushed against the corresponding front setting with the driver's profile when a seat. See Accessing Third Row Seats (if child is seated in the second row Doing so equipped) - Monopost Seating on page can cause the driver's seat to push 26). against the child, especially when the To install a LATCH child safety seat, slide the child is seated in a forward-facing child safety seat latches onto the anchor bars until seat or booster seat. Do not rely on Model they click into place. Carefully read and follow X to recognize or accommodate a child the instructions provided by the child safety seated in the second row while using this seat manufacturer. setting. See Easy Entry on page 46. BENCH SEATS: MONOPOST SEATS: Note: To accommodate large rear-facing LATCH child safety seats, you may need to move the seat in the full rearward position, and move the corresponding front seat forward to the mid-track position (up to 13 cm forward of the rearmost position), raise the seat upward (3 cm from its lowest position), and angle the seat back to 15 degrees (or 10 Seating and Safety Restraints 37

Child Safety Seats MONOPOST SEATS: For dual-strap tethers, position a strap on each side of the head restraint. Note: If Model X is equipped with the optional six seat interior, a center seating position is not available in the second row. Warning: When routing tether straps, keep the strap close to the headrest as illustrated below. On a Model X equipped with third row seats, do not allow a tether strap to cover the third row access button on the rear shoulder of the seat. Once installed, test the security of the installation before seating a child. Attempt to twist the child safety seat from side to side and try to pull it away from the seat, then Dual Straps - Second Row Monopost Seats: check to ensure the anchors remain securely in place. Note: Lower LATCH anchors should not be used with child seats or booster seats that have an integrated safety belt in situations where the combined weight of the child plus the child safety seat is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg). In these situations, use the seat belt instead. Attaching Upper Tether Straps If an upper tether strap is provided, attach its hook to the anchor point located on the back of the second and third row (if equipped) seats. Note: The location of anchor points may not be readily visible but can be found by identifying a slice in the seat's material. Warning: Tighten upper tether straps according to the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child safety seat. Warning: USE ONLY SEAT BELT RETAINED CHILD SAFETY SEATS IN THE CENTER SEATING POSITION. 38 Model X Owner's Manual

Child Safety Seats Dual Straps - Second Row Bench Seats: Dual Straps - Third Row Seats: Single Strap - Second Row Bench Seats: For single-strap tethers, position the strap in the outboard seating positions over the outside-facing side of the head restraint (the same side of the head restraint as the seat belt retraction mechanism). In the center seating position (if equipped), center and position the Single Strap - Third Row Seats strap over the top of the head restraint. Single Strap - Second Row Monopost Seats: Seating and Safety Restraints 39

Child Safety Seats developed to avoid injury in a frontal impact. Warning: Do not allow a baby or infant to be held on a lap. All children should be restrained in an appropriate child safety seat at all times. Warning: To ensure children are safely seated, follow all instructions provided in this document and by the manufacturer of the child safety seat. Warning: Children should ride in a rear facing child safety seat using the seat‡s integrated 5-point harness for as long as possible. Testing a Child Safety Seat Warning: Do not use seat belt extenders on a seat belt that is being used to install Before seating a child, always make sure the a child safety seat or booster seat. child safety seat is not loose: Warning: When seating larger children, 1. Hold the child safety seat by the belt path make sure the child's head is supported and try to slide the safety seat from side and the child‡s seat belt is properly to side and front to back. adjusted and fastened. The shoulder 2. If the seat moves more than one inch portion of the belt must be away from the (2.5 cm), it is too loose. Tighten the belt or face and neck, and the lap portion must reconnect the LATCH retained child safety not be over the stomach. seat. Warning: Never attach two child safety 3. If you are unable to reduce slack, try a seats to one anchor point. In a collision, different seat location or try another child one anchor point may be incapable of safety seat. securing both seats. Warning: Child safety seat anchors are Child Safety Seat Warnings designed to withstand only those loads imposed by a correctly fitted child safety Warning: Extreme hazard! Do not seat a seat. Under no circumstances are they to child on the front passenger seat even if be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or you are using a child safety seat. This seat for attaching other items or equipment to has an airbag in front of it. Although this the vehicle. airbag is disabled when Model X detects Warning: Always check harnesses and a lightweight passenger, do not rely on tether straps for damage and wear. technology to protect your child. Warning: Child safety seats are designed Warning: Never leave a child unattended, to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts even if the child is secured in a child or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder safety seat. belt. A child could be endangered in a Warning: Never use a child safety seat crash if a child safety seat is not properly that has been involved in a collision. Have secured in the vehicle. the seat inspected or replaced as Warning: According to collision statistics, described in the child safety seat children are safer when properly manufacturer‡s instructions. restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Warning: Do not use a forward facing child safety seat until your child weighs over 20 lbs (9 kg) and can sit independently. Up to the age of two, a child's spine and neck are not sufficiently 40 Model X Owner's Manual

Airbags Airbags Location of Airbags Airbags are located in the approximate areas shown below. Airbag warning information is printed on the sun visors. Model X is equipped with an airbag and lap/shoulder belt at both front seating positions. The airbag is a supplemental restraint at those seating positions. All occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or not an airbag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash. 1. Knee airbags 2. Front airbags 3. Curtain airbags 4. Seat-mounted side airbags 5. Door-mounted airbags Seating and Safety Restraints 41

Airbags How Airbags Work Types of Airbags Airbags inflate when sensors detect an impact Model X has the following types of airbags: that exceeds deployment thresholds. These • Front airbags: The front airbags are thresholds are designed to predict the severity designed to reduce injuries if larger of a crash in time for the airbags to help children or adults are riding in the front protect the vehicle's occupants. Airbags seats. Follow all warnings and instructions inflate instantly with considerable force related to seating a child on the front accompanied by a loud noise. The inflated passenger seat (if permitted in your bag, together with the seat belts, limits market region). movement of occupants to reduce the risk of • Knee airbags: Knee airbags and the front injury. airbags work together. The knee airbags Front airbags are not ordinarily designed to limit the forward motion of the front seat inflate in rear collisions, rollovers, side occupants by restricting leg movement, collisions and when braking heavily or driving thereby positioning the occupants so that over bumps and potholes. Likewise, front the front airbags work more effectively. airbags may not inflate in all frontal collisions, Whether or not knee airbags deploy in a such as minor front collisions, underride collision is partially dependent on the collisions, or impacts with narrow objects track position of the associated seat. (such as poles or trees). Significant superficial • Seat-mounted side airbags: A seat- damage can occur to the vehicle without the mounted side airbag in the front driver, airbags inflating and, conversely, a relatively front passenger and second row outboard small amount of structural damage can cause seats help protect the pelvis and the airbags to inflate. Therefore, the external thorax region of the torso. The seat- appearance of the vehicle after a collision mounted side airbags on both the does not represent whether or not the front impacted and non-impacted side of the airbags should have inflated. vehicle will inflate in the event of severe Warning: Before modifying your vehicle side impact or severe offset frontal to accommodate a person with impact. disabilities in a way that may affect the • Curtain airbags: A curtain airbag on each airbag system, contact Tesla. side of Model X in the front roof-rail help protect the head. Curtain airbags on both the impacted and non-impacted side of the vehicle will inflate if a severe side impact occurs, a severe offset frontal impact occurs, or if the vehicle rolls over. • Door-mounted airbags: There is an airbag on each side of Model X mounted in the trim on the falcon wing doors. These are the same as the curtain airbags in that they help protect the head and typically inflate in the event of a severe side impact, a severe offset frontal impact, or if the vehicle rolls over. The door-mounted airbags on both the impacted and non- impacted side of the vehicle will inflate. Passenger Front Airbag Status The status of the passenger front airbag displays in the top corner of the touchscreen: 42 Model X Owner's Manual

Airbags Before driving with a child Disabling the Passenger Front seated on the front passenger Airbag seat (if permitted in your market Model X has an occupancy sensor in the front region), always double-check the passenger seat that controls the status of the status of the passenger front passenger front airbag. airbag to confirm that it is OFF. When the passenger airbag is Note: The occupancy sensor system meets the OFF, it will not inflate when a regulatory requirement of FMVSS 208 and collision occurs. This indicator automatically detects when inflating the also displays when the seat is passenger front airbag would be unnecessary unoccupied. or potentially harmful. To protect an adult occupying Weight in Passenger Indicator the front passenger seat, ensure front airbag status status the passenger front airbag is ON. passenger When the passenger airbag is seat ON, it may inflate when a collision occurs Empty OFF PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF Warning: If seating a child in the front Up to 20 lbs OFF PASSENGER passenger seat is legally permissible in (9 kg) AIRBAG OFF your market region, it is the driver's responsibility to ensure that the 20-100 lbs OFF or ON OFF - passenger front airbag is OFF. Never seat (9-45 kg)* PASSENGER a child in the front passenger seat with an AIRBAG OFF active airbag, even if using a child safety ON - seat or booster seat. DEATH or SERIOUS PASSENGER INJURY to the child can occur. AIRBAG ON Over 100 lbs ON PASSENGER (45 kg) AIRBAG ON *Values are approximate. A weight detected near the threshold can cause the airbag status to occasionally turn on and off depending on seating position and physique. Note: It takes approximately six seconds after you power on Model X for the occupancy sensor to report accurate status of the front passenger airbag. As a result, when you first power on Model X, even in situations when it should be OFF because the seat is occupied by a weight of 20 lbs (9 kg) or less, it will take the touchscreen approximately six seconds to display the status, PASS AIRBAG OFF. If it fails to do so, contact Tesla service immediately and do not seat a child in the front passenger seating position. To make sure the sensing system can correctly detect occupancy status, eliminate the following: • Objects lodged under the seat. • Heavy objects sitting on the seat (briefcase, large purse). Seating and Safety Restraints 43

Airbags • Objects wedged between the seat back • Doors and liftgate unlock. and seat cushion. • Hazard warning lights turn on. • Cargo interfering with the seat. • Interior lights turn on. • Aftermarket items attached to, or sitting • High voltage is disabled. on or between, the seat and occupant To restore high voltage power, use the including but not limited to covers, mats, touchscreen to manually power off Model X blankets, etc. (see Powering Off on page 54), then press These conditions can interfere with the the brake to power it back on again. occupancy sensor. If you have eliminated the above possibilities, and the airbag status is still Airbag Warning Indicator incorrect, ask passengers to ride in the rear seats and contact Tesla to have the airbag system checked. The airbag indicator on the Note: The front passenger occupancy sensor instrument panel remains lit if the affects the operation of the passenger front airbag system is malfunctioning. The airbags only. The side airbags are not affected. only time this indicator should light up is briefly when Model X first Warning: If the front passenger airbag is powers up, in which case it turns off not turning on or off as expected based within a few seconds. If it remains lit, on the weight thresholds previously contact Tesla immediately and do described, contact Tesla immediately. not drive. Warning: Never seat a child on the front passenger seat, even if the passenger Airbag Warnings airbag is off. All occupants age 12 and under must ride in the second and rear Warning: Do not place objects over or row (if equipped) seats. near airbags because any such objects Warning: To ensure accuracy of the could cause harm if the vehicle is in a occupant detection system, do not make crash severe enough to cause the airbag any modifications to the front passenger to inflate. seat. Warning: All occupants, including the Warning: Do not use seat covers on driver, should always wear their seat belts, Model X. Doing so could restrict whether or not an airbag is also provided deployment of the seat-mounted side air at their seating position, to minimize the bags if a collision occurs. It can also risk of severe injury or death in the event reduce the accuracy of the occupant of a collision. detection system, if equipped. Warning: Front seat occupants should not place their arms over the airbag module, Inflation Effects as an inflating airbag can cause fractures or other injuries. Warning: When airbags inflate, a fine Warning: Do not use seat covers on powder is released. This powder can Model X. Doing so could restrict irritate the skin and should be thoroughly deployment of the seat-mounted side air flushed from the eyes and from any cuts bags if a collision occurs. It can also or abrasions. reduce the accuracy of the occupant After inflation, the airbags deflate to provide a detection system, if equipped. gradual cushioning effect for the occupants Warning: Airbags inflate with and to ensure the driver‡s forward vision is not considerable speed and force, which can obscured. cause injury. To limit injuries, ensure that If airbags have inflated, or if your vehicle has occupants are wearing seat belts and are been in a collision, always have the airbags, correctly seated, with the seat positioned seat belt pre-tensioners and any associated as far back as possible. The National components checked and, if necessary, Highway Traffic Safety Administration replaced by Tesla. (NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of 10" (25 cm) between an In a collision, in addition to the airbags occupant‡s chest and an airbag. inflating: 44 Model X Owner's Manual

Airbags Warning: Children should not be seated on the front passenger seat unless permitted by regulations in your market region. Follow all regulations in your region for the appropriate way to seat a child based on the child's weight, size, and age. The safest place to seat infants and young children is in the rear seating positions. Seating an infant or child in a rear-facing child restraint system on a seat equipped with an operational airbag can cause serious injury or death. Warning: To ensure correct inflation of the side airbags, maintain an unobstructed gap between an occupant‡s torso and the side of Model X. Warning: Passengers shouldn't lean their heads against doors. Doing so can cause injury if a curtain airbag inflates. Warning: Do not allow passengers to obstruct the operation of an airbag by placing feet, knees or any other part of the body on or near an airbag. Warning: Do not attach or place objects on or near the front airbags, the side of the front seats, the headliner at the side of the vehicle, or any other airbag cover that could interfere with inflation of an airbag. Objects can cause serious injury if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate. Warning: Following inflation, some airbag components are hot. Do not touch until they have cooled. Seating and Safety Restraints 45

Driver Profiles Driving Driver Profiles Creating a Driver Profile Easy Entry When you first adjust the driver‡s seat, You can define an Easy Entry setting that steering wheel, or driver‡s side mirror, the moves the steering wheel and driver's seat to touchscreen prompts you to create a driver make it easy to enter and exit Model X. Any profile to save these adjustments. Your profile driver can use the Easy Entry setting by also saves some of the preferences you make associating it with their driver's profile. When using the touchscreen's Controls window. the Easy Entry setting is associated with a driver's profile, the steering wheel and driver's To add a new driver profile, touch seat automatically adjust when the park gear the driver profile icon at the top of is engaged and the driver's seat belt is the touchscreen. Then touch Add unbuckled, allowing an easy exit from the New Driver, type the driver's name vehicle. When returning to the vehicle and and touch Create Profile. Follow the stepping on the brake pedal, settings onscreen instructions to save the automatically adjust back to the settings used seating position to the driver profile. by the most recent driver profile (or based on You can also check the Use Easy the key if it's linked to a driver profile). Entry checkbox if you want to save To use Easy Entry with a driver profile, ensure (or use existing) Easy Entry settings the Use Easy Entry box is checked. (described below) in which the Warning: Never use Easy Entry to move driver's seat and the steering wheel the driver's seat to the full rearward are automatically adjusted to make it position when a child safety seat is easy to enter and exit Model X. installed on a rear seat located behind the driver's seat. With reduced clearance, the If you change the position of the steering movement of the seat may impact a wheel, driver‡s seat, or driver‡s side mirror child's legs, cause injury, or dislodge the after you have saved or chosen a driver seat. profile, the touchscreen prompts you to save the new position or restore the previously Restoring a Driver‡s Profile saved position (other settings are automatically saved). To change a setting To adjust Model X based on a without saving or restoring, just ignore the driver‡s profile, touch the driver prompt. profile icon on the touchscreen's To adjust Model X based on a driver‡s profile, status bar. Then choose the driver touch the driver profile icon and choose the and Model X is adjusted based on driver name. The saved adjustments are the settings that have been saved to automatically made. the chosen driver profile. Note: Valet mode is a built-in driver profile used to limit speed and restrict access to See What's Saved some Model X features (see Valet Mode on page 47). To see what settings are associated with a Note: To stop automatic adjustments that are driver profile, touch the driver profile icon on in process based on a driver's profile, touch the top of the touchscreen. Then touch See Stop on the Driver Profile dropdown menu. what‡s saved. A popup window lists all the Automatic adjustments also stop if you settings that are saved to driver profiles. manually adjust a seat, mirror or the steering Note: The settings that are associated with wheel. driver profiles may vary depending on the version of software currently installed on your Model X. 46 Model X Owner's Manual

Driver Profiles Linking a Driver Profile to a Key • Wi-Fi and Bluetooth are disabled. When Model X is in Valet mode, you cannot pair You can link a driver profile to a specific key to new Bluetooth devices or view or delete allow Model X to automatically select the existing paired devices. correct driver profile when the linked key is Note: If a Bluetooth paired device or a detected as you approach the vehicle and known Wi-Fi network is within operating open the driver's door. To link a driver profile range (approximately 30 feet or 9 meters) to a key, enter Model X with the key and touch of Model X in Valet mode, Model X will the driver profile icon on the top of the connect to it. touchscreen. Select the driver profile you would like to link to the key, then touch Link to Key Fob. Starting Valet Mode Note: Model X only detects one key at a time. With Model X in Park, touch the driver profile The driver profile is linked to the key that is icon on the top of the touchscreen, then touch detected by the vehicle at that time. Valet Mode. Therefore, if you want to link driver profiles to The first time you enter Valet mode, you will multiple keys, ensure that only the key that be prompted to create a 4-digit PIN that you you would like to link the driver profile to is will use to cancel Valet mode. within detection range while performing the linking procedure. Move all other keys outside When Valet mode is active, the instrument of the detection range (at least three feet (one panel displays the word Valet above the meter) away from Model X). driving speed and the Valet mode driver Note: Model X can support up to eight linked profile displays on the touchscreen. keys. However, a driver profile can only be You can also use the mobile app to start and linked to one key. cancel Valet mode (provided Model X is in To remove the link between a driver profile Park). When using the mobile app, you do not and key, touch the driver profile icon on the need to enter a PIN because you are already top of the touchscreen. Select the driver required to log into the app using your Tesla profile, then touch the X next to Linked to Key Account credentials. Fob. Note: If the PIN to Drive setting is enabled (see PIN to Drive on page 161), you must Valet Mode enter the driving PIN before you can define or enter a Valet PIN. Once in Valet mode, When Model X is in Valet mode, the following Model X can be driven without the valet restrictions apply: needing to enter the driving PIN. • Speed is limited to 70 mph (113 km/h). Note: The PIN to Drive setting is not available • Maximum acceleration and power are when Valet mode is active. limited. If you forget your valet PIN, reset it from • Front trunk and glovebox are locked. inside Model X by entering your Tesla Account • Home and Work locations are not credentials (which also cancels Valet mode). available in the navigation system. You can also reset your PIN using the mobile • Voice commands are disabled. app. • Autopilot convenience features are Warning: Do not use Valet mode when disabled. towing a trailer. Torque limitations can • Most status bar functions are disabled. make it difficult for Model X to pull a • The Mobile Access setting is disabled. trailer up a hill. • HomeLink (if applicable in your market Canceling Valet Mode region) is not accessible. • Driver Profiles are not accessible. With Model X in Park, touch the Valet Mode driver icon on the touchscreen's status bar, then enter your 4-digit PIN. When you cancel Valet mode, all settings associated with the most recently used driver profile and climate control settings are restored, and all features are available. Driving 47

Driver Profiles Note: You do not need to enter a PIN to cancel Valet mode from the mobile app. 48 Model X Owner's Manual

Steering Wheel Steering Wheel Adjusting Steering Effort You can adjust the feel and sensitivity of the steering system to suit your personal preference: 1. On the touchscreen, touch Controls > Driving > Steering Mode. 2. Choose a steering option: • Comfort - Reduces the effort required to turn the wheel. In town, Model X feels easier to drive and park. • Standard - Tesla believes that this 1. Next setting offers the best handling and If you are listening to local or satellite response in all conditions. radio and you have defined more than one • Sport - Increases the effort required radio preset, press to play the next preset to turn the wheel. When driving at in the radio band that is currently playing. higher speeds, Model X feels more If you have not defined more than one responsive. preset, press to go to the next available The only way to really know which option you frequency. like best is to try them. If you are listening to Internet radio, or to an audio file on a connected Bluetooth or Adjusting Position USB device, press to skip to the next song Adjust the steering wheel to the desired or station. driving position by moving the control on the If you have more than one favorite left side of the steering column. Using this defined, press and hold to cycle through control, you can move the steering wheel favorites. forward and backward and up and down. 2. Scroll Button • To adjust the media volume, roll up or down. Note: The scroll button adjusts the volume for media, navigation instructions and phone calls based on what is currently in use. As you adjust volume, the instrument panel displays the volume level and whether you are adjusting volume for media, navigation or phone. • To mute the media volume, or to pause/play an audio file, tap the scroll button. Warning: Do not make adjustments while driving. Using Left Steering Wheel Buttons Use the buttons on the left side of the steering wheel to change radio stations, control the media player‡s volume, and to choose what displays on the left side of the instrument panel (whenever the Navigation app is not displaying instructions). Driving 49

Steering Wheel • To choose what displays on the left 1. Press to use a voice command to call a side of the instrument panel, hold the contact, navigate, or listen to Internet scroll button briefly until the available music. When you hear the tone, speak options are displayed. Roll the scroll your command. Press again to end the button to choose Empty, Car Status, voice command, or simply stop speaking. Clock, Media, Energy, Trips, etc. When For details, see Using Voice Commands on the option you want is highlighted, page 51. tap the scroll button. 2. Scroll Button Note: The option you choose to • During a phone call, touch the scroll display using the left scroll button is button to display call options that retained until you manually change it. allow you to perform an action on the It is also saved in your driver profile. call. Note: Car status displays information • Roll the scroll button to adjust the such as status of doors and trunks, most recently used feature from the and on newer model vehicles, the tire feature list (see Menu button). pressure measurements. • To choose what displays on the right • To restart the touchscreen, hold down side of the instrument panel, hold the both scroll buttons for approximately scroll button briefly until the available five seconds. See Restarting the options are displayed. Roll the scroll Touchscreen on page 54. button to choose Empty, Car Status, 3. Previous Clock, Media, Energy, Trips, etc. When the option you want is highlighted, Same as described above for Next, except tap the scroll button. it skips to the previous song or station. If Note: Car status displays information you have more than one favorite defined, such as status of doors and trunks, press and hold to cycle through favorites. and on newer model vehicles, the tire Note: Regardless of how you customize the pressure measurements. left side of the instrument panel, it Note: The option you choose to automatically changes to display navigation display using the right scroll button is instructions (if applicable), or to let you know retained until you manually change it. if a door or trunk is open when Model X is in a It is also saved in your driver profile. driving gear. • To restart the touchscreen, hold down Using Right Steering Wheel Buttons both scroll buttons for approximately five seconds. See Restarting the Use the buttons on the right side of the Touchscreen on page 54. steering wheel to access call options while on 3. Menu button a phone call, to choose what displays on the Press to display a menu that allows you to right side of the instrument panel, to adjust control the following Model X: Model X features, and to use voice commands. Note: Whenever you receive or make a phone • Temperature. Roll the scroll button to call, the right side of the instrument panel change the driver side temperature, or automatically displays call options to help you press the wheel to turn the climate easily handle phone calls on your Bluetooth- control system on and off. connected phone. • Fan Speed. Roll the scroll button to adjust the speed of the fan used to cool or heat the cabin. • Display Brightness. Roll the scroll button to change the brightness level of the displays, or press the wheel to restore default settings. • Recent Calls. If your phone is paired to Model X, roll the scroll button to view your recent calls. Press the scroll button to call the contact that's displayed. To pair your phone, see Pairing a Bluetooth Phone on page 155. 50 Model X Owner's Manual

Steering Wheel • Contacts. If your phone is paired to Heated Steering Wheel Model X, roll the scroll button to navigate to contacts in your phone. If Model X is equipped with the optional cold Your contacts are listed alphabetically weather package, you can warm up the by their last name. To pair your phone, steering wheel by touching climate controls see Pairing a Bluetooth Phone on on the touchscreen (see Climate Controls on page 155. page 140). When turned on, radiant heat keeps Press the menu button again to close the the steering wheel at a comfortable feature list. temperature. Using Voice Commands Horn You can use voice commands to call a contact, To sound the horn, press the center pad on the navigate to a location, or listen to Internet steering wheel. music. Tap the voice button on the upper right side of the steering wheel to initiate a voice command. When you hear the tone, speak your command. As you speak, the instrument panel displays an interpretation of your command. (It also displays tips to remind you of the type of commands you can speak.) When you finish speaking the command, tap the voice button again or simply wait. Note: Voice commands may be said in English only. • To call a contact on your Bluetooth- connected phone, say “Call” or “Dial”, followed by the contact‡s first and/or last name(s). For example, “Call Joe” or “Call Joe Smith”. • To search for, or navigate to, a location, say “Where is”, “Drive to”, or “Navigate to”, followed by an address, business name, business category, or landmark. For example, “Where is Stanford University?”, “Drive to Tesla in Palo Alto”, or “Navigate to Starbucks on Homestead in Cupertino”. If you have defined a navigation address for your home or work locations, you can use a voice command to navigate there by saying "Navigate home" or "Navigate to work". • To listen to an Internet music service, say “Listen to” or “Play”, followed by the name of the song, album, artist, or combination. To improve voice recognition accuracy, provide multiple cues in your command, such as artist plus song (for example, “Listen to Yellow Brick Road” or “Play Yellow Brick Road by Elton John”). Driving 51

Mirrors Mirrors Adjusting Exterior Side Mirrors The driver‡s side mirror automatically dims at night, in proportion to the level of glare from Press the button associated with the mirror the headlights of a vehicle behind you (except you want to adjust (left or right). The button's when in Reverse gear). Also, both exterior side light turns on and you can then press the dial mirrors have heaters that turn on and off with to move the mirror to the desired position. the rear window defroster. Repeat for the other side mirror. If prompted, touch Save on the touchscreen to save the Auto-Fold Mirrors Based on Location mirror adjustment in your driver profile. Model X can automatically fold and unfold the side mirrors based on location, which saves you from having to manually position them each time you need to fold or unfold the mirrors when at a frequented place (such as narrow garages, tight parking spaces, etc.). To set up, Model X must be driving at a low speed (less than 3 mph/5 kph) or stopped at the location you want your vehicle to remember. Go to Controls > Vehicle > Always Fold Mirrors at this Location. Next time you approach the saved location, your mirrors will fold and unfold within 25 feet (7.5 meters) of the specified location. You can also integrate auto-folding mirrors To fold and unfold exterior mirrors, press the with HomeLink (see HomeLink Universal center button. You can set the mirrors to fold Transceiver on page 164). To enable, go to automatically whenever Model X is locked by HomeLink > Auto-Fold Mirrors when Nearby. touching Controls > Vehicle > Mirror Auto- Caution: Mirrors may not automatically Fold. The mirrors unfold automatically fold or unfold if you return to a saved whenever you unlock Model X. location and are driving faster than 3 When you use the center button to fold the mph/5 kph. mirrors in for parking in a tight space, the mirrors remain folded in until your driving Mirror Auto-tilt When Reversing speed reaches 31 mph (50 km/h), or until you Both exterior mirrors can automatically tilt use the center button to unfold the mirrors. downward when backing up. To adjust the Note: You cannot fold a mirror if driving above auto-tilt position, shift into Reverse, then 31 mph (50 km/h). adjust the mirrors (press the button associated with the mirror you want to adjust, then press the dial to move the mirror to the desired position). Touch Save on the touchscreen to save the mirror adjustment in your driver profile. When you shift back into Drive, the mirrors tilt back to their normal (upward) position. But now that you have adjusted them for backing up, they automatically tilt to the selected downward position whenever you shift into Reverse. You can turn the auto-tilt feature on or off using the touchscreen, Touch Controls > Vehicle > Mirror Auto-Tilt. 52 Model X Owner's Manual

Mirrors Rear View Mirror The rear view mirror is adjusted manually. Except when in Reverse, the rear view mirror automatically dims in proportion to the level of glare from the headlights of a vehicle behind you. Driving 53

Starting and Powering Off Starting and Powering Off Starting A number of factors can affect whether Model X can detect the key. These include a When you open a door, Model X powers on low battery in the key, interference from other the instrument panel and touchscreen and you devices using radio signals, and objects can operate all controls. between the key and receiver. To drive Model X: Always keep the key with you. After driving, 1. PRESS THE BRAKE PEDAL - Model X the key is needed to restart Model X after it powers on and is ready to drive. powers off. And when you leave Model X, you 2. SELECT A GEAR - Move the gear lever all must bring the key with you to lock Model X, the way down for Drive and all the way up either manually or automatically. for Reverse. See Shifting Gears on page 56. Powering Off Note: If the PIN to Drive feature is enabled When you finish driving, shift into Park by (see PIN to Drive on page 161), you must also pressing the button on the end of the gear enter a valid PIN on the touchscreen before selector. The parking brake automatically you can drive Model X. engages and all systems keep operating. Note: If Passive Entry is off and you do not When you leave Model X with the key, it press the brake pedal to start Model X within powers off automatically, turning off the approximately five minutes, a message instrument panel and touchscreen. displays on the instrument panel and you must Model X also powers off automatically after use the key to lock then unlock Model X again being in Park for 15 minutes, even if you are before starting the vehicle. sitting in the driver‡s seat. Everything you need to know when driving Although usually not needed, you can power Model X displays on the instrument panel. off Model X while sitting in the driver‡s seat, provided the vehicle is not moving. Touch Key Not Inside Controls > Safety & Security > Power Off. If Model X does not detect a key when you Model X automatically powers back on again if press the brake, the instrument panel displays you press the brake pedal or touch the a message telling you that a key is not inside. touchscreen. If you receive this message, place the key in Note: Model X automatically shifts into Park the center console cup holder where Model X whenever it is determined that you are exiting can best detect it. the vehicle, even when you shift into Neutral before exiting. To keep Model X in Neutral, see Keeping Your Vehicle in Neutral (Tow Mode) on page 56. Restarting the Touchscreen If your touchscreen is unresponsive or demonstrates unusual behavior, you can restart it to potentially resolve the issue. Note: To ensure the safety of vehicle occupants as well as other road users, restarting the touchscreen should be done only when the vehicle is in Park. 1. Shift into Park. If Model X still does not detect the key, try holding it against the center console, immediately below the 12V power socket (see 12V Power Socket on page 20). If the key is still not detected, remove the key's battery and try again. See Replacing the Key Battery on page 7. Or try using another key. If another key does not work, contact Tesla. 54 Model X Owner's Manual

Starting and Powering Off 2. Hold down both scroll buttons on the steering wheel until the touchscreen turns black and the Tesla logo appears. 3. Wait approximately 30 seconds for the touchscreen to restart. If the touchscreen is still unresponsive or demonstrating unusual behavior after a few minutes, try powering the vehicle off (touch Controls > Safety & Security > Power Off). Note: Restarting the touchscreen using the scroll buttons does not power Model X off and on. Driving 55

Gears Gears Shifting Gears When Model X is in Park, you must press the brake to shift to another gear. Move the lever up or down to change gears. Model X automatically shifts into Park whenever you connect a charge cable or if two or more of the following conditions are met simultaneously while traveling slower than approximately 1.5 mph (2 km/h): • The driver's seat belt is unbuckled. • The occupancy sensor in the driver's seat does not detect an occupant. • The driver's door is opened. Note: The above conditions do not reflect a comprehensive list of reasons why Model X may or may not automatically shift into Park If you try to shift into a gear that the current and, in certain scenarios, it is possible for your driving speed prohibits, a chime sounds and vehicle to shift into Park when only one of the the gear does not change. above conditions is true. Caution: In emergency situations, if the Reverse brakes are not functioning properly, press Push the lever all the way up and release. You and hold the Park button on the gear can only shift into Reverse when Model X is selector to bring the vehicle to a stop. Do stopped or moving less than 5 mph (8 km/h). not use this method to stop the vehicle If moving less than 1 mph (1.6 km/h), you must unless absolutely necessary. press the brake. Warning: It is the driver's responsibility to always ensure the vehicle is in Park before Neutral exiting. Never rely on Model X to Push the lever up or down to the first position automatically shift into Park for you; it and release to shift into Neutral. Neutral allows might not work in all circumstances (for Model X to roll freely when you are not example, if Creep or a slope causes the pressing the brake pedal. vehicle to travel greater than approximately 1.5 mph (2 km/h)). If Model X is in Park and you use the To make it convenient to pick up passengers, touchscreen to release the parking brake you can also unlock all doors at any time by (Controls > Safety & Security), Model X shifts shifting into Park then pressing the Park into Neutral (see Parking Brake on page 71). button a second time. Drive Keeping Your Vehicle in Neutral Push the lever all the way down and release. (Tow Mode) You can shift into Drive when Model X is stopped or moving less than 5 mph (8 km/h) Model X automatically shifts into Park in Reverse. If Model X is moving less than whenever you finish driving and leave 1 mph (1.6 km/h), you must press the brake to Model X. To keep Model X in Neutral when you shift into Drive. exit, allowing it to roll freely (for example, pulling onto a transporter, etc.), activate Tow Park mode: Press the end of the gear selector while 1. Shift into Park. Model X is stopped. Whenever Model X is in 2. Press the brake pedal. Park, the parking brake is applied. 3. Touch Controls > Service > Tow Mode. Model X beeps, and shifts into Neutral (which releases the parking brake). 56 Model X Owner's Manual

Gears When Tow mode is active, Model X displays this indicator light on the instrument panel, along with a message telling you that Model X will roll freely. Note: In Tow mode, Model X does not shift into a driving gear. To cancel Tow mode, shift into Park or touch Tow mode again. Tow mode also cancels if you use the touchscreen to apply the parking brake (Controls > Safety & Security > Parking Brake). Driving 57

Lights Lights Controlling Lights • OFF: Exterior lights turn off until you manually turn them back on or until Touch Controls > Lights on the touchscreen to the next time you drive. If daytime control the lights. running lights are required in your In addition to the lights that you can control region, the exterior lights used for this from the touchscreen, Model X has purpose are always on when Drive convenience lights that turn on and off gear is engaged. automatically based on what you are doing. • PARKING: Only the side marker lights, For example, you will notice interior lights, parking lights, tail lights and license marker lights, tail lights, door handle lights, plate lights turn on. and puddle lights that turn on when you Note: If daytime running lights are unlock Model X, when you open a door, and required in your region, the exterior when you shift into Park. They turn off lights used for this purpose are always automatically after a minute or two or when on whenever a driving gear (Drive or you shift into a driving gear or lock Model X. Reverse) is engaged. Note: The image below is provided for • ON: Exterior lights turn on. demonstration purposes only. Depending on Warning: Always ensure that your vehicle options, software version and market headlights are on during low visibility region, your touchscreen may appear slightly conditions. Failure to do so may result different. in a collision. 2. If equipped, touch to turn the fog lights on or off. Fog lights operate only when low beam headlights are on. When headlights are turned off, fog lights also turn off. The front fog indicator displays on the instrument panel whenever the optional front fog lights are on. Note: Depending on the market region and vehicle options, your vehicle may not be equipped with front and/or rear fog lights. Note: In some regions, there is no control for the front fog lights. They operate in conjunction with the headlights and turn on only in situations where low beam headlights are on. 3. Turn the interior dome (map) lights on or off. If set to AUTO, all interior dome lights 1. Exterior lights (headlights, tail lights, side turn on when you unlock Model X, open a marker lights, parking lights, and license door upon exiting, or shift into Park. plate lights) are set to AUTO each time Note: You can also manually turn an you start Model X. When set to AUTO, individual dome light on or off by pressing exterior lights automatically turn on when its lens. If you manually turn a dome light driving in low lighting conditions. If you on, it turns off when Model X powers off. If change to a different setting, lights always Model X was already powered off when revert to AUTO on your next drive. you manually turned the light on, it turns Touch one of these options to temporarily off after 60 minutes. change the exterior light setting: 4. If you turn on AMBIENT LIGHTS, interior ambient lights turn on whenever the headlights are on. 58 Model X Owner's Manual

Lights 5. If you turn on Auto High Beam, your vehicle automatically switches from high beam headlights to low beam headlights when there is light detected in front of Model X. See High Beam Headlights on page 60. 6. If you turn on Headlights after Exit, the exterior lights remain on for a short period of time after you stop driving and park Model X in low lighting conditions. See Headlights After Exit on page 60. Driving 59

Lights Warning: Auto High Beam is an aid only High Beam Headlights and is subject to limitations. It is the Push the left-hand steering column lever away driver's responsibility to make sure that from you to turn the high beam headlights on the headlights are always adjusted as continuously. To cancel, pull the lever towards appropriate for the weather conditions you. and driving circumstances. To briefly flash the high beam headlights, pull the lever towards you. Headlights After Exit When you stop driving and park Model X in low lighting conditions, the exterior lights remain on. They automatically turn off after one minute or when you lock Model X. You can turn this feature on and off by touching Controls > Lights > Headlights After Exit. When Headlights After Exit is off, the headlights turn off when you engage the Park gear and open a door. The high beam headlights can automatically Adaptive Front Lighting System switch to low beam when there is light (AFS) detected in front of Model X (for example, from an oncoming vehicle). To turn this If equipped, the Adaptive Front Lighting feature on or off, touch Controls > Lights > System (AFS) automatically adjusts the beam Auto High Beam. of the headlights to improve your driving view. Note: Your chosen setting is retained until you Electric sensors measure driving speed, manually change it. steering angle and yaw (the rotation of the car In situations where high beams are turned off around the vertical axis) to determine the because AUTO HIGH BEAM is turned on and optimum position of the headlights based on light is detected in front of Model X, you can current driving conditions. For example, to temporarily turn on high beams by pulling the improve visibility while driving on winding lever all the way toward you. roads at night, the AFS casts the beam in the direction of the curve. When low beam The following indicator lights are visible on the headlights are turned on and when driving at instrument panel to show the status of the lower speeds, AFS improves lateral headlights: illumination to increase the visibility of pedestrians and curbs, and to improve visibility when turning at a dark intersection, Low beam headlights are on. into a driveway, or when making a u-turn. The Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS) High beam headlights are on. operates whenever headlights are on. If Illuminates when high beams are on Model X isn't moving, or is moving in reverse, but the Auto High Beam setting is the adaptive headlights do not activate. This turned off or if the Auto High Beam prevents the lights from inadvertently blinding setting is turned on but is other drivers. temporarily unavailable. High beams are currently turned on, If the AFS fails, the instrument panel and Auto High Beam is ready to turn displays an alert. Contact Tesla off the high beams if light is Service. detected in front of Model X. High beams are temporarily turned off because Auto High Beam is on and is detecting light in front of Model X. When light is no longer detected, the high beams will automatically turn back on. 60 Model X Owner's Manual

Lights Turn Signals Move the left-hand steering column lever up (before turning right) or down (before turning left). The turn signals flash three times or continuously, depending on how far up or down you move the lever. Lightly push the turn signal lever up or down for a three-flash sequence. For a continuous signal, push the lever fully up or down. The turn signals stop operating when canceled by the steering wheel, or when you return the lever to the central position. The corresponding turn signal indicator lights up on the instrument panel when a turn signal is operating. You also hear a clicking sound. Warning: If you have purchased an optional Autopilot package, and Traffic- Aware Cruise Control is active, engaging a turn signal can cause Model X to accelerate when using Traffic-Aware Cruise Control in specific situations (see Overtake Acceleration on page 103). Warning: If you have purchased an optional Autopilot package and Autosteer is active, engaging a turn signal may cause Model X to change lanes. Hazard Warning Flashers To turn on the hazard warning flashers, press the button located on the side of the touchscreen closest to the steering wheel. All turn signals flash. Press again to turn off. Note: Hazard warning flashers operate even without a key nearby. Driving 61

Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Overview The instrument panel changes depending on whether Model X is: • Off (shown below). • Driving (see Instrument Panel - Driving on page 66). • Charging (see Charging Status on page 179). When Model X is off, the instrument panel shows remaining estimated range, status of doors, and outside temperature. When you press the brake, indicator lights flash on briefly along the top. Unless an indicator light applies to a current situation, it should turn off. If an indicator light fails to turn on or off, contact Tesla. Note: The following illustration is provided for demonstration purposes only. Depending on vehicle options, software version, and market region, the information displayed may be slightly different. The following indicators illuminate on the instrument panel to advise you or alert you of a specific condition. Indicator Description Low beam headlights are on. High beam headlights are on. Illuminates when high beams are on but the Auto High Beam setting is turned off or if the Auto High Beam setting is turned on but is temporarily unavailable. See High Beam Headlights on page 60. High beam headlights are currently turned on, and Auto High Beam is ready to turn off the high beams if light is detected in front of Model X. See High Beam Headlights on page 60. 62 Model X Owner's Manual

Instrument Panel Indicator Description High beam headlights are temporarily turned off because Auto High Beam is on and is detecting light in front of Model X. When light is no longer detected, the high beams automatically turn back on. See High Beam Headlights on page 60. Parking lights (side marker lights, tail lights, and license plate lights) are on. See Lights on page 58. Front fog lights, if equipped. See Lights on page 58. Adaptive Front Lighting, if equipped. See Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS) on page 60. Electronic stability control systems are actively minimizing wheel spin by controlling brake pressure and motor power (indicator flashes amber). See Traction Control on page 73. If this indicator remains on, a fault is detected and you should immediately contact Tesla. If a fault is detected that reduces the performance of the air suspension system, this amber indicator light displays. If the problem persists, contact Tesla. See Air Suspension on page 157. If a fault is detected that disables the air suspension system, a red indicator lights up on the instrument panel. Contact Tesla. A brake system fault is detected or the brake fluid level is low. See Brakes on page 69. Contact Tesla immediately. Airbag safety. If this red indicator does not flash on briefly when Model X prepares to drive, or if it remains on, contact Tesla immediately. See Airbags on page 41. Driving 63

Instrument Panel Indicator Description An ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) fault is detected. See Brakes on page 69. Contact Tesla immediately. The parking brake is manually applied. See Parking Brake on page 71. A parking brake fault is detected. Contact Tesla. See Parking Brake on page 71. Vehicle Hold is actively applying the brakes. See Vehicle Hold on page 76. Tire pressure warning. The pressure of a tire is out of range. If a fault with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) is detected, the indicator flashes. For a TPMS fault, contact Tesla. See Tire Care and Maintenance on page 183. A door or trunk is open. See Keys and Doors on page 6, Rear Trunk on page 16, or Front Trunk on page 18. A seat belt for an occupied seat is not fastened. See Seat Belts on page 29. Electronic stability control systems are no longer minimizing wheel spin. On a Rear Wheel Drive vehicle, the traction control system has been turned off, or on an All- Wheel Drive vehicle, Slip Start has been enabled. See Traction Control on page 73. Model X is in Tow mode and can roll freely. It does not automatically shift into Park when you exit. See Instructions for Transporters on page 215. 64 Model X Owner's Manual

Instrument Panel Indicator Description Trailer mode (if equipped) is active. See Towing and Accessories on page 86. Appears when some of the stored energy in the Battery may not be available due to cold weather conditions. If Model X is plugged in, you can heat your Battery by turning on climate control with the mobile app. The snowflake icon disappears when the Battery is sufficiently warm. Flashes green when the left turn signal is operating. Both turn signal indicators flash green when the hazard warning flashers are operating. Flashes green when the right turn signal is operating. Both turn signal indicators flash green when the hazard warning flashers are operating. Driving 65

Instrument Panel Instrument Panel - Driving When Model X is driving (or ready to drive), the instrument panel shows your current driving status and a real-time visualization of the road as detected by the Autopilot components (see About Autopilot on page 96). The visualization automatically zooms in and out as needed to inform you when a vehicle is detected in your blind spot. Note: The following illustration is provided for demonstration purposes only. Depending on vehicle options, software version, and market region, the information displayed may be slightly different. 1. Indicator lights display along the top to provide status (see Instrument Panel Overview on page 62). 2. When you are actively navigating to a destination, navigation instructions display here. Use the left steering wheel buttons to change what displays on the left side of the instrument panel whenever navigation instructions are not displayed (see Using Left Steering Wheel Buttons on page 49). 3. Traffic-Aware Cruise Control is cruising at a set speed. When Traffic-Aware Cruise Control is available but you haven't set a cruising speed, the icon is gray and the speed is not shown (see Traffic-Aware Cruise Control on page 99). Note: On roads where the map data determines that a conditional speed limit exists (for example, a speed limit based on time of day or weather conditions), a second speed limit displays below the first speed limit. It is the driver's responsibility to determine whether the conditional speed limit is currently in effect and adjust the driving speed accordingly. 4. Driving speed. 5. Autosteer is actively steering Model X. When Autosteer is available but you haven't activated it, the icon is gray (see Autosteer on page 106). 6. On the Energy graph, dashed lines appear on the power meter if Model X is limiting power. The dashed lines appear on the top portion (energy being used) when power available for acceleration is being limited, and on the bottom portion (energy being gained) when power that can be gained by regenerative braking is limited. Model X limits power for many reasons. Here are just a few examples: • Acceleration may be limited when the Battery is reaching a low state of charge or if the powertrain is hot. • Both acceleration and regenerative braking may be limited when the ambient temperature is either very high or very low. 66 Model X Owner's Manual

Instrument Panel • Regenerative braking may be limited when the Battery is fully charged. Note: Use the right steering wheel buttons to control what displays on the right side of the instrument panel (see Using Right Steering Wheel Buttons on page 50). 7. Pay attention to important alert messages that display here. If any alerts are in effect, you can view information about them by touching the alert icon (exclamation mark) on the touchscreen‡s status bar (the topmost area of the touchscreen). 8. Use the right steering wheel buttons to change what displays on the right side of the instrument panel whenever a phone call is not active (see Using Right Steering Wheel Buttons on page 50). 9. Total estimated driving distance (or energy) available. Instead of driving distance, you can display the percentage of battery energy remaining. To do so, touch Controls > Display > Energy Display. Note: When anticipating when you need to charge, use range estimates as a general guideline only. 10. The speed limit (if available) that is currently being detected by Speed Assist (see Speed Assist on page 127). 11. The car in front of you (if applicable). 12. Pay attention to important driving-related messages that appear at the bottom center of the instrument panel. 13. Your Model X. 14. When Autosteer is active and detects the driving lane, it is highlighted in blue (see Autosteer on page 106). Note: If Navigate on Autopilot is active, the instrument panel displays the driving lane as a single blue line in front of Model X (see Navigate on Autopilot on page 109). 15. Currently selected gear: Park, Reverse, Neutral, or Drive. Warning: Although the instrument panel shows surrounding traffic, some vehicles may not be displayed. Never rely on the instrument panel to determine if a vehicle is present (for example, in your blind spot). Always use your mirrors and perform shoulder checks. Driving 67

Wipers and Washers Wipers and Washers Wipers De-icing Wipers To wipe the windshield, rotate the end of the To make wiper blades easy to access so you left-hand steering column lever away from can remove any ice and snow, shift Model X you. The steering column lever has five into Park, turn the wipers off, then use the positions: touchscreen to move them to the service position. Touch Controls > Service > Wiper • 1st: Off. Service Mode. When parking in cold outdoor • 2nd: Auto with low rain sensitivity.* climates, it is helpful to leave Model X with the • 3rd: Auto with high rain sensitivity.* wipers in the service position. In this position, • 4th: Continuous, slow. they are closer to the defrost vent, allowing • 5th: Continuous, fast. you to thaw them by directing air from the climate control system towards the windshield. Note: Wipers automatically return to their normal position when you shift Model X out of Park. If Model X is equipped with the optional cold weather package, you can de-ice wipers by touching the climate control on the touchscreen (see Climate Controls on page For a single wipe, press and release the end of 140). Wiper heaters automatically turns off the lever. after 15 minutes. If the wipers are set to Auto and Model X detects no liquid on the windshield, the wipers Washers do not wipe. Press the button on the end of the left When you operate the wipers, headlights steering column lever to spray washer fluid automatically turn on (if they are not on onto the windshield. You can press this button already). at two levels. Press partially for a single wipe, *To enable the Auto settings, touch Controls > without any washer fluid. Press fully for both Vehicle > Autowipers (Beta). When wipers are wipe and wash. When washing the windshield, set to Auto, Model X detects whether or not it the wipers will perform two wipes after you is raining. The frequency at which they wipe release the button, then a third wipe a few depends on how much rain is detected on the seconds later. windshield. When wipers are set to high rain sensitivity, the wipers turn on when Model X detects a light mist. Note: The Auto setting is currently in BETA. If uncertain about using the Auto setting while in the BETA phase, Tesla recommends operating the wipers manually, as necessary. Caution: Ensure the wipers are in the Off Periodically top up washer fluid (see Topping position before washing Model X to avoid Up Windshield Washer Fluid on page 195). the risk of damaging the wipers. To extend the life of wiper blades, remove ice from the windshield before turning wipers on. Ice has sharp edges that can damage the rubber on the blades. Periodically check and clean the edge of the wiper blade. If damaged, contact Tesla Service. Caution: In harsh climates, ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen or adhered to the windshield. 68 Model X Owner's Manual

Brakes Brakes Braking Systems Warning: Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you and be Warning: Properly functioning braking aware of hazardous driving conditions. systems are critical to ensure safety. If While the ABS can improve stopping you experience a problem with the brake distance, it cannot overcome the laws of pedal, brake caliper, or any component of physics. It also does not prevent the a Model X braking system, contact Tesla danger of hydroplaning (where a layer of immediately. water prevents direct contact between Model X has an anti-lock braking system the tires and the road). (ABS) that prevents the wheels from locking Automatic Emergency Braking is designed to when you apply maximum brake pressure. This automatically brake in situations where a improves steering control during heavy collision is considered imminent (see braking in most road conditions. Automatic Emergency Braking on page 125). During emergency braking conditions, the Warning: Automatic Emergency Braking ABS constantly monitors the speed of each is not designed to prevent a collision. At wheel and varies the brake pressure according best, it can minimize the impact of a to the grip available. frontal collision by attempting to reduce The alteration of brake pressure can be felt as your driving speed. Depending on a pulsing sensation through the brake pedal. Automatic Emergency Braking to avoid a This demonstrates that the ABS is operating collision can result in serious injury or and is not a cause for concern. Keep firm and death. steady pressure on the brake pedal while experiencing the pulsing. Brake Disc Wiping The ABS indicator briefly flashes Model X is equipped with brake disc wiping, yellow on the instrument panel when which automatically assists in maintaining you first start Model X. If this brake responsiveness in cold and wet weather indicator lights up at any other time, conditions. When such conditions are an ABS fault has occurred and the detected, brake disc wiping repeatedly applies ABS is not operating. Contact Tesla. an imperceptible amount of brake force to The braking system remains fully clear away water on the brake disc surface. operational and is not affected by an This ensures your brakes are responsive even ABS failure. However, braking during poor weather conditions. distances may increase. Hydraulic Fade Compensation If the instrument panel displays this Your vehicle is also equipped with hydraulic red brake indicator at any time other fade compensation. This assists in monitoring than briefly when you first start brake system pressure and ABS activity for Model X, a brake system fault is instances of lower brake performance. If lower detected, or the level of the brake brake performance is detected (as a result of fluid is low. Contact Tesla brake fade, or cold or wet conditions, for immediately. example), you may feel a drop in the brake pedal's position, detect some noise, and notice a strong increase in vehicle braking. Emergency Braking Continue to press the brake pedal without releasing or "pumping" them— just brake as In an emergency, fully press the brake pedal you normally would. and maintain firm pressure, even on low Caution: If the brakes are not functioning traction surfaces. The ABS varies the braking properly, stop the vehicle as soon as pressure to each wheel according to the safety permits and contact Tesla Service. amount of traction available. This prevents See Park on page 56 for information on wheels from locking and ensures that you stop using the Park button to stop the vehicle as safely as possible. in case of emergency. Warning: Do not pump the brake pedal. Warning: Always maintain a safe driving Doing so interrupts operation of the ABS distance from the vehicle in front of you and can increase braking distance. and be cautious in hazardous driving conditions. Do not rely on brake disc Driving 69

Brakes wiping or hydraulic fade compensation to act as a substitute for adequate braking. Regenerative Braking Whenever Model X is moving and your foot is off the accelerator, regenerative braking slows down Model X and feeds any surplus energy back to the Battery. By anticipating your stops and reducing or removing pressure from the accelerator pedal to slow down, you can take advantage of regenerative braking to increase driving range. Of course, this is no substitute for regular braking when needed for safety. Note: If regenerative braking is aggressively slowing Model X (such as when your foot is completely off the accelerator pedal at highway speeds), the brake lights turn on to alert others that you are slowing down. To Set the Regenerative Braking Level Warning: In snowy or icy conditions You can use the touchscreen to change the Model X may experience traction loss level of regenerative braking: during regenerative braking, particularly when in the Standard setting and/or not 1. Touch Controls > Driving > Regenerative using winter tires. Tesla recommends Braking. using the Low setting (see To Set the 2. Choose from two levels: Regenerative Braking Level on page 70) in snowy or icy conditions to help • Standard: Provides the maximum maintain vehicle stability. amount of regenerative braking. When The Energy app displays real-time feedback you release the accelerator, Model X on the amount of energy being gained by slows down, reducing the need to use regenerative braking. You can also display the the brakes. power meter on either side of the instrument • Low: Limits regenerative braking. panel by choosing Energy using the scroll When you release the accelerator, button on the steering wheel (see Steering Model X takes longer to slow down Wheel on page 49). and coasts further than if set to Standard. The amount of energy fed back to the Battery using regenerative braking can depend on the Stopping Mode current state of the Battery and the charge level setting that you are using. For example, Regenerative braking decelerates Model X regenerative braking may be limited if the whenever you release the accelerator pedal Battery is already fully charged or if the when driving. You can choose what you want ambient temperature is too cold. Model X to do once the driving speed has Note: If regenerative braking is limited, a been reduced to a very low speed (almost at a dashed yellow line displays on the power stop) and both the accelerator pedal and meter. brake pedal are released. While in Park, touch Controls > Driving > Stopping Mode and choose from these options: 70 Model X Owner's Manual

Brakes • CREEP: When close to, or at, a complete to do so can result in serious damage, stop, the motor continues to apply torque, injury, or death. moving Model X slowly forward (in Drive) Warning: Do not rely on regenerative or backwards (in Reverse), similar to a braking and your chosen Stopping Mode conventional vehicle with an automatic to keep you and your vehicle safe. Various transmission. In some situations, such as factors such as driving with a heavy on a steep hill or driveway, you may need vehicle load, on a steep hill, or on wet or to press the accelerator pedal to continue icy roads affect deceleration rate and the moving or to prevent Model X from distance at which Model 3 will come to a moving in the opposite direction. stop. Drive attentively and always stay Warning: Never rely on CREEP to prepared to use the brake pedal to stop apply enough torque to prevent your as appropriate based on traffic and road vehicle from rolling down a hill. conditions. Always press the brake pedal to Warning: Forward Collision Warning and remain stopped or the accelerator Automatic Emergency Braking do not pedal to proceed up the hill. Failure to operate when driving at very low speeds do so can result in property damage (see Collision Avoidance Assist on page and/or a collision. 124). Do not rely on these features to • HOLD: Maximizes range and reduces warn you, or to prevent or reduce the brake wear by continuing to provide impact of a collision. regenerative braking at speeds lower than with the Creep and Roll settings. When Note: Your chosen setting is retained in your Model X stops, the brakes are Driver Profile until you manually change it. automatically applied without you having to put your foot on the brake pedal. Parking Brake Whether stopped on a flat surface or a hill, Vehicle Hold keeps the brake applied, The parking brake automatically engages provided your foot remains off the when you shift Model X into Park, and releases accelerator and brake pedals. See Vehicle when you shift into any other gear. Hold on page 76. Warning: Never rely on HOLD to adequately decelerate or fully stop your vehicle. Many factors can contribute to a longer stopping distance, including downward slopes, the low regenerative braking setting, Note: The parking brake operates on the rear and reduced or limited regenerative wheels only, and is independent of the pedal- braking (see Regenerative Braking on operated brake system. page 70). Always be prepared to use the brake pedal to adequately Warning: In snowy or icy conditions the decelerate or stop. rear wheels may not have sufficient • ROLL: When close to, or at, a complete traction to prevent Model X from sliding stop, Model X becomes free rolling like a down a slope, particularly if not using vehicle in Neutral. Therefore, if stopped on winter tires. Avoid parking on hills in a slope, Model X will roll downward. The snowy or icy conditions. You are always brake does not engage, and the motor responsible for parking safely. does not apply torque (until the Warning: Your Model X may display an accelerator pedal is pressed). alert if the road is too steep to safely park Note: If you choose CREEP or ROLL, you on, or if the parking brakes are not can still use Vehicle Hold to apply the properly engaged. These alerts are for brakes. However, you will need to briefly guidance purposes only and are not a press the brake pedal when the vehicle is substitute for the driver‡s judgment of stopped. See Vehicle Hold on page 76. safe parking conditions, including specific Warning: Press the brake pedal if Model X road or weather conditions. Do not moves when unsafe to do so. It is your depend on these alerts to determine responsibility to stay alert and be in whether or not it is safe to park at any control of the vehicle at all times. Failure location. You are always responsible for parking safely. Driving 71

Brakes Use the touchscreen to manually release the parking brake (which also shifts Model X into Neutral): 1. Touch Controls > Safety & Security. 2. Press the brake pedal, then touch Parking Brake. If Model X was previously in Park, it shifts into Neutral. When you use the touchscreen to manually apply the parking brake, the red parking brake indicator lights up on the instrument panel . If the parking brake experiences an electrical issue, the amber parking brake indicator lights up and a fault message displays at the top of the instrument panel. Caution: In the unlikely event that Model X loses electrical power, you cannot access the touchscreen and are therefore unable to release the parking brake. Contact Tesla. Brake Wear Model X brake pads are equipped with wear indicators. A wear indicator is a thin metal strip attached to the brake pad that squeals as it rubs against the rotor when the pad wears down. This squealing sound indicates that the brake pads have reached the end of their service life and require replacement. To replace the brake pads, contact Tesla Service. Brakes must be periodically inspected visually by removing the tire and wheel. For detailed specifications and service limits for rotors and brake pads, see Subsystems on page 203. Additionally, Tesla recommends cleaning and lubricating the brake calipers every year or 12,500 miles (20,000 km) if in an area where roads are salted during winter months. Warning: Neglecting to replace worn brake pads damages the braking system and can result in a braking hazard. 72 Model X Owner's Manual

Traction Control Traction Control How It Works Although Slip Start is automatically disabled the next time you start Model X, it is strongly The traction control system constantly recommended that you disable it immediately monitors the speed of the front and rear after the circumstances that required you to wheels. If Model X experiences a loss of enable it have passed. traction, the system minimizes wheel spin by Note: Slip Start cannot be enabled when you controlling brake pressure and motor power. are actively using Traffic-Aware Cruise Control. By default, the traction control system is on. Under normal conditions, it should remain on to ensure maximum safety. This yellow indicator flashes on the instrument panel whenever the traction control system is actively controlling brake pressure and motor power to minimize wheel spin. If the indicator stays on, a fault is detected with the traction control system. Contact Tesla Service. Warning: If the above indicator remains illuminated in situations in which you have not enabled Slip Start (described next), the traction control system may not be operating correctly. Contact Tesla Service immediately. Warning: Traction control cannot prevent collisions caused by driving dangerously or turning too sharply at high speeds. Allowing Wheel Slip To allow the wheels to spin at a limited speed, you can enable Slip Start. Slip Start can be enabled only when Model X is moving 30 mph (48 km/h) or slower. Slip Start automatically disables when the speed exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h). Under normal conditions, Slip Start should not be enabled. Enable it only in circumstances where you deliberately want the wheels to spin, such as: • Starting on a loose surface, such as gravel or snow. • Driving in deep snow, sand or mud. • Rocking out of a hole or deep rut. To allow the wheels to spin, touch Controls > Driving > Traction Control > Slip Start. The instrument panel displays an alert message when Slip Start is enabled. Driving 73

Park Assist Park Assist How Park Assist Works is free of objects and/or people. Several external factors can reduce the Model X has several sensors designed to performance of Park Assist, causing detect the presence of objects. When driving either no readings or false readings (see slowly in Drive or Reverse (for example, when Limitations and False Warnings on page parking), the sensors alert you if an object is 75). Therefore, depending on Park Assist detected in close proximity of your Model X. to determine if Model X is approaching an Objects are only detected in the direction of obstruction can result in damage to the the gear you selected; front objects in Drive, vehicle and/or objects, and can rear objects in Reverse. potentially cause serious injury. Always Warning: You may not be alerted if inspect the area with your own eyes. Model X rolls freely in the opposite When reversing, perform shoulder checks direction of the gear you selected (for and use all mirrors. Park assist does not example, you will not receive an alert if detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, Model X rolls backwards down a hill while animals, or objects that are moving, in Drive). protruding, located too far above or below the sensors, or too close or too far from the sensors. Park Assist is for guidance purposes only and is not intended to replace your own direct visual checks. It is not a substitute for careful driving. Visual and Audio Feedback When you shift to Reverse, the Park Assist view displays on the left side of the instrument panel, showing objects that are in close proximity to the front and rear of Model X. This view closes when you shift into Drive unless an object is detected close to the front of Model X, in which case the Park Assist view closes automatically when your driving speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). When reversing, visual feedback also displays on the touchscreen, immediately below the camera view (see Rear View Camera on page 82). You can manually close the park assist view on the touchscreen by touching the X in the upper left corner. When driving with the Camera app displayed The sensors are activated when driving slower on the touchscreen, you can switch to the than 5 mph (8 km/h). Park Assist view when driving at speeds below 5 mph (8 km/h). Touch the button located in the upper left corner of the Camera app window. This is useful if you need assistance with parallel parking. If chimes are turned on (see Controlling Audible Feedback on page 75), an audible beep sounds as you approach an object. You can temporarily mute the chime by pressing the scroll button on the left side of the Note: Rear sensors are disabled when a steering wheel or by touching the mute button bicycle is detected or Model X is in trailer on the bottom left corner of the Park Assist mode. view. Warning: Never depend on Park Assist to Note: If a sensor is unable to provide inform you if an area you are approaching feedback, the instrument panel displays an alert message. 74 Model X Owner's Manual

Park Assist Caution: Keep sensors clean from dirt, • You are driving in a location where the debris, snow, and ice. Avoid using a high sensors' ultrasonic waves are deflected pressure power washer on the sensors away from the vehicle (such as driving and do not clean a sensor with a sharp or next to a wall or pillar). abrasive object that can scratch or • The object is located too close to the damage its surface. bumper. Caution: Do not install accessories or • A bumper is misaligned or damaged. stickers on or near the parking sensors. • An object that is mounted to Model X is interfering with and/or obstructing the Controlling Audible Feedback sensor (such as a bike rack or bumper sticker). You can use Park Assist with or without • Model X rolls freely in the opposite audible feedback. To turn chimes on or off, direction of the gear you selected (for touch Controls > Safety & Security > Park example, you will not receive an alert if Assist Chimes. Model X rolls backwards down a hill while To mute the chimes temporarily, press the in Drive). scroll button on the left side of the steering wheel or touch the mute button in the corner Other Parking Aids of the Park Assist view. The chimes are muted In addition to Park Assist, when shifted into until you shift into a different gear or drive Reverse, the backup camera displays a view of over 5 mph (8 km/h). the area behind Model X (see Rear View Limitations and False Warnings Camera on page 82). The parking sensors may not function correctly in these situations: • One or more of the parking sensors is damaged, dirty, or covered (such as mud, ice, or snow). • The object is located below approximately 8 inches (20 cm) (such as a curb or low barrier). Caution: Shorter objects that are detected (such as curbs or low barriers) can move into the blind spot of the sensors. Model X cannot alert you about an object while it is in the blind spot of the sensors. • Weather conditions (heavy rain, snow, or fog) are interfering with sensor operation. • The object is thin (such as a sign post). • A sensor‡s operating range has been exceeded. • The object is sound-absorbing or soft (such as powder snow). • The object is sloped (such as a sloped embankment). • Model X has been parked in, or being driven in, extremely hot or cold temperatures. • The sensors are affected by other electrical equipment or devices that generate ultrasonic waves. Driving 75

Vehicle Hold Vehicle Hold When Model X is stopped, Vehicle Hold can continue to apply the brakes even after you remove your foot from the brake pedal. When driving on a hill or on a flat surface, brake as you normally would. After coming to a complete stop, simply press the brake pedal again (until the instrument panel displays the Vehicle Hold indicator light) to enable Vehicle Hold. You can then release the brake pedal and remain stopped, even on a hill. This indicator displays on the instrument panel whenever Vehicle Hold is actively braking Model X. To disengage Vehicle Hold, press the accelerator pedal or press and release the brake pedal. Note: Shifting into Neutral also disengages Vehicle Hold. Note: After actively braking Model X for approximately ten minutes, Model X shifts into Park and Vehicle Hold cancels. Model X also shifts into Park if it detects that the driver has left the vehicle. Note: When Stopping Mode is set to Hold (see Stopping Mode on page 70), Vehicle Hold engages automatically whenever Model X stops while in a driving gear. There is no need to press the brake to engage it. 76 Model X Owner's Manual

Acceleration Modes Acceleration Modes The acceleration settings available on your Using Insane+ or Ludicrous+ Model X vary depending on options chosen at time of purchase: If you choose Insane or Ludicrous, additional • Chill: limits acceleration for a smooth and power is available immediately. However, to gentle ride (available on all vehicles achieve the absolute maximum power equipped with Autopilot hardware). (designed for short term use), you can choose Insane+ or Ludicrous+ to heat the Battery to • Standard: provides the normal level of its ideal operating temperature. This ensure acceleration (available on non- access to 100% of available power. Heating the Performance All-Wheel Drive vehicles). Battery can take over an hour, depending on • Sport: provides the normal level of environmental conditions and whether or not acceleration (available on Performance Model X is being driven. All-Wheel Drive vehicles). While the battery is being heated, the • Insane: increases peak torque by touchscreen displays a message providing you approximately 30 percent (available on with an approximate wait time, and letting you Performance All-Wheel Drive vehicles not know when the additional power is available. equipped with the Ludicrous upgrade). Note: Insane+ and Ludicrous+ are designed to • Ludicrous: increases peak torque by achieve maximum performance for short term approximately 60 percent (available on acceleration. These settings are not intended Performance All-Wheel Drive vehicles for daily driving. The tradeoff for the equipped with the Ludicrous upgrade). additional power boost is extra energy • Insane+: increases peak torque by consumption and earlier power fade on long approximately 30 percent (available on drives. The Insane or Ludicrous acceleration Performance All-Wheel Drive vehicles not settings provide a significant increase in equipped with the Ludicrous upgrade) performance even without choosing the while also heating up the Battery to its Insane+ or Ludicrous+ setting to achieve ideal operating temperature to ensure maximum Battery power. In fact, in normal access to 100% of available power. Before driving situations, the additional power that choosing this setting, read about Using can be achieved using Insane+ and Ludicrous+ Insane+ or Ludicrous+ on page 77. may be unnoticeable. • Ludicrous+: increases peak torque by Note: To support Insane+ or Ludicrous+, the approximately 60 percent (available on charge level must be 20% or higher. You Performance All-Wheel Drive vehicles cannot initiate these settings if the charge equipped with the Ludicrous upgrade) level is less than 20%. In addition, these while also immediately heating up the settings immediately cancel if at any time Battery to its ideal operating temperature during use, the charge level drops below 20%. to ensure access to 100% of available power. Before choosing this setting, read When using Insane+ or Ludicrous+, Model X about Using Insane+ or Ludicrous+ on consumes more energy to keep the Battery page 77. within an optimal temperature range. Note: Although Chill does not directly improve To cancel Insane+ or Ludicrous+ at any time, driving range, using the increased torque and change the acceleration level to another power available in Insane or Ludicrous mode setting. To prevent excess and potentially can reduce range and efficiency. unnecessary energy consumption (for Note: When Chill is selected, Chill displays on example, you leave the vehicle and forget to the instrument panel above the driving speed. cancel Insane+ or Ludicrous+), these settings cancel automatically in three hours, regardless In addition, a Performance All-Wheel Drive of whether you are still driving or have left the Model X also features Launch Mode to provide vehicle. optimum acceleration on surfaces with good Note: Insane+ or Ludicrous+ strives to keep traction. For the specific driving instructions the Battery within an optimal temperature required to use Launch Mode, see Launch range. In addition to heating the Battery, these Mode on page 78. settings also cool the battery when necessary To choose an acceleration mode, touch (for example, while driving at high speeds, Controls > Driving > Acceleration. during rapid acceleration, driving for long periods, etc.). Driving 77

Acceleration Modes Note: Launch Mode is available only if the Launch Mode ambient temperature is 37° F (3° C) or Launch Mode, available on Performance All- warmer. Wheel Drive vehicles only, provides optimum acceleration on surfaces with good traction. Note: Hard acceleration including, but not limited to, using launch mode, increases stress on the vehicle‡s powertrain, and can cause premature wear and aging of various components. Model X constantly monitors powertrain fatigue and damage, and notifies you if vehicle components need to be serviced. Warning: Use Launch Mode only in appropriate locations where there is no cross traffic or pedestrians present. Launch Mode is designed for use on closed circuit driving courses. It is the driver‡s responsibility to ensure that driving style and acceleration do not endanger or inconvenience other road users. To Activate Launch Mode 1. Ensure the brakes are slightly warm by driving for a few minutes and using the brakes a few times. 2. Set the air suspension to Low or Very Low (see Air Suspension on page 157). 3. Set the acceleration level to Insane or Ludicrous and enable Max Battery Power. Note: You can use Launch Mode immediately after enabling Max Battery Power. There is no need to wait until Max Battery Power is in its READY state. 4. With Model X shifted into Drive and at a complete stop with the steering wheel straight, fully press the brake pedal with your left foot. 5. While still pressing the brake with your left foot, fully press the accelerator pedal with your right foot, then release the accelerator pedal. The instrument panel displays a message indicating that Launch Mode is enabled. 6. Within eight seconds, fully press the accelerator pedal a second time to pre- load motor torque, then within four seconds, release the brake. When you release the brake, Model X launches forward. Note: Launch Mode is not available if Slip Start has been enabled (which allows the wheels to spin). See Traction Control on page 73. 78 Model X Owner's Manual

Trip Information Trip Information Displaying Trip Information Trip information displays on the touchscreen when you touch Controls > Trips. For the current trip, you can display distance, duration and average energy usage. You can also show distance and total and average energy used since your last charge and for additional trips. To name or rename a trip, touch the trip's name, enter a new name for the trip, then press Save. To reset a particular trip meter, touch its associated Reset button. You can display information for up to three trips on the instrument panel. Use the checkboxes to specify the trip(s) you want to display. Then use the scroll bar on the steering wheel to display the chosen trip(s) (see Using Left Steering Wheel Buttons on page 49 or Using Right Steering Wheel Buttons on page 50). Odometer To display the odometer, touch the Tesla “T” at the top center of the touchscreen. Driving 79

Getting Maximum Range Getting Maximum Range Driving Tips to Maximize Range • Consumption: display how much energy Model X has consumed over the past 5, 15 You can maximize your driving range using or 30 miles (10, 25 or 50 km). the same driving habits that you use to Touch Instant Range or Average Range to conserve fuel in a gasoline-powered vehicle. In adjust the projected range estimation. addition to driving habits, energy Instant Range uses only the latest few consumption depends on environmental data points to estimate the projected conditions (such as exceptionally cold or hot range, whereas Average Range uses the weather and driving on roads with steep hills). past 5, 15 or 30 miles (10, 25 or 50 km) of To get the maximum range from a charge: energy consumption to provide a more • Slow down your driving and avoid accurate projected range. frequent and rapid acceleration. • Trip: monitor the amount of energy being • If safe to do so, modulate the accelerator used while navigating to a destination. pedal instead of using the brake pedal You can track actual usage against the when gradually slowing down. Whenever initial prediction. The green line represents Model X is moving and you are not the actual usage whereas the gray line pressing the accelerator pedal, represents predicted usage. To change the regenerative braking slows down Model X zoom level, touch the zoom icon located and feeds surplus energy back to the in the top right corner of the chart. Battery (see Regenerative Braking on Note: The Trip chart displays energy usage page 70). only if you are currently navigating to a • Set the Stopping Mode to HOLD to gain destination. the benefit of regenerative braking at low driving speeds (see Stopping Mode on page 70). Saving Energy • Keep tires at the recommended inflation Model X has an energy-saving feature that pressures (see Tire Care and Maintenance reduces the amount of energy being on page 183). consumed when Model X is not in use. On • Lighten your load by removing any newer vehicles, this feature is automated to unnecessary cargo. provide an optimal level of energy saving. • Fully raise all windows. However, on older vehicles, you can touch • Limit the use of resources such as heating, Controls > Display > Energy Saving and daytime running lights, and air choose from the following options: conditioning. Using seat heaters to keep • OFF - Model X shifts to the energy-saving warm is more efficient than heating the mode at night (10 pm to 5 am). Idle cabin. To automatically limit the amount of energy consumption may increase. power that the climate control system • ON - significantly less energy is consumed uses to maintain the temperature of the whenever Model X is not in use. The start- Battery and the cabin area, touch up time of the instrument panel and Controls > Driving > Range Mode. Bluetooth could be slower. The power meter on the instrument panel and • Always Connected - preserves cell the Energy app provides feedback on energy connectivity when energy saving is active. usage. With this feedback, you can become This allows the mobile app to connect to familiar with how driving habits and Model X quicker, and provides immediate environmental conditions impact how much internet access when entering the car. energy Model X is using. Slightly more energy is consumed. Energy App Range Assurance Use the Energy app to view real-time and Model X helps protect you against running out projected energy usage. Choose from two of energy. Model X continuously monitors its types of charts: energy level and proximity to known charging locations. 80 Model X Owner's Manual

Getting Maximum Range Touch the map's charging icon to toggle between displaying superchargers only, and displaying all chargers, including destination chargers, and visited chargers. When you are at risk of driving beyond the range of known charging locations, the touchscreen displays a message giving you the opportunity to display a list of charging locations that are within range. When you select a charging location from the list, Model X provides navigation instructions and the turn-by-turn direction list displays the predicted amount of energy that will remain when you arrive at the charging destination. Driving 81

Rear View Camera Rear View Camera Camera Location Cleaning the Camera Model X is equipped with a rear view camera To ensure a clear picture, keep the camera located above the rear license plate. lens clean, and free of obstructions. Remove any buildup of dirt by occasionally wiping the camera lens with a soft damp cloth. Caution: Do not use chemical-based or abrasive cleaners. Doing so can damage the surface of the camera lens. Whenever you shift into Reverse, the touchscreen displays the view from the camera. Lines show your driving path based on the position of the steering wheel. These lines adjust appropriately as you move the steering wheel. Note: Visual feedback from the parking sensors displays on the instrument panel (see Park Assist on page 74). To display the view from the camera at any time: Open the app launcher then touch the camera icon. Warning: Never depend on the rear view camera to inform you if the area behind you is free of objects and/or people when reversing. The camera may not detect objects or barriers that can potentially cause damage or injury. In addition, several external factors can reduce the performance of the camera, including a dirty or obstructed lens. Therefore, depending on the rear view camera to determine if Model X is approaching an obstruction can result in damage to the vehicle and/or objects, and can potentially cause serious injury. Always inspect the area with your own eyes. When reversing, perform shoulder checks and use all mirrors. Use the camera for guidance purposes only. It is not intended to replace your own direct visual checks and is not a substitute for careful driving. 82 Model X Owner's Manual

Dashcam Dashcam About Dashcam • Use a flash drive with as much available storage as possible, since video footage Note: Dashcam is a BETA feature. takes up a large amount of space (Tesla In addition to supporting Autopilot features, recommends using a flash drive with at the cameras can record and store video least 32 GB of storage). Some personal footage on a USB flash drive. This can be computer operating systems may not be convenient in situations where you want a able to format flash drives larger than 32 video recording of a particular incident, such GB as FAT 32. Consider using a third party as a collision. You can pause, resume, or save application to format flash drives larger video recordings directly from your vehicle‡s than 32 GB. touchscreen. • The flash drive must have a sustained Note: Dashcam only works when Model X is write speed of at least 4 MB/s. A powered on (see Starting and Powering Off on sustained write speed is different from the page 54). Dashcam does not record video peak write speed. Check the product when your vehicle is powered off. details of your flash drive for more information. • The flash drive must be USB 2.0 Using Dashcam compatible. If using a USB 3.0 flash drive, Dashcam requires the use of a properly it must be able to support USB 2.0. formatted USB flash drive to store and retrieve • Use a dedicated flash drive exclusively for footage (see USB Flash Drive Requirements saving footage for your vehicle. for Videos and Recording on page 162). Once • The flash drive must be properly a properly formatted USB flash drive has been formatted (see Formatting the USB Flash inserted into one of your vehicle's front USB Drive on page 162). ports, a dashcam icon appears at the top of the touchscreen. Touch the dashcam icon to Formatting the USB Flash Drive control dashcam: To correctly save and retrieve video footage, RECORDING. Tap the dashcam your vehicle requires a properly formatted icon, when dashcam is paused, to USB flash drive containing a base-level folder start recording video on the flash called “TeslaCam” (without quotation marks). drive. In addition, the flash drive must be formatted as FAT 32 (for Windows), MS-DOS FAT (for PAUSED. Press and hold the Mac), ext3, or ext4 in order to save videos. dashcam icon, when recording, to NTFS and exFAT are not currently supported. pause recording. Ensure that dashcam is paused before For MacOS: removing the flash drive to avoid 1. Insert the USB flash drive into your losing camera footage. personal computer. SAVED. Tap the dashcam icon, 2. Navigate to Utilities > Disk Utility (or you when recording, to archive the can conduct a Spotlight Search for this). most recent ten minutes of video. 3. Select your flash drive in the left menu. These saved video recordings are 4. Navigate to Erase in the top menu ribbon. not overwritten by new recordings. 5. In the pop-up menu, select the correct format (MS-DOS FAT) and click Erase. Note: Dashcam automatically begins recording Note: Selecting Erase completely erases when you insert a properly configured USB all content on your flash drive. If you have flash drive into one of the front USB ports. other content stored on the flash drive, migrate it to a different device before USB Flash Drive Requirements for erasing it. Videos and Recording 6. Once the flash drive is successfully erased, navigate to Finder and select your USB Flash drives used to store video from your flash drive from the left menu. The flash vehicle's cameras must meet these drive should not contain any files. requirements: 7. Right-click in the empty space of the flash drive and select New Folder. A folder appears in your flash drive space. Driving 83

Dashcam 8. Right-click on the folder, select Rename, Within the “TeslaCam” folder, there are three and name the folder to “TeslaCam” sub-folders: Recent Clips, Saved Clips, and (without quotation marks). Click "Save". Sentry Clips. The footage in Recent Clips This folder will contain all of the recent constantly loops in a 60-minute cycle when and saved clips from Sentry Mode and the cameras are activated. Therefore, the dashcam. footage is constantly being overwritten every 9. Properly eject the USB flash drive from hour unless the footage is saved. When an your personal computer. event is recorded, one video is recorded for each of the front, rear (if equipped), left, and For Windows: right cameras. 1. Insert the USB flash drive into your Saved footage is located in either the Saved personal computer. Clips or Sentry Clips folder. Footage in the 2. Navigate to File Explorer. Saved Clips folder contains all saved 3. Right-click on your USB flash drive and recordings from dashcam, which have been select "Format...". manually saved by touching the dashcam icon on the touchscreen. Sentry Clips contains all 4. In the pop-up menu, under the File saved footage from Sentry Mode events, System section, select “FAT 32”. which have been automatically saved when Note: You can also name your USB (under the Alert or Alarm state was triggered. Once Volume Label) for easier recognition. footage of a particular event is saved, the 5. Check the “Quick format box” and click latest 10 minutes of video is archived in your Start. flash drive labeled with a unique timestamp. 6. Go back to File Explorer, click on your Note: If your USB flash drive is getting full, the flash drive, and right-click to create a oldest footage in Sentry Clips will be deleted folder, or select “New Folder” in the top to make room for new footage. Once the older menu. footage is deleted, you will not be able to 7. Name the folder “TeslaCam” (without retrieve them. When the flash drive is full, quotation marks) and click "Save". This Sentry Mode and dashcam can no longer save folder will contain all of the recent and video footage to your flash drive. saved clips from Sentry Mode and Note: To prevent the flash drive from getting dashcam. full, move the saved videos to another device 8. Properly eject the USB flash drive from as soon as possible. your personal computer. Note: You are responsible for complying with Once you have created the “TeslaCam” folder all local laws, regulations, and property in your USB flash drive and ejected it from restrictions regarding video. The cameras do your personal computer, insert the flash drive not record audio. into one of the front USB ports in Model X. Do not use the rear USB ports, as they are solely meant for charging devices. It may take your vehicle up to 15 seconds to recognize the flash drive. When recognized, icons for dashcam and Sentry Mode appear at the top of your touchscreen (note that you may need to enable to Sentry Mode by going to Controls > Safety & Security > Sentry Mode). Your vehicle is ready to record video. Retrieving Footage To retrieve video footage from the flash drive, remove the flash drive from the front USB port and use a personal computer or other device to access the files. Navigate to the “TeslaCam” folder on the flash drive. 84 Model X Owner's Manual

Active Spoiler Active Spoiler Model X has a rear spoiler designed to improve aerodynamics. If Model X is equipped with the active spoiler, the position of the spoiler can vary depending on the status and speed of Model X: • When Model X is in Reverse or when driving speed is below 10 mph (16 km/h), the spoiler provides maximum visibility behind Model X. • When driving speed exceeds 45 mph (72 km/h), the spoiler lowers to the position that provides the most effective aerodynamics. • When Model X is powered off and locked, the spoiler retracts. To allow the spoiler to automatically move as described above, touch Controls > Service > Spoiler Mode > Automatic. To disable automatic movement of the spoiler and keep it in its extended position, choose the Extended setting. Note: If the spoiler can not automatically lower or raise, the instrument panel displays an alert. Contact Tesla Service. Driving 85

Towing and Accessories Towing and Accessories The towing package allows you to tow a trailer party products are available, Tesla with your Model X. It also allows you to carry recommends and supports only Tesla- skis, snowboards, bicycles, etc. by attaching approved products (see Parts and Accessories an accessory carrier to the hitch. on page 197). The accessory products available for your Model X vary based on Carrying Accessories market region. Before attempting to install a non-Tesla carrier, review the product The Model X towing package has a 2" hitch information to ensure compatibility. receiver that can support an accessory carrier. Note: When not in use, the hitch receiver The hitch receiver is designed to support should be removed and stored in a dry vertical loads of up to 120 lbs (54 kg). When location to prevent rust and corrosion. Keep carrying bicycles or other items on the Model the dust cover over the hitch housing to X hitch, always check to ensure that the prevent dirt and debris from entering (see maximum weight is not exceeded. When Disconnecting the Tow Hitch on page 93). calculating weight, remember to include the Caution: A carrier may obscure your view weight of the accessory carrier. For example, from the rear view mirror, the rear assuming the carrier weighs 40 lbs, the weight camera(s), and/or the rear ultrasonic threshold is sufficient for carrying two bicycles sensors. In addition, some Autopilot weighing approximately 40 lbs each, or four features may not function as expected. bicycles weighing approximately 20 lbs each. Caution: The Model X hitch is designed to Warning: Tesla assumes no responsibility support up to 120 lbs (54 kg). Exceeding for damage or injuries resulting from this maximum weight can cause installing and using an accessory carrier, significant damage. for any omissions in the instructions accompanying an accessory carrier, or for Caution: Do not attempt to install a your failure to follow the instructions. carrier on a Model X that is not equipped Damage caused by using an accessory with the towing package. Doing so can carrier is not covered by the warranty. cause significant damage. To install and use an accessory carrier, the tow hitch must be connected (see Connecting the Tow Hitch on page 91). Then follow the instructions provided with your accessory carrier. Observe all regulations and legal requirements in your state/region that apply to carrying accessories. The Model X towing package includes the wiring necessary for using an accessory carrier equipped with lights (see Electrical Connections on page 94). The package also includes Trailer Mode software (see Trailer Mode on page 89). When you connect an accessory carrier's wiring harness, Model X detects a connection for trailer lights and this indicator illuminates on the instrument panel. Trailer Mode is disabled. When carrying accessories, periodically confirm that the accessory carrier and its cargo remain secure at all times, and if applicable, that the lights on the accessory carrier are working. Note: Go to www.tesla.com to purchase accessories for your Model X. Although third- 86 Model X Owner's Manual

Towing and Accessories Towing Capacity towing a trailer, for any errors or omissions in the instructions The total trailer weight (including all cargo accompanying towing equipment, or for and additional equipment), and the trailer your failure to follow the proper tongue weight, must never exceed the instructions. Damage caused by towing a following: trailer is not covered by the warranty. Tires Maximum Maximum Towing Tongue Capacity* Weight** 245/45R19 110 SAE Class SAE Class V / Y III – 4960 III – 500 lbs lbs (2250 (227 kg) kg) 275/45R20 110 SAE Class SAE Class V / Y III – 4960 III – 500 lbs lbs (2250 (227 kg) kg) 285/35R22 106 SAE Class II SAE Class II W – 3480 lbs – 350 lbs (1580 kg) (158 kg) *Tesla recommends a separate braking system on trailers with a loaded weight of over 1000 lbs (450 kg). The braking system must be appropriate for the weight of the trailer. Follow the instructions provided by the trailer brake manufacturer to ensure that trailer brakes are properly installed, adjusted, and maintained. **The tongue weight is the downward force that the weight of the trailer exerts on the hitch. It must not be less than 10% of the trailer load. Carrying a significant amount of equipment, passengers, or cargo in the tow vehicle can reduce the tongue weight it can handle, which also reduces the maximum towing capacity. Maximum towing capacity is calculated assuming the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) is not exceeded. The GVWR is printed on the Vehicle Certification Label (see Vehicle Certification Label on page 200). Note: If the towing capacity on the hitch label conflicts with the information provided in this owner's manual, this owner's manual takes precedence. Warning: Do not overload the vehicle or trailer. Doing so can cause poor performance, vehicle damage and loss of vehicle control, resulting in serious injury. Warning: Do not use the trailer hitch to tow/transport Model X. Caution: Tesla assumes no responsibility for damage or injuries resulting from Driving 87

Towing and Accessories Tire Pressures when Towing • Observe all regulations and legal requirements in your state/region that When towing a trailer, tire pressures must be apply to trailer towing. Failure to comply adjusted to accommodate the additional load. with regulations can compromise your Keep tires inflated to the pressures shown safety. below (these pressures override the pressures • Adjust side mirrors to provide a clear that are provided on the Tire and Loading rearward view without a significant blind information label): spot. Front Tires Rear Tires Cold Tire • Engage Trailer Mode . (See Trailer Mode Inflation on page 89). Pressure Confirm the following: 245/45R19 245/45R19 45 psi (310 • Model X rests horizontally with the trailer kPa) attached. If the vehicle is tipped up at the front, and down at the rear, check that you 255/45R20 275/45R20 46 psi (320 are not exceeding the maximum towing kPa) capacity and tongue loads provided in 265/45R20 Carrying Capacity. 265/35ZR22 285/35ZR22 50 psi (345 • All trailer hitch parts and attachments , kPa) safety chains, and electrical connectors are in good condition and are properly connected. If any problems are apparent, Warning: Check tire pressures using an do not tow the trailer. accurate pressure gauge when tires are • Trailer lights (brake lights, turn signal cold. Driving one mile (1.6 km) warms the lights, and marker lights) are working tires sufficiently to affect tire pressures. properly. Parking the vehicle in direct sunlight or in • The trailer tongue is securely connected hot weather can also affect tire pressures. to the hitch ball. If you must check warm tires, expect • Safety chains are properly connected increased pressures. Do not let air out of between the trailer and the tow vehicle. warm tires in an attempt to match Cross the safety chains under the tongue recommended cold tire pressures. A hot of the trailer to help prevent the tongue tire at or below the recommended cold from contacting the road if it separates tire inflation pressure is dangerously from the hitch. Leave enough slack in the under-inflated. safety chains to allow for turns and ensure Warning: Never attempt to tow a trailer that the chains can never drag on the when a Model X tire is faulty or has been ground. inflated using a tire repair kit. A • All cargo is secured. temporarily repaired tire is not designed • Wheel chocks are available. to sustain the towing load. Towing using a • The trailer load is evenly distributed such faulty or temporarily repaired tire can that the trailer tongue weight is result in tire failure and loss of vehicle approximately 10% of the total trailer stability. weight, without exceeding the maximum tongue weights provided in Carrying Before Towing a Trailer Capacity. • If the trailer is equipped with a separate Before towing a trailer, you must do the braking system, check that the brakes following: work and are properly adjusted. To • Inflate tires to the cold tire inflation provide safe stopping ability, you must pressure specified in Tire Pressures when balance the trailer brakes with the vehicle Towing. brakes. • Set Suspension to Standard height (touch Note: For general information about trailer Controls > Suspension > Standard). safety provided by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, go to: http:// www.nhtsa.gov/cars/problems/Equipment/ towing/Towing.pdf. 88 Model X Owner's Manual

Towing and Accessories Warning: The trailer tongue weight must (Controls > Driving > E-Brake & Power Off > be approximately 10% of the total trailer Parking Brake). weight without exceeding the maximum Some Autopilot features (Autosteer, Summon, tongue weights provided in Carrying Lane Assist, etc.), as well as rear parking Capacity. Loads that are balanced over sensor functionality, may not be available the wheels or heavier in the rear can when Trailer Mode is enabled. In addition, cause trailer sway, resulting in loss of these features operate differently: vehicle control. Warning: Always ensure that cargo is • Traffic-Aware Cruise Control increases the secured in the trailer and will not shift. following distance from the car in front of Dynamic load shifts can cause loss of you. vehicle control, resulting in serious injury • The air suspension system will not make or death. speed-based adjustments from STANDARD to LOW. Trailer Mode • The air suspension system does not automatically raise ride height based on Trailer Mode must always be active when saved locations. towing a trailer. When you connect a trailer's • Side collision warnings are active but electrical connection, Model X automatically automatic steering interventions are engages Trailer Mode. When you disconnect disabled. the trailer's electrical connection, Trailer Mode • The braking force provided by Automatic disengages. To engage or exit Trailer Mode Emergency Braking (see Collision manually, touch Controls > Driving > Trailer Avoidance Assist on page 124) is Mode on the touchscreen. One of the significantly limited. following indicators display on the instrument Warning: Do not rely on Model X to panel: detect the trailer and automatically Trailer Mode is active. engage Trailer Mode. Always check that Trailer Mode is engaged before towing a trailer. Model X detects a connection for Warning: Under no circumstances should trailer lights but Trailer Mode is you exit Trailer Mode when towing a disabled. It is likely that a carrying trailer. Doing so can cause serious injury accessory has been connected. and/or death. Model X detects a faulty electrical Warning: Do not use the suspension connection for the trailer lights. setting to appropriately match the height Some, or all, trailer lights may not be of the hitch with the height of the trailer. functioning. Pull over as soon as You must choose a trailer hitch and trailer safety permits and inspect the trailer that have the appropriate height for lights for faulty cabling or suitable axle loading and trailer balance. connections. If the issues are Trailer Brakes resolved and the red icon still persists, turn Trailer Mode off and on When towing a loaded trailer that weighs again. more than 1000 lbs (450 kg), Tesla recommends that the trailer be equipped with Note: In situations where Model X detects a its own brake system adequate for the weight heavy load, it assumes that a trailer is of the trailer. Ensure compliance with local connected and automatically engages Trailer regulations. Mode. A message displays on the instrument Follow these steps to connect a brake panel informing you that Trailer Mode has controller: been engaged. When Trailer Mode is entered automatically due to detection of a heavy load, you can change the Trailer Mode setting only by stopping Model X and engaging Park or engaging Neutral and manually applying the parking brake using the touchscreen Driving 89

Towing and Accessories 1. Connect the wiring on the brake controller 3. Peel back the carpet to expose Model X's to the appropriate locations on the 4-pin 4-pin connector on the wiring harness. pigtail connector included with your Model X. 4. Connect the pigtail connector to the vehicle wiring connector. Warning: Towing increases your stopping distance, even when the trailer is equipped with its own braking system. When towing, increase your following distance and avoid situations that could 1 - Brake control output to trailer potentially cause heavy braking. Failure to do so can result in a collision. 2 - Ground Warning: Observe all regulations and 3 - Brake On Signal legal requirements in your regional and 4 - 12V Power (20A) national jurisdictions that apply 2. Remove the cover located under the specifically to trailer towing and brake dashboard in the driver's side foot well. requirements. Many regions require a breakaway switch, located on the tongue of the trailer, to activate the trailer brakes in the event that the trailer separates from the vehicle. Failure to comply with regulations can compromise your safety. Warning: Follow the instructions provided by the trailer brake manufacturer to ensure that trailer brakes are properly installed, adjusted, and maintained. Tesla is not responsible for damages caused by incorrect installation of trailer braking systems. Warning: Never attempt to connect trailer brakes directly to the vehicle braking system. Doing so can cause damage to the vehicle and the trailer, and can cause the braking system to malfunction, resulting in serious injury or death. 90 Model X Owner's Manual

Towing and Accessories Towing Guidelines • When the chocks are in place, release the brake pedal and ensure the chocks hold Model X is designed primarily as a passenger- the weight of the vehicle and trailer. carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer puts Note: When testing chocks, ensure that additional load on the motor(s), drive train, Vehicle Hold (see Vehicle Hold on page brakes, tires, and suspension and significantly 76) is not engaged. If Vehicle Hold is decreases range. If you decide to tow a trailer, braking Model X, the Vehicle Hold proceed with caution and follow these general indicator light displays on the instrument guidelines: panel. To disengage Vehicle Hold, press • Reduce your driving speed and avoid and release the brake pedal. sudden maneuvers. Keep in mind that • Place the vehicle in Park. This engages the when towing a trailer, steering, stability, parking brake. turning radius, stopping distance and braking performance are different when Warning: If parking on a grade is compared to driving without a trailer. necessary, always ensure that all trailer • Increase your following distance by wheels have been securely chocked. maintaining at least twice the distance Failure to do so can result in serious from a vehicle ahead. This helps to avoid damage, injury, or death. situations that require heavy braking. Sudden braking may result in skidding or Trailer Sway Mitigation jack-knifing, and loss of control. • Avoid sharp turns. Sharp turns can cause When trailer sway is detected, the Model X the trailer to contact the vehicle and cause electronic stability control system attempts to damage. Keep in mind that the trailer apply the appropriate amount of braking to wheels are closer to the inside of the turn minimize trailer sway. The instrument panel than the vehicle‡s wheels. Therefore, make briefly displays the traction control system wider turns to prevent the trailer from indicator. Pressing the brake pedal when the hitting curbs, road signs, trees or other system is actively braking to mitigate trailer objects. sway does not cancel this automatic braking. • Periodically check the trailer lights and turn signals to confirm that bulbs are still Connecting the Tow Hitch working. When towing a trailer, the turn signal arrows on the vehicle instrument The Model X towing package includes a cluster flash as normal, even if the bulbs weight-carrying hitch with a 2” x 2” removable on the trailer are burned out. hitch receiver. When not in use, the hitch • Periodically confirm the cargo is secure. receiver should be removed and stored in a • Periodically confirm the trailer brakes are dry location to prevent rust and corrosion. working. Keep the dust cover over the hitch housing to • Avoid parking on a grade (see Parking prevent dirt and debris from entering. with a Trailer). • Regularly confirm that all towing components are securely tightened. Parking with a Trailer Whenever possible, avoid parking on a grade. However, if parking on a grade is absolutely necessary, place wheel chocks under the trailer wheels: • One person presses and holds the brake pedal. • A second person places the wheel chocks under the wheels on the downgrade side of the vehicle's tires. Driving 91

Towing and Accessories Note: Always remove the ball mount before 1. Remove the dust cover from the hitch installing or removing the hitch receiver from housing. the vehicle (see Attaching and Removing the Ball Mount on page 94). Warning: You must use the Model X trailer hitch when towing a trailer. Never attempt to attach a different type of trailer hitch. Note: Always attach safety chains when towing. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and attach to the trailer eyelets to ensure the security of the trailer load. To install the trailer hitch receiver: Note: Newer versions of Model X have two push clips that secure the dust cover to the vehicle. To open, use a sharp object, such as a flat screwdriver, to carefully pry the clips open. Remove the dust cover. 2. Insert the key into the locking cylinder on the hitch, and turn the cylinder so the top of the key is aligned with the “unlocked” position. 92 Model X Owner's Manual

Towing and Accessories 3. Pull the locking cylinder out of the 8. Remove the key and store it in a safe adapter approximately 1/8" (0.5 cm), and place (preferably inside the vehicle). turn clockwise until the red marking on Note: The key can be removed only if the the cylinder aligns with the white dot. hitch is locked. This indicates a proper connection. Do not use the hitch if the key is not removed. Note: Tesla recommends making a note of the key code. You need this code if you lose the keys and need to order a replacement. Warning: Be careful when turning the locking cylinder. If it does not lock 9. Close the dust cover to prevent dirt and into the “Open Position”, it debris from entering the lock. For newer automatically retracts into its original version with push clips, reattach the dust “Closed Position” and can pinch your cover, snap it in place and open the push fingers. clips before pushing them in. 4. Firmly grasp the hitch from the bottom and align the triangular-shaped guides at Note: To maintain the hitch, regularly grease the sides of the hitch with the its surfaces with non-resinous grease. corresponding cutouts in the hitch housing. Disconnecting the Tow Hitch Note: Do not grasp the locking cylinder After towing, remove the hitch: because it needs to rotate freely. 5. Push the hitch into the hitch housing until 1. Insert the key and turn to align the top of the locking cylinder rotates approximately the key with the “unlocked” position. 120° counter-clockwise and automatically 2. While firmly holding the bottom of the locks into the "Closed Position". The green hitch (to prevent it from dropping to the area on the locking cylinder (above the ground), pull the locking cylinder out white arrow) aligns with the white dot on approximately 1/8" (0.5 cm), and turn it the housing. clockwise until the red marking on the 6. Visually check to confirm that the hitch is locking cylinder aligns with the white dot. fully inserted into the housing. Try pulling At this point, the locking cylinder is locked down on the hitch. The hitch should not in the "open" and the hitch drops out of drop when you pull down. the housing. Note: If the hitch does not lock into the Warning: Be careful when turning the housing, it falls out when you pull down on locking cylinder. If it does not lock it. into the “Open Position”, it 7. Turn the key so the arrows align with the automatically retracts into its original “locked” marking on the locking cylinder. “closed" position and can pinch your fingers. 3. Reinstall the dust cover on the hitch housing to prevent dirt from accumulating inside the housing. 4. Close the dust cover on the hitch's locking cylinder and store the hitch in a secure location. Driving 93

Towing and Accessories Attaching and Removing the Ball Mount The Model X towing package does not include a ball mount. You must purchase a ball mount suitable for the type of trailer you are towing. The Model X hitch receiver supports a ball mount up to 8” with a rise of up to 0.75”. Do not use any type of drop ball mount. 1. Reverse Lights (Purple) To attach a ball mount: 2. 12V Power (Red or Black) 1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from 3. Right Turn Signal and Brake Light (Green) the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt 4. Brake Controller Output (Blue) out of the hitch assembly. 5. Tail Lights and Running Lights (Brown) 2. Slide the ball holder into the hitch 6. Left Turn Signal and Brake Light (Yellow) assembly. 7. Ground (White) 3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the Note: It is the driver's responsibility to ensure one in the hitch assembly. that all electrical connections are working, and 4. Slide the locking bolt through the hitch all trailer lights are operating before and assembly/ball holder. during towing. Model X does not detect faulty 5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end trailer lights. You must perform manual of the locking bolt. checks. To remove a ball mount: Note: Loss of trailer lights when towing may 1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking be the result of a blown fuse. Model X does bolt and slide the locking bolt out of the not provide a warning if the fuse is blown. ball holder/hitch assembly. Contact Tesla Service. 2. Pull the ball holder out of the hitch Plugging trailer wiring into the Model X assembly. electrical connector automatically engages Trailer Mode (see Trailer Mode on page 89). Electrical Connections Warning: The brake controller output operates only when a brake controller is Regulations require all trailers to be equipped installed (see Trailer Brakes on page 89). with tail lights, brake lights, side marker lights, Warning: Use only the electrical and turn signals. To provide power for trailer connection designed by Tesla. Do not lighting, a built-in seven-way wiring connector attempt to directly splice or attempt to (SAE J560) is attached near the tow hitch. connect trailer electrical wiring using any Most trailer wiring plugs can be attached to other method. Doing so can damage the this connector. vehicle electrical system and cause malfunctions. Caution: Always ensure that the trailer electrical cable does not contact or drag on the ground and there is enough slack in the cable to allow for turns. 94 Model X Owner's Manual

Towing and Accessories Impact on Range Towing a trailer and carrying accessories increases vehicle weight and drag. As a result, driving range can decrease significantly. Although Trip Planner attempts to adjust estimates based on Trailer Mode, actual energy consumption may vary. Plan trip length and charging destinations accordingly. Driving 95

About Autopilot Autopilot About Autopilot How It Works Your Model X includes the following Autopilot components that actively monitor the surrounding roadway: 1. A camera is mounted above the rear license plate. 2. Ultrasonic sensors are located in the front and rear bumpers. 3. A camera is mounted in each door pillar. 4. Three cameras are mounted to the windshield above the rear view mirror. 5. A camera is mounted to each front fender. 6. Radar is mounted behind the front bumper. Model X is also equipped with high precision electronically-assisted braking and steering systems. 96 Model X Owner's Manual

About Autopilot Features Note: If you attempt to use a feature that is not available until the calibration process is These safety features are available on all complete, the feature will not be enabled and Model X vehicles: the instrument panel displays a message. • Lane Assist (see Lane Assist on page 121). Note: Model X must repeat the calibration • Collision Avoidance Assist (see Collision process if the cameras are serviced by Tesla, Avoidance Assist on page 124). and in some cases, after a software update. • Speed Assist (see Speed Assist on page Note: The self-calibration drive process is only 127). applicable to Model X vehicles built after • Auto High Beam (see High Beam approximately October 12, 2016. Headlights on page 60). These Autopilot convenience features are Limitations designed to reduce driver workload: Note: Depending on options purchased, Many factors can impact the performance of software version, and market region, your Autopilot components, causing them to be vehicle may not be equipped with all unable to function as intended. These include Autopilot convenience features. (but are not limited to): • Traffic-Aware Cruise Control (see Traffic- • Poor visibility (due to heavy rain, snow, Aware Cruise Control on page 99) fog, etc.). • Autosteer (see Autosteer on page 106) • Bright light (due to oncoming headlights, direct sunlight, etc.). • Auto Lane Change (see Auto Lane • Damage or obstructions caused by mud, Change on page 108) ice, snow, etc. • Autopark (see Autopark on page 113) • Interference or obstruction by object(s) • Summon (see Summon on page 115) mounted onto the vehicle (such as a bike • Smart Summon (Smart Summon on page rack). 118) • Obstruction caused by applying excessive • Navigate on Autopilot (see Navigate on paint or adhesive products (such as Autopilot on page 109) wraps, stickers, rubber coating, etc.) onto • Stop Light Warning (see Stop Light the vehicle. Warning (U.S. only) on page 109 • Narrow or winding roads. You can enable/disable some of these features • A damaged or misaligned bumper. and in some cases, control how they work. To • Interference from other equipment that access settings, touch Controls > Autopilot. generates ultrasonic waves. • Extremely hot or cold temperatures. Drive to Calibrate Cameras Warning: The list above does not Model X must maneuver with a great deal of represent an exhaustive list of situations precision when Autopilot features are being that may interfere with proper operation used. Therefore, before some features (for of Autopilot components. Never depend example, Traffic-Aware Cruise Control or on these components to keep you safe. It Autosteer) can be used for the first time or is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, after certain Service repairs, the cameras must drive safely, and be in control of the complete a self-calibration process. For your vehicle at all times. convenience, a progress indicator is displayed Caution: If a windshield replacement is on the instrument panel. needed, take your vehicle to Tesla Service. Calibration typically completes after driving This will ensure appropriate handling and 20-25 miles (32-40 km), but the distance mounting of the camera(s). Failure to do varies depending on road and environmental so can cause one or more Autopilot conditions. Driving on a straight road with features to malfunction. highly-visible lane lines allows Model X to calibrate quicker. When calibration is complete, the Autopilot features are available for use. Contact Tesla only if your Model X has not completed the calibration process after driving 100 miles (160 km). Autopilot 97

About Autopilot Cleaning Cameras and Sensors To ensure the various Autopilot components can provide information that is as accurate as possible, keep them clean and free of obstructions or damage. Occasionally remove any buildup of dirt by wiping the components with a soft cloth dampened with warm water. Caution: Do not use chemical-based or abrasive cleaners. Doing so can damage surfaces. Caution: Avoid using a high-pressure power washer. Caution: Do not clean an ultrasonic sensor or camera lens with a sharp or abrasive object that can scratch or damage its surface. 98 Model X Owner's Manual

Traffic-Aware Cruise Control Traffic-Aware Cruise Control Note: Traffic-Aware Cruise Control is a BETA driving speed based on road and driving feature. conditions. Note: If your vehicle is not equipped with an optional Autopilot package, refer to the To Use Traffic-Aware Cruise Control owner's manual on your vehicle's touchscreen To use Traffic-Aware Cruise Control, you must for instructions on how to use Cruise Control. be driving at least 18 mph (30 km/h), unless a Traffic-Aware Cruise Control (if equipped) vehicle is detected ahead of you. If a vehicle is uses the forward looking cameras and the detected ahead of you, you can use Traffic- radar sensor to determine when there is a Aware Cruise Control at any speed, even when vehicle in front of you in the same lane. If the stationary, provided Model X is at least 5 feet area in front of Model X is clear, Traffic-Aware (150 cm) behind the detected vehicle. Cruise Control maintains a set driving speed. When a vehicle is detected, Traffic-Aware When Traffic-Aware Cruise Cruise Control is designed to slow down Control is available but is not Model X as needed to maintain a selected actively cruising at a time-based distance from the vehicle in front, specified set speed, the up to the set speed. Traffic-Aware Cruise instrument panel displays a Control does not eliminate the need to watch gray speedometer icon on the road in front of you and to manually apply the left side of your current the brakes when needed. driving speed. The number Traffic-Aware Cruise Control is primarily shown in gray is the speed intended for driving on dry, straight roads, limit that is being such as highways and freeways. It should not determined by Speed Assist be used on city streets. (see Controlling Speed Assist on page 127). Warning: Traffic-Aware Cruise Control is designed for your driving comfort and Note: On roads where the map data convenience and is not a collision warning determines that a conditional speed limit or avoidance system. It is your exists (for example, a speed limit based on responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, time of day or weather conditions), a second and be in control of the vehicle at all speed limit displays below the first speed limit. times. Never depend on Traffic-Aware It is the driver's responsibility to determine Cruise Control to adequately slow down whether the conditional speed limit is Model X. Always watch the road in front currently in effect and adjust the driving of you and be prepared to take corrective speed accordingly. action at all times. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. Warning: Although Traffic-Aware Cruise Set the Cruising Speed Control is capable of detecting You can set the cruising speed to either: pedestrians and cyclists, never depend on Traffic-Aware Cruise Control to • Your current driving speed. The minimum adequately slow Model X down for them. speed you can set is 18 mph (30 km/h) Always watch the road in front of you and and the maximum is 90 mph (150 km/h). be prepared to take corrective action at It is the driver's responsibility to cruise at all times. Failure to do so can result in a safe speed based on road conditions serious injury or death. and speed limits. Warning: Do not use Traffic-Aware Cruise • The speed limit, plus any offset you have Control on city streets or on roads where specified (see Speed Assist on page 127). traffic conditions are constantly changing. To set the cruising speed to your current Warning: Do not use Traffic-Aware Cruise driving speed, move the cruise control lever Control on winding roads with sharp up or down. curves, on icy or slippery road surfaces, or when weather conditions (such as heavy rain, snow, fog, etc.) make it inappropriate to drive at a consistent speed. Traffic- Aware Cruise Control does not adapt Autopilot 99

Traffic-Aware Cruise Control control lever again to cruise at the new speed limit. You can also manually adjust your cruising speed at any time (see Changing the Set Speed on page 101). Warning: Do not rely on Traffic-Aware Cruise Control or Speed Assist to determine an accurate or appropriate cruising speed. Always cruise at a safe speed based on road conditions and applicable speed limits. Cruising at the Set Speed To set the cruising speed to the speed limit Traffic-Aware Cruise Control maintains your plus any offset you've specified using Speed set cruising speed whenever a vehicle is not Assist, pull the cruise control lever toward you. detected in front of Model X. When cruising If you are already driving faster than the speed behind a detected vehicle, Traffic-Aware limit, the set speed does not adjust to the Cruise Control accelerates and decelerates speed limit—it adjusts to your current driving Model X as needed to maintain a chosen speed. If you move the cruise control level up following distance (see Adjust the Following or down after setting Traffic-Aware Cruise Distance on page 102), up to the set speed. Control to cruise at the speed limit, your set Traffic-Aware Cruise Control also adjusts the speed becomes your current driving speed. cruising speed when entering and exiting curves. You can manually accelerate at any time when cruising at a set speed, but when you release the accelerator, Traffic-Aware Cruise Control resumes cruising at the set speed. Note: When Traffic-Aware Cruise Control is actively slowing down Model X to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle ahead, brake lights turn on to alert other road users that you are slowing down. You may notice slight movement of the brake pedal. However, After setting the cruising speed, release the when Traffic-Aware Cruise Control is accelerator pedal to allow Traffic-Aware Cruise accelerating Model X, the accelerator pedal Control to maintain your set speed. does not move. Warning: Traffic-Aware Cruise Control When the cruising speed is may occasionally cause Model X to brake set, the speedometer icon on when not required or when you are not the instrument panel turns expecting it. This can be caused by blue and displays the set closely following a vehicle ahead, speed. detecting vehicles or objects in adjacent lanes (especially on curves), etc. Note: Double-pulling the cruise control lever Warning: Due to limitations inherent in toward you engages Autosteer (assuming it the onboard GPS (Global Positioning has been enabled as described in Autosteer System), you may experience situations in on page 106). In this case, if you are not which Traffic-Aware Cruise Control slows already cruising at a set speed, the cruising down the vehicle, especially near highway speed is set to either your current driving exits where a curve is detected and/or speed or the speed limit (plus any specified you are actively navigating to a offset), whichever is greater. destination and not following the route. Warning: When you adjust the cruising Warning: Traffic-Aware Cruise Control speed based on the speed limit, the set cannot detect all objects and, especially speed does not change when the speed in situations when you are driving over limit changes. You must pull the cruise 50 mph (80 km/h), may not brake/ 100 Model X Owner's Manual

Traffic-Aware Cruise Control decelerate when a vehicle or object is only partially in the driving lane or when a vehicle you are following moves out of your driving path and a stationary or slow-moving vehicle or object is in front of you. Always pay attention to the road ahead and stay prepared to take immediate corrective action. Depending on Traffic-Aware Cruise Control to avoid a collision can result in serious injury or death. In addition, Traffic-Aware Cruise Control may react to vehicles or objects that either do not exist or are not in the lane of travel, causing Model X to slow down unnecessarily or inappropriately. Warning: Traffic-Aware Cruise Control may be unable to provide adequate speed control because of limited braking capability and hills. It can also misjudge the distance from a vehicle ahead. Driving downhill can increase driving speed, causing Model X to exceed your set speed (and potentially the road's speed To increase/decrease speed by 1 mph (1 limit). Never depend on Traffic-Aware km/h), move the lever up or down to the first Cruise Control to slow down the vehicle position and release. To increase/decrease enough to prevent a collision. Always speed to the closest 5 mph (5 km/h) keep your eyes on the road when driving increment, move the lever up/down to the and be prepared to take corrective action second position and release. For example, if as needed. Depending on Traffic-Aware you are traveling at 57 mph and you move the Cruise Control to slow the vehicle down lever up to the second position and release, enough to prevent a collision can result in the speed increases to 60 mph. You can also serious injury or death. increase/decrease speed by holding the lever in the full up/down position and releasing Changing the Set Speed when the desired speed displays below the cruise control icon. To change the set speed while using Traffic- Note: It may take a few seconds for Model X Aware Cruise Control, move the cruise control to reach the new cruising speed, assuming lever up (increase) or down (decrease) until Model X does not detect a vehicle ahead your desired set speed is displayed. driving slower than your set speed. Autopilot 101

Traffic-Aware Cruise Control HOLD State When enabled while on a highway interchange or off-ramp, Traffic-Aware Cruise Control may When following a vehicle, Traffic-Aware Cruise reduce your set speed in 5 mph (5 km/h) Control remains active at low speeds, even increments – to as slow as 25 mph (40 km/h) when Model X comes to a full stop. When the – to better match the reported speeds of vehicle is moving again, Traffic-Aware Cruise other Tesla vehicles that have driven at that Control resumes operating at the set speed. specific location. To override this and continue However, under the following circumstances, cruising at your set speed, tap the accelerator Traffic-Aware Cruise Control goes into a HOLD pedal or move the cruise stalk. The new set state, in which case, you need to briefly press speed is maintained for the duration of the the accelerator pedal or pull the cruise control interchange or off-ramp (unless you override it lever toward you (see Canceling and or cancel Traffic-Aware Cruise Control). After Resuming on page 103) to resume cruising. the interchange or off-ramp, the set speed When the HOLD status is active, the may revert or change as necessary based on instrument panel displays the HOLD icon and the new location. For example, if you merged a message that indicates that you need to onto a different highway, the set speed reverts resume cruise control. The following back to the set speed that was in use before circumstances can cause Traffic-Aware Cruise driving on the interchange. Control to go into the HOLD state: Warning: In some cases (such as having • Model X has been at a standstill for 5 insufficient data), Traffic-Aware Cruise minutes. Control may not automatically reduce the • Model X detects a pedestrian (the HOLD set speed on the highway interchange or state may clear when the pedestrian is no off-ramp. Do not rely on Traffic-Aware longer detected). Cruise Control to determine an • Model X suddenly loses visibility of the appropriate driving speed. Tesla vehicle in front of you. recommends driving at a speed that is • The ultrasonic sensors detect an obstacle safe for road conditions and within in front of Model X. posted speed limits. Cruising Near or On Freeway Exits Adjust the Following Distance When cruising near an exit on a controlled To adjust the following distance you want to access road (such as a highway or freeway) maintain between Model X and a vehicle and engaging the turn signal toward the exit, traveling ahead of you, rotate the cruise Traffic-Aware Cruise Control assumes you are control lever to choose a setting from 1 (the exiting and begins to slow down the vehicle. If closest following distance) to 7 (the longest you do not drive onto the exit, Traffic-Aware following distance). Each setting corresponds Cruise Control resumes cruising at the set to a time-based distance that represents how speed. In a region with right hand traffic, this long it takes for Model X, from its current occurs only when you engage the right turn location, to reach the location of the rear signal when driving in the right-most lane bumper of the vehicle ahead of you. within 164 feet (50 meters) of an exit. Likewise in regions with left hand traffic; when engaging the left turn signal when driving in the left-most lane within 164 feet (50 meters) of an exit. Note: The onboard Global Positioning System (GPS) determines if you are driving in a region As you rotate the cruise control lever, the with right or left hand traffic. In situations instrument panel displays the current setting. where GPS data is unavailable (for example, if Release the lever when the desired setting is there is inadequate signal), engaging the turn displayed. signal near an exit does not cause Traffic- Aware Cruise Control to slow down Model X. 102 Model X Owner's Manual

Traffic-Aware Cruise Control • You disengage the turn signal. Note: Overtake Acceleration occurs when you either fully engage the turn signal, or you hold the turn signal in the momentary position (partially engaged). When you release or disengage the turn signal, Model X stops accelerating (in the same way as when you release the accelerator pedal) and resumes Note: Your setting is retained until you the set speed. manually change it. Warning: Overtake Acceleration can Warning: It is the driver's responsibility to cancel for many unforeseen reasons in determine and maintain a safe following addition to those listed above (for distance at all times. Do not rely on example, lack of GPS data). Stay alert and Traffic-Aware Cruise Control to maintain never depend on Overtake Acceleration an accurate or appropriate following to increase your driving speed. distance. Warning: Overtake Acceleration increases Warning: Never depend on Traffic-Aware your driving speed whenever the Cruise Control to adequately slow down appropriate turn signal is engaged, and Model X to avoid a collision. Always accelerates Model X closer to the vehicle watch the road in front of you and stay ahead. Although Traffic-Aware Cruise prepared to take immediate corrective Control continues to maintain distance action. from the vehicle ahead, it is important to be aware that your selected following Overtake Acceleration distance is reduced when Overtake Acceleration is active, particularly in cases When following a vehicle with Traffic-Aware where it may not be your intention to Cruise Control active, briefly engaging the overtake the vehicle you are following. turn signal (to indicate a move into the passing lane) accelerates Model X towards the Canceling and Resuming vehicle ahead. By momentarily holding the turn signal lever up or down, you can quickly To manually cancel Traffic-Aware Cruise accelerate up to your set speed without Control, briefly push the cruise control lever having to press the accelerator pedal. The turn away from you or press the brake pedal. The signal causes acceleration only when all of the speedometer icon on the instrument panel following conditions are met: turns gray to indicate that Traffic-Aware • Traffic-Aware Cruise Control is operating Cruise Control is no longer active. and detects a vehicle in front of you. • No obstacles or vehicles are detected in the target lane. • Model X is traveling below the set speed, but over 45 mph (72 km/h). Overtake Acceleration is intended as an aid when passing a vehicle ahead of you. When the turn signal is engaged, Traffic-Aware Cruise Control continues to maintain distance To resume cruising at the previously set speed, from the vehicle ahead, but allows you to drive briefly pull the cruise control lever toward you. slightly closer than your selected distance. Acceleration cancels when one of the conditions happen: • You reach your set cruising speed. • Changing lanes takes too long. • Model X gets too close to the vehicle ahead. OR Autopilot 103

Traffic-Aware Cruise Control • The Traffic-Aware Cruise Control system is failing or requires service. When Traffic-Aware Cruise Control is unavailable or cancels, Model X no longer drives consistently at a set speed and no longer maintains a specified distance from the vehicle ahead. Warning: Traffic-Aware Cruise Control can cancel unexpectedly at any time for unforeseen reasons. Always watch the road in front of you and stay prepared to take appropriate action. It is the driver's To resume cruising at the current driving responsibility to be in control of Model X speed, move the cruise control lever up or at all times. down, then release. Summary of Cruise Indicators Traffic-Aware Cruise Control is available but is not actively controlling your speed until you activate it. The number shown in gray is determined by Speed Assist (see Controlling Speed Assist on page 127). Traffic-Aware Cruise Control is operating and is either maintaining the set speed (no vehicle in front) or Note: When Traffic-Aware Cruise Control is maintaining a chosen following cancels, Model X does not coast. Instead, distance from a vehicle ahead (up to regenerative braking slows down Model X in the set speed). the same way as when you move your foot off Model X has fully stopped but is in a the accelerator when driving without Traffic- HOLD state. If safe, press the Aware Cruise Control (see Regenerative accelerator pedal to resume cruising Braking on page 70). at the set speed. Warning: Traffic-Aware Cruise Control cancels, or may not be available, in the Limitations following situations: • You press the brake pedal. Traffic-Aware Cruise Control is particularly • Your driving speed exceeds the unlikely to operate as intended in the maximum cruising speed of 90 mph following types of situations: (150 km/h). • The road has sharp curves. • You shift Model X into a different • Visibility is poor (due to heavy rain, snow, gear. fog, etc.). • A door is opened. • Bright light (such as from oncoming • The view from the radar sensor or headlights or direct sunlight) is interfering camera(s) is obstructed. This could with the view of the camera(s). be caused by dirt, mud, ice, snow, fog, • The radar sensor is obstructed (dirty, etc. covered, etc.). • The traction control setting is • The windshield is obstructing the view of manually disabled or is repeatedly the camera(s) (fogged over, dirty, covered engaging to prevent wheels from by a sticker, etc.). slipping. Warning: The list above does not • The wheels are spinning while at a represent an exhaustive list of situations standstill. 104 Model X Owner's Manual

Traffic-Aware Cruise Control that may interfere with proper operation of Traffic-Aware Cruise Control. Autopilot 105

Autosteer Autosteer Note: Autosteer is a BETA feature. Autosteer builds upon Traffic-Aware Cruise Control (see Traffic-Aware Cruise Control on page 99), intelligently keeping Model X in its driving lane when cruising at a set speed. Autosteer also allows you to use the turn signals to move Model X into an adjacent lane (see Auto Lane Change on page 108). Using the vehicle's camera(s), the radar sensor, and the ultrasonic sensors, Autosteer detects lane markings and the presence of vehicles and objects to steer Model X. Warning: Autosteer is a hands-on feature. Autosteer briefly displays a message on the You must keep your hands on the steering instrument panel reminding you to pay wheel at all times. attention to the road and be ready to take Warning: Autosteer is intended for use over at any time. To indicate that Autosteer is only on highways and limited-access now actively steering Model X, the instrument roads with a fully attentive driver. When panel displays the Autosteer icon in blue. using Autosteer, hold the steering wheel When Autosteer is able to detect lane and be mindful of road conditions and markings, it also displays the driving lane in surrounding traffic. Do not use Autosteer blue. on city streets, in construction zones, or in areas where bicyclists or pedestrians may be present. Never depend on Autosteer to determine an appropriate driving path. Always be prepared to take immediate action. Failure to follow these instructions could cause damage, serious injury or death. Operating Autosteer Before you can operate Autosteer, you must enable it by touching Controls > Autopilot > Autosteer (Beta). To indicate that Autosteer is available (but not actively steering Model X), the instrument panel displays a gray Autosteer icon on the right side of the driving Note: To initiate Autosteer when there is no speed. vehicle in front of you, you must be driving at least 18 mph (30 km/h) on a roadway with To initiate Autosteer, pull the cruise control visible lane markings. If a vehicle is detected lever toward you twice in quick succession. ahead of you, you can initiate Autosteer at any speed under 90 mph (150 km/h), even when stationary (if you are at least 5 feet (150 cm) away from the vehicle). The instrument panel displays a message indicating that Autosteer is temporarily unavailable if you attempted to engage Autosteer when driving at a speed that is not within the speed required for Autosteer to operate. Autosteer may also be unavailable if it is not receiving adequate data from the camera(s) or sensors. 106 Model X Owner's Manual

Autosteer If Autosteer is unable to detect lane markings, Hold Steering Wheel the driving lane is determined based on the Autosteer uses data from the camera(s), vehicle you are following. sensors, and GPS to determine how best to In most cases, Autosteer attempts to center steer Model X. When active, Autosteer Model X in the driving lane. However, if the requires you to hold the steering wheel. If it sensors detect the presence of an obstacle does not detect your hands on the steering (such as a vehicle or guard rail), Autosteer wheel for a period of time, a flashing white may steer Model X in a driving path that is light appears along the top of the instrument offset from the center of the lane. panel and the following message displays: Warning: Autosteer is not designed to, and will not, steer Model X around objects partially or completely in the driving lane. Always watch the road in front of you and stay prepared to take appropriate action. Autosteer detects your hands by recognizing It is the driver's responsibility to be in light resistance as the steering wheel turns, or control of Model X at all times. from you manually turning the steering wheel very lightly (without enough force to retake Restricted Speed control). Autosteer also qualifies your hands Autosteer is intended for use only by a fully as being detected if you engage a turn signal, attentive driver on freeways and highways use the cruise control lever to adjust the where access is limited by entry and exit cruising speed or following distance, or use a ramps. If you choose to use Autosteer on button or scroll wheel on the steering wheel. residential roads, a road without a center Note: When your hands are detected, the divider, or a road where access is not limited, message disappears and Autosteer resumes Autosteer may limit the maximum allowed normal operation. cruising speed and the instrument panel Note: Autosteer may also sound a chime at displays a message indicating that speed is the same time that the message is initially restricted. The restricted speed can vary displayed. depending on whether or not you've specified a speed limit offset. Although you will be Autosteer requires that you pay attention to unable to increase the cruising speed, you can your surroundings and remain prepared to select a more restrictive cruising speed by take control at any time. If Autosteer still does reducing the speed limit offset, if applicable, not detect your hands on the steering wheel, (see Controlling Speed Assist on page 127) or the request escalates by sounding chimes that by manually reducing the set cruising speed increase in frequency. (see Changing the Set Speed on page 101). If you repeatedly ignore Autosteer's prompts In situations where the speed limit cannot be for having your hands on the steering wheel, detected when Autosteer is engaged, Autosteer disables for the rest of the drive and Autosteer reduces your driving speed and displays the following message. If you don't limits the set speed to 45 mph (70 km/h). resume manual steering, Autosteer sounds a Although you can manually accelerate to continuous chime, turns on the warning exceed the limited speed, Model X may not flashers, and slows the vehicle to a complete brake for detected obstacles. Autosteer slows stop. down to the limited speed when you release the accelerator pedal. When you leave the road, or disengage Autosteer by using the steering wheel, you can increase your set For the rest of the drive, you must steer speed again, if desired. manually. Autosteer is available again on your next drive (after you stop and shift Model X into Park). Take Over Immediately In situations where Autosteer is unable to steer Model X, Autosteer sounds a warning chime and displays the following message on the instrument panel: Autopilot 107

Autosteer driving path. Drive attentively by watching the road and traffic ahead of you, checking the surrounding area, and monitoring the instrument panel for warnings. Always be prepared to take When you see this message, TAKE OVER immediate action. STEERING IMMEDIATELY. Warning: Do not use Auto Lane Change on city streets or on roads where traffic Canceling Autosteer conditions are constantly changing and Autosteer cancels when: where bicycles and pedestrians are present. • You start steering manually. Warning: The performance of Auto Lane • You press the brake pedal. Change depends on the ability of the • You push the cruise control lever away camera(s) to recognize lane markings. from you. • The maximum speed that Autosteer Warning: Do not use Auto Lane Change supports–90 mph (150 km/h)–is on winding roads with sharp curves, on exceeded. icy or slippery roads, or when weather • You shift into a different gear. conditions (such as heavy rain, snow, fog, • A door is opened. etc.) may be obstructing the view from the camera(s) or sensors. • An Automatic Emergency Braking event Warning: Failure to follow all warnings occurs (see Collision Avoidance Assist on and instructions can result in property page 124). damage, serious injury or death. When Autosteer cancels, it sounds chimes and the Autosteer icon either turns gray to Operating Auto Lane Change indicate that Autosteer is no longer active, or Auto Lane Change is available whenever disappears to indicate that it is not currently Autosteer is active. To change lanes using available. Auto Lane Change: Note: If Autosteer cancels because you started 1. Perform visual checks to make sure it is steering manually, Traffic-Aware Cruise safe and appropriate to move into the Control remains active. Disengage Traffic- target lane Aware Cruise Control as you normally would, by briefly pushing the cruise control lever 2. Fully engage the appropriate turn signal. away from you or pressing the brake pedal. 3. Disengage the turn signal after you are in To disable Autosteer so it is no longer the target lane. available, touch Controls > Autopilot > Auto Lane Change moves Model X into the Autosteer (Beta). adjacent lane in the direction indicated by the turn signal, provided the following conditions Auto Lane Change are met: When Autosteer is active on a vehicle • The turn signal is engaged. equipped with Auto Lane Change, you can use • The ultrasonic sensors and Autopilot the turn signals to move Model X into an cameras do not detect a vehicle or adjacent lane without moving the steering obstacle up to the center of the target wheel (which would cancel Autosteer). lane. Warning: It is the driver's responsibility to • The lane markings indicate that a lane determine whether a lane change is safe change is permitted. and appropriate. Therefore, before • The view of the camera(s) is not initiating a lane change, always check obstructed. blind spots, lane markings, and the • Your vehicle does not detect another surrounding roadway to confirm it is safe vehicle in its blind spot. and appropriate to move into the target • Midway through the lane change, Auto lane. Lane Change can detect the outside lane Warning: Never depend on Auto Lane marking of the target lane. Change to determine an appropriate • Driving speed is at least 30 mph (45 km/h). 108 Model X Owner's Manual

Autosteer As the lane change is in progress, Overtake intersections with flashing lights. Acceleration is activated, allowing Model X to Additionally, Stop Light Warning does not accelerate closer to a vehicle in front (see warn you of an approaching stop light if Overtake Acceleration on page 103). Midway you are pressing the accelerator pedal or through the lane change, Auto Lane Change brake pedal (which disables Autosteer). must detect the target lane's outside lane marking. If this lane marking cannot be Navigate on Autopilot detected, the lane change is aborted and Model X returns to its original driving lane. Note: Navigate on Autopilot is a BETA feature. Note: Auto Lane Change moves Model X one When using Autosteer on a controlled-access lane at a time. Moving into an additional lane road (such as a highway or freeway), Navigate requires you to engage the turn signal a on Autopilot automatically exits at off-ramps second time after the first lane change is and interchanges based on your navigation complete. route. Along the highway portion of a When using Auto Lane Change, it is important navigation route, Navigate on Autopilot also to monitor its performance by watching the changes lanes to prepare for exits and to driving path in front of you and the minimize the driving time to your destination. surrounding area. Stay prepared to take over Warning: Navigate on Autopilot does not steering at any time. As you are crossing over make driving autonomous. You must pay into the adjacent lane, the instrument panel attention to the road, keep your hands on displays the lane marking as a dashed blue the steering wheel at all times, and remain line. Once in your new lane, lane markings are aware of your navigation route. displayed as solid blue lines again. Warning: As is the case with normal In situations where Auto Lane Change is driving, be extra careful around blind unable to operate at optimal performance, or corners, highway interchanges, and exits cannot operate due to inadequate data, the because obstacles can appear quickly instrument panel displays a series of warnings. and at any time. Therefore, when using Auto Lane Change, Warning: Navigate on Autopilot may not always pay attention to the instrument panel recognize or detect oncoming vehicles, and be prepared to manually steer Model X. stationary objects, and special-use lanes Stop Light Warning (U.S. only) such as those used exclusively for bikes, carpools, emergency vehicles, etc. While Autosteer or Navigate on Autopilot is in Remain alert at all times and be prepared use, Model X displays a warning on the to take immediate action. Failure to do so instrument panel and sounds a chime if it can cause damage, injury or death. detects that you are likely to run through a red Enabling and Customizing Navigate on stop light. If this happens, TAKE IMMEDIATE Autopilot CORRECTIVE ACTION! The visual and audible warnings cancel after a To enable Navigate on Autopilot, touch few seconds, or when you press the brake Controls > Autopilot > Navigate on Autopilot pedal, whichever comes first. (Beta). Then, to customize how you want Navigate on Autopilot to operate, touch Warning: Stop Light Warning does not CUSTOMIZE NAVIGATE ON AUTOPILOT: apply the brakes or decelerate Model X, • Enable At Start Of Every Trip: Choose does not detect stop signs, and may not whether or not you want to automatically detect all stop lights. Stop Light Warning enable Navigate on Autopilot for every is designed for guidance purposes only navigation route. When enabled, the and is not a substitute for attentive Navigate on Autopilot button on the turn- driving and sound judgment. Keep your by-turn direction list is already enabled at eyes on the road when driving and never the start of every trip. depend on Stop Light Warning to warn you of a stop light. Warning: Stop Light Warning is designed to only warn you when approaching a solid red or later portion of a yellow traffic light; it may not issue warnings at Autopilot 109

Autosteer • Speed Based Lane Changes: Navigate on upcoming lane change is needed to stay on Autopilot is designed to perform both the navigation route. route-based and speed-based lane changes. Route-based lane changes are Operating Navigate on Autopilot designed to keep you on your navigation Once enabled, the Navigate on Autopilot route (for example, moving you into an button appears on the map‡s turn-by-turn adjacent lane to prepare for an upcoming direction list whenever a navigation route is off-ramp) whereas speed-based lane active and the route includes at least one changes are designed to maintain a controlled-access road. Touch this button to driving speed (not to exceed your cruising allow Navigate on Autopilot to assist you on speed) that allows you to minimize the your journey. When enabled, the Navigate on time it takes to reach your destination (for Autopilot button is blue and the turn-by-turn example, moving into an adjacent lane to direction displays the Autosteer icon next to pass a vehicle in front of you). Speed- maneuvers (such as freeway exits) that based lanes changes are optional. You can Navigate on Autopilot will handle. use this setting to disable speed-based lane changes or to specify how Navigate on Autopilot activates and aggressively you want Navigate on deactivates as appropriate, based on the type Autopilot to change lanes to achieve the of road you are driving on. For example, if set cruising speed. The MILD setting is Autosteer is active and the Navigate on more conservative about lane changes Autopilot setting is turned on, Navigate on and may result in a slightly longer driving Autopilot automatically becomes active when time whereas MAD MAX is designed to you reach a supported controlled-access allow you to reach your destination in the portion of your navigation route. shortest driving time possible, but will Whenever Navigate on Autopilot is active, the only change lanes when safe to do so. instrument panel displays the driving lane as a • Require Lane Change Confirmation: By single blue line in front of Model X: default, Navigate on Autopilot requires your confirmation before proceeding with a lane change (by pulling the Autopilot stalk toward you or engaging the appropriate turn signal). However, if you want Navigate on Autopilot to change lanes without requiring this confirmation, turn this setting off. When you turn the setting off, you can specify if or how you want to be notified of lane changes (Off, Chime, Vibrate, or Both). Warning: If you turn off Require Lane Change Confirmation, Navigate on Autopilot notifies you of upcoming lane changes and off-ramps, but it remains your responsibility to monitor the environment and maintain control of Model X at all times. Lane changes can occur quickly and suddenly. Always keep your hands on the wheel and your eyes on the driving path in front of you. Note: In addition to route-based and speed- based lane changes, Navigate on Autopilot also requests a lane change to the right as a When Navigate on Autopilot is active and you reminder to stay out of the left-most lane approach an off-ramp or freeway interchange when you are not passing other vehicles. along your navigation route, the appropriate Note: The touchscreen displays route-based turn signal engages and Autosteer maneuvers lane changes at the top of the map's turn-by- Model X onto the off-ramp or interchange. turn direction list to notify you that an Warning: Never depend on Navigate on Autopilot to determine an appropriate 110 Model X Owner's Manual

Autosteer lane at an off-ramp. Stay alert and Lane Changes perform visual checks to ensure that the Navigate on Autopilot changes lanes to either driving lane is safe and appropriate. prepare Model X for an upcoming off-ramp, to When you leave a controlled-access road (for increase your driving speed (not to exceed example, you exit a freeway or you enter a your set cruising speed), or to move Model X section of the navigation route that is no out of a left-most lane when you are not longer supported), Navigate on Autopilot passing other vehicles. A message displays at reverts back to Autosteer— a unique triple- the top of the map's turn-by-turn direction list tone chime sounds and the instrument panel to notify you when an upcoming lane change displays the driving lane lines in blue (instead is required to stay on your navigation route. of the single blue in front of Model X). When The line on the instrument panel shows the you exit onto an off-ramp, the instrument upcoming driving path: panel briefly displays a countdown message warning you of the distance remaining before Navigate on Autopilot reverts back to Autosteer. Note: The way Navigate on Autopilot determines navigation routes and maneuvers at freeway interchanges can be impacted by whether or not the navigation system is set up to use High Occupancy Vehicle (HOV) lanes. Therefore, ensure the Use HOV Lanes setting is appropriate for your circumstances (see Maps and Navigation on page 146). If the setting is off, Navigate on Autopilot never uses an HOV lane, regardless of time of day. If the setting is on, Navigate on Autopilot will always include the use of the HOV lane, whenever it exists. Warning: Even when Navigate on When the instrument panel displays a Autopilot deactivates at off-ramps, message asking you to confirm the lane Autosteer remains active. Always be change, pull the Autopilot stalk toward you or prepared to take appropriate actions such engage the appropriate turn signal. If you do as stopping at red lights and stop signs, not confirm the lane change within three and yielding to other road users. seconds, a chime sounds to remind you that Warning: Navigate on Autopilot may not Navigate on Autopilot requires your always attempt to exit at an off-ramp, confirmation to change lanes. even when the exit is determined by the If Require Lane Change Confirmation is turned navigation route. Always remain alert and off, Navigate on Autopilot engages the be prepared to manually steer onto the appropriate turn signal, checks for vehicles off-ramp, or make a required lane change. and objects, and when appropriate, You can cancel Navigate on Autopilot at any maneuvers Model X into the adjacent lane. time by touching the Navigate on Autopilot If Require Lane Change Confirmation is turned button on the map‡s turn-by-turn direction list on, you must pull the Autopilot stalk toward (your vehicle reverts back to Autosteer), or by you or engage the appropriate turn signal to canceling Autosteer entirely (see Canceling confirm that you want Navigate on Autopilot Autosteer on page 108). to make the lane change. If you do not confirm the lane change within three seconds, a chime sounds to remind you that Navigate on Autopilot requires your confirmation to change lanes. Note: If you ignore a route-based lane change suggestion (for example, you are driving in the left lane while approaching an off-ramp on the right side of the highway), Navigate on Autopilot will be unable to maneuver onto the Autopilot 111

Autosteer off-ramp and as a result, the navigation • A vehicle is detected in your blind spot system will re-route you to your destination. when you engage the turn signal. Warning: Navigate on Autopilot may not • Model X is being driven very close to a always attempt to exit at an off-ramp or vehicle in front of it, which is blocking the change lanes, even when an exit or lane view of the camera(s). change is determined by the navigation Warning: Many unforeseen circumstances route. Always remain alert and be can impair the operation of Autosteer. prepared to manually steer onto an off- Always keep this in mind and remember ramp, or make a lane change to prepare that as a result, Autosteer may not steer for, or to exit at, an off-ramp or Model X appropriately. Always drive interchange. attentively and be prepared to take immediate action. Be Ready to Assist When attempting to change lanes or maneuver Model X, or when approaching construction zones, Navigate on Autopilot may be unable to determine the appropriate driving lane (for example, complex clover leafs and multi-lane off-ramps) and the instrument panel displays an alert indicating that Navigate on Autopilot is trying to maneuver and may require assistance. When you see the message, be prepared to take immediate action to ensure that it is safe and appropriate to complete the lane change or maneuver. Limitations Autosteer and its associated functions are particularly unlikely to operate as intended when: • Autosteer is unable to accurately determine lane markings. For example, lane markings are excessively worn, have visible previous markings, have been adjusted due to road construction, are changing quickly (lanes branching off, crossing over, or merging), objects or landscape features are casting strong shadows on the lane markings, or the road surface contains pavement seams or other high-contrast lines. • Visibility is poor (heavy rain, snow, fog, etc.) or weather conditions are interfering with sensor operation. • A camera(s) or sensor(s) is obstructed, covered, or damaged. • Driving on hills. • Approaching a toll booth. • Driving on a road that has sharp curves or is excessively rough. • Bright light (such as direct sunlight) is interfering with the view of the camera(s). • The sensors are affected by other electrical equipment or devices that generate ultrasonic waves. 112 Model X Owner's Manual

Autopark Autopark Autopark (if equipped) uses data from the In situations where Autopark cannot operate ultrasonic sensors and GPS to simplify parking due to inadequate sensor data, the instrument on public roads by maneuvering Model X into panel displays a message indicating that you parallel and perpendicular parking spaces. See must manually park Model X. To Use Autopark on page 113. Note: If you press the brake when Autopark is Warning: Autopark's performance actively parking Model X, the parking process depends on the ability of the ultrasonic pauses until you touch Resume on the sensors to determine the vehicle's touchscreen. proximity to curbs, objects, and other Note: Autopark detects potential vehicles. perpendicular parking spaces that are at least 9.5 feet (2.9 meters) wide with a vehicle To Use Autopark parked on each side. Autopark detects parallel When driving, follow these steps to allow parking spaces that are at least 20 feet (6 Autopark to maneuver Model X into a parking meters), but less than 30 feet (9 meters)9 space: meters long. Autopark does not operate on angled parking spaces. 1. When driving slowly on a public road, Warning: Never depend on Autopark to monitor the instrument panel to find a parking space that is legal, suitable, determine when Autopark has detected a and safe. Autopark may not always detect parking space. When Autopark detects a objects in the parking space. Always potential parking space, the instrument perform visual checks to confirm that a panel displays a parking icon. Autopark parking space is appropriate and safe. detects parallel parking locations when driving below 15 mph (24 km/h) and Warning: When Autopark is actively perpendicular parking locations when steering Model X, the steering wheel driving below 10 mph (16 km/h). moves in accordance with Autopark's adjustments. Do not interfere with the movement of the steering wheel. Doing so cancels Autopark. Warning: During the parking sequence, continually check your surroundings. Be prepared to apply the brakes to avoid vehicles, pedestrians, or objects. Note: The parking icon appears only if the Warning: When Autopark is active, vehicle's position and/or the monitor the touchscreen and instrument circumstances of the surrounding area are panel to ensure that you are aware of the such that Autopark can determine an instructions that Autopark is providing. appropriate driving path. If Autopark cannot determine an appropriate path (for To Pause Parking example, when driving on a narrow street where moving into the parking space To pause Autopark, press the brake pedal causes the front of the vehicle to extend once. Model X stops and remains stopped until into the adjacent lane), you can either you touch Resume on the touchscreen. reposition the vehicle, find a different parking space, or park manually. 2. Check to determine if the detected parking space is appropriate and safe. If so, pull forward and stop approximately a car length ahead of the parking space (as you normally would when parallel parking or when backing into a perpendicular parking space). 3. Release the steering wheel, shift Model X into Reverse, then touch Start Autopark on the touchscreen. 4. When parking is complete, Autopark displays the "Complete" message. Autopilot 113

Autopark To Cancel Parking Autopark cancels the parking sequence when you manually move the steering wheel, change gears, or touch Cancel on the touchscreen. Autopark also cancels parking when: • The parking sequence exceeds seven moves. • Model X detects that the driver is exiting the vehicle. • A door is opened. • You press the accelerator pedal. • You press the brake pedal while Autopark is paused. • An Automatic Emergency Braking event occurs (see Collision Avoidance Assist on page 124). Limitations Autopark is particularly unlikely to operate as intended in these situations: • The road is sloped. Autopark is designed to operate on flat roads only. • Visibility is poor (due to heavy rain, snow, fog, etc.). • The curb is constructed of material other than stone, or the curb cannot be detected. • The target parking space is directly adjacent to a wall or pillar (for example, the last parking space of a row in an underground parking structure). • One or more of the ultrasonic sensors is damaged, dirty, or obstructed (such as by mud, ice, or snow). • Weather conditions (heavy rain, snow, fog, or extremely hot or cold temperatures) are interfering with sensor operation. • The sensors are affected by other electrical equipment or devices that generate ultrasonic waves. Warning: Many unforeseen circumstances can impair Autopark's ability to park Model X. Keep this in mind and remember that as a result, Autopark may not steer Model X appropriately. Pay attention when parking Model X and stay prepared to immediately take control. 114 Model X Owner's Manual

Summon Summon Summon (if equipped) allows you to • Side Clearance: Choose an option to automatically park and retrieve Model X while specify how much side clearance you you are standing outside the vehicle. Summon want to allow. Tight allows Model X to uses data from the ultrasonic sensors to move enter and exit very narrow parking spaces. Model X forward and reverse up to 39 feet (12 Warning: Parking in a narrow space meters) in, or out of, a parking space. limits the ability of the sensors to To move Model X a distance of up to 475 feet accurately detect the location of (145 meters) while steering around objects, obstacles, increasing the risk of you can use Smart Summon and your mobile damage to Model X and/or phone. Smart Summon allows your vehicle to surrounding objects. find you (or you can send your vehicle to a • Require Continuous Press: By default, chosen location). See Smart Summon on page Summon requires that you press and hold 118. a button on the mobile app or key to Warning: Summon is designed and move Model X during the parking process. intended for use only on parking lots and When Require Continuous Press is set to driveways on private property where the NO, you can press and release the button surrounding area is familiar and —you don't need to hold it down to keep predictable. the vehicle moving. Also, Require Continuous Press must be set to NO if you Warning: Summon is a BETA feature. You want to operate Summon using the key must continually monitor the vehicle and instead of the mobile app (see Operating its surroundings and stay prepared to Summon with the Key on page 116), or if take immediate action at any time. It is you want to start a parking sequence from the driver's responsibility to use Summon inside the vehicle (see Starting Summon safely, responsibly, and as intended. Before Exiting the Vehicle on page 117). Warning: Summon's performance • Use Auto HomeLink (if equipped): Set to depends on the ability of the ultrasonic ON if you want to activate HomeLink to sensors to determine the vehicle's open/close a programmed HomeLink proximity to objects, people, animals, and device (such as a gate or a garage door) other vehicles. during the parking process when using Summon or Smart Summon. If enabled, Before Using Summon the device automatically opens and closes when Model X enters or exits during a Before operating Summon, use the Summon session. In an Smart Summon touchscreen to enable it and customize how session, the device automatically opens you want it to work. Touch Controls > when, at the beginning of a session, Smart Autopilot > Summon, then touch Customize Summon detects that Model X is parked in and adjust the following settings to suit your a garage. preferences: Warning: Always ensure that Model X • Bumper Clearance: Set the distance that is fully in or out of a garage before you want Summon to stop from a HomeLink lowers the garage door. detected object (for example, you may Summon and Smart Summon cannot want Summon to stop within just a few detect where an overhead door will inches of a garage wall). Note that this lower. distance applies only to objects that Note: When enabled, the HomeLink device Summon detects directly in front of automatically opens and closes when Model X when moving forward, or directly using Summon, and automatically opens behind Model X when reversing. as needed when using Smart Summon. To • Summon Distance: Set a maximum automate HomeLink in other situations distance that Model X can travel when (such as normal driving), you must adjust entering or exiting a parking space. the HomeLink device's main settings by touching the HomeLink icon at the top of the touchscreen (see HomeLink Universal Transceiver on page 164). Note: The above settings, with the exception of HomeLink, apply only to Summon—not Smart Summon (see Before Using Smart Autopilot 115

Summon Summon on page 118). You can not customize If you used Summon to park Model X, you can Smart Summon's bumper clearance, distance, then use Summon to return Model X back to and side clearance. And when using Smart its original position (provided the vehicle has Summon, you must always hold down the remained in Park), or to the maximum button on the mobile app to keep Model X Summon Distance that you have specified moving. Also, Smart Summon operates with (whichever comes first). Simply specify the the mobile app only—not the key. opposite direction on the mobile app and Note: All settings are retained until you Summon moves the vehicle along the original manually change them. path, provided no obstructions have been introduced. If the ultrasonic sensors detect an obstacle, Summon attempts to avoid the Using Summon to Park and Retrieve obstacle while staying very close to its original your Vehicle path (Summon does not steer around obstacles). Follow these steps to use Summon to park Note: To move Summon multiple times in the your Model X: same direction (not to exceed the maximum • Align Model X within 39 feet (12 meters) of 39 feet (12 meters), cancel Summon and of the parking space so Model X can then restart the parking process using the follow a straight path into or out of the same direction. space in either Drive or Reverse. Note: Although Summon can move Model X a • From outside the vehicle, initiate the short distance laterally to avoid an obstacle, it parking maneuver by touching Summon does not attempt to steer around an obstacle on the mobile app, then holding down the to return the vehicle to its original driving FORWARD or REVERSE button. path. Only Smart Summon can steer the Note: If the Require Continuous Press vehicle around objects. setting is NO, you do not need to hold Note: Summon requires that Model X can down the button, just press and release. detect a valid key nearby. Note: You can also initiate the parking Warning: Model X cannot detect maneuver from inside the vehicle (see obstacles that are located lower than the Starting Summon Before Exiting the bumper, are very narrow, or are hanging Vehicle on page 117). from a ceiling (for example, bicycles). In Summon shifts Model X into Drive or Reverse addition, many unforeseen circumstances (based on the direction you specified) and can impair Summon's ability to move in or drives into or out of the parking space. When out of a parking space and, as a result, parking is complete, or if an obstacle is Summon may not move Model X detected, Summon shifts Model X into Park. appropriately. Therefore, you must Summon shifts Model X into Park when: continually monitor the vehicle's • Model X detects an obstacle in its driving movement and its surroundings and path (within the Bumper Clearance setting remain prepared to stop Model X at any that you specified). time. • Summon has moved Model X the Operating Summon with the Key maximum distance of 39 feet (12 meters). • You release the FORWARD or REVERSE Note: Using the key to operate Summon is button (when Require Continuous Press is available only in the United States. turned on). Note: Summon may not operate if the key's • You press any button to manually stop battery is low. Summon. Follow these steps to park Model X from outside the vehicle using the key: 1. On the touchscreen, ensure that Require Continuous Press is disabled (touch Controls > Autopilot > Summon > Require Continuous Press > NO). 116 Model X Owner's Manual

Summon 2. With Model X in Park, stand within 10 feet • Summon has moved Model X the (3 meters) and press and hold the top maximum distance of approximately 39 center button on the key (Lock/Unlock All feet (12 meters). button) until the hazard lights blink • Your phone enters sleep mode or loses continuously. connectivity to Model X. Note: The hazard lights flash once as Model X locks, then within five seconds, Limitations Model X powers on and the hazard lights flash continuously. Do not proceed to the Summon is unlikely to operate as intended in next step until the hazard lights are the following types of situations: flashing. If, after five seconds, the hazard • The driving path is sloped. Summon is lights are not flashing, release the button designed to operate on flat roads only (up on the key, move closer to Model X, and to 10% grade). try again. If Summon receives no further • A raised concrete edge is detected. input within ten seconds, Summon Summon will not move the vehicle over an cancels. edge that is higher than approximately 1 in 3. Press the Front Trunk button on the key to (2.5 cm). move Model X forward into the parking • One or more of the ultrasonic sensors is space, or press the Rear Trunk button to damaged, dirty, or obstructed (such as by reverse Model X into the parking space. mud, ice, or snow, or by a vehicle bra, Starting Summon Before Exiting the Vehicle excessive paint, or adhesive products such as wraps, stickers, rubber coating, etc.). To start a Summon parking sequence before • Weather conditions (heavy rain, snow, fog, exiting Model X: or extremely hot or cold temperatures) 1. On the touchscreen, ensure that Require are interfering with sensor operation. Continuous Press is disabled (touch • The sensors are affected by other Controls > Autopilot > Summon > Require electrical equipment or devices that Continuous Press > NO). generate ultrasonic waves. 2. Close all doors and trunks. • Model X is in Trailer Mode or an accessory 3. With Model X powered on and the Park is attached. gear engaged, double press the Park Note: Summon is disabled if Model X is in button on the gear stalk. The touchscreen Valet mode (see Valet Mode on page 47). displays a popup window. Warning: The list above does not 4. On the touchscreen, choose the direction represent an exhaustive list of situations of travel. that may interfere with proper operation 5. Exit Model X and close the driver's door. of Summon. It is the driver's responsibility Summon now moves Model X according to the to remain in control of Model X at all direction you specified on the touchscreen. times. Pay close attention whenever Summon is actively moving Model X and Note: To cancel the parking maneuver before stay prepared to take immediate action. exiting, touch Cancel on the popup window. Failure to do so can result in serious Note: If you do not choose a direction of travel property damage, injury or death. on the touchscreen, Summon does not start a parking maneuver when you exit. Stopping or Canceling Summon You can stop Model X at any time while Summon is active by using the mobile app or by pressing any button on the key. Summon also cancels when: • A door handle is engaged or a door is opened. • You interact with the steering wheel, brake pedal, accelerator pedal, or gear stalk. • Model X detects an obstacle. Autopilot 117

Smart Summon Smart Summon Smart Summon (if equipped) is designed to Before Using Smart Summon allow you to move Model X to your location (using your phone's GPS as a target • Download the latest version of the Tesla destination) or to a location of your choice, mobile app (3.10.0 or later) to your phone, maneuvering around and stopping for objects and ensure your phone has cellular service as necessary. Smart Summon works with the and GPS enabled. Tesla mobile app when your phone is located • Your phone must be connected to within approximately 213 feet (65 meters) of Model X and located within approximately Model X. Using ultrasonic sensors, cameras, 213 feet (65 meters). and GPS data, Smart Summon maneuvers • The vehicle's Autopilot cameras must be Model X out of parking spaces and around fully calibrated (see Drive to Calibrate corners. This is useful for moving Model X out Cameras on page 97). of a tight parking spot, through puddles, or • You must have a clear line of sight to helping you retrieve your car while carrying Model X. packages. You must maintain a clear line of • Model X must be in Park, not charging, sight between you and Model X and closely and all doors and trunks must be closed. monitor the vehicle and its surroundings at all times. Warning: Smart Summon is designed and Using Smart Summon intended for use only on parking lots and 1. Open the Tesla mobile app, and press driveways located on private property SUMMON. where the surrounding area is familiar and 2. Press the Smart Summon icon located in predictable. Do not use Smart Summon the center of the image of your Model X. It on public roads. may take several seconds for Smart Warning: Smart Summon must only be Summon to start up. used on paved surfaces. Note: You can use Standby Mode to Warning: Smart Summon is a BETA eliminate the delay that occurs when feature. You must continually monitor the Smart Summon is starting up (see vehicle and its surroundings and stay Standby Mode on page 119). prepared to take immediate action at any The mobile app displays a map with a blue time. It is the driver's responsibility to use circle, which represents the maximum Smart Summon safely, responsibly, and as proximity that you must maintain between intended. your phone and Model X (213 feet/65 Warning: Smart Summon may not stop meters). The blue dot on the map for all objects (especially very low objects represents your location, and the red such as some curbs, or very high objects arrow represents the location of Model X. such as a shelf) and may not react to all 3. Position yourself anywhere within the blue traffic. Smart Summon does not circle where you have a clear line of sight recognize the direction of traffic, does to Model X. not navigate around empty parking 4. You can now operate Smart Summon spaces, and may not anticipate crossing using either of these modes: traffic. • COME TO ME mode: Press and hold Warning: Smart Summon's performance the COME TO ME button. Model X depends on the ultrasonic sensors, the moves to your GPS location. As you visibility of the cameras, and the move, Model X follows you. When availability of an adequate cellular signal Model X reaches you, it stops and and GPS data. shifts into park. Warning: When using Smart Summon, you must maintain a clear line of sight between you and Model X and stay prepared to stop the vehicle at any time by releasing the button on the mobile app. 118 Model X Owner's Manual

Smart Summon • GO TO TARGET mode: Touch the • Model X has moved the maximum crosshair icon then drag the map to distance of 475 feet (145 meters) since the position the pin on a chosen start of the Smart Summon session, or has destination. Press and hold the GO TO moved 492 feet (150 meters) away from TARGET button. Model X moves to the location from which the vehicle was the destination. When reaching the last driven manually. location, Model X stops and shifts into Note: If Smart Summon moves Model X Park and the mobile app displays a forward three feet and then backwards message indicating that Summon has two feet, this is considered five feet of completed. travel. Note: To subsequently change the Note: There is no need to look at the mobile location, lift your finger, reposition the app—just hold down the button while keeping map, then press and hold GO TO your eye on Model X and its driving path at all TARGET again. times, remaining ready to release the button To stop Model X at any time, simply to stop the vehicle if needed. release the COME TO ME or GO TO If equipped and Auto HomeLink is enabled for TARGET button. Summon (touch Controls > Autopilot > The map's crosshair icon toggles Summon > Use Auto HomeLink, Smart between GO TO TARGET and COME Summon automatically opens a HomeLink TO ME modes. When COME TO ME device if you start the Smart Summon mode is selected, the icon is blue. maneuver when Model X is located inside a garage. The mobile app informs you that the Note: The map also has an icon that door has opened. allows you to display/hide satellite Warning: When you release the button to imagery. stop Model X, a slight delay occurs before the vehicle stops. Therefore, it is critical Immediately after initiating Smart Summon in that you pay close attention to the either mode, hazard lights briefly flash, mirrors vehicle‡s driving path at all times and fold, and Model X shifts into the appropriate proactively anticipate obstacles that the driving gear (Drive or Reverse). Model X then vehicle may be unable to detect. slowly moves to within one meter of you Warning: Use extreme caution when using (COME TO ME) or your chosen destination Smart Summon in environments where (GO TO TARGET), navigating obstacles as movement of obstacles can be needed. As Model X moves, the corresponding unpredictable. For example, where red arrow on the map also moves to show the people, children or animals are present. vehicle‡s location. As you move, the corresponding blue dot also moves to show Warning: Smart Summon may not stop your location. for all objects (especially very low objects In either mode, Model X stops moving and such as some curbs, or very high objects shifts into park when: such as a shelf) and may not react to all oncoming or side traffic. Pay attention • You release the button on the mobile app. and be ready to stop Model X at all times • The maximum proximity of 213 feet (65 by releasing the button on the mobile meters) between your phone and Model X app. is exceeded (if moving Model X to a destination away from you, you may need Standby Mode to follow the car to maintain this distance). To keep Model X ready to Summon and • The driving path is blocked. reduce the time it takes to warm up, turn on Standby Mode. Touch Controls > Autopilot > Customize Summon > Standby Mode. When Standby Mode is turned on, you can conserve Battery energy by disabling Standby Mode at these locations: • Exclude Home - Disables Standby Mode at the location you set as Home in your Favorites list. Autopilot 119

Smart Summon • Exclude Work - Disables Standby Mode at • GPS data is unavailable due to poor the location you set as Work in your cellular coverage. Favorites list. • The driving path is sloped. Smart Summon • Exclude Favorites - Disables Standby is designed to operate on flat roads only Mode at any location in your Favorites list. (up to 10% grade). Note: To conserve energy, Smart Summon • A raised concrete edge is detected. automatically exits Standby mode from Depending on the height of the concrete midnight to 6:00 am. During these hours, you edge, Smart Summon may not move will experience a delay as Smart Summon Model X over it. starts up. • One or more of the ultrasonic sensors or Note: Additional battery power may be cameras is damaged, dirty, or obstructed consumed while Standby Mode is active. (such as by mud, ice, or snow, or by a vehicle bra, excessive paint, or adhesive Note: For details on how to designate a products such as wraps, stickers, rubber location as Home, Work, or Favorites, see coating, etc.). Recent, Favorite, Home and Work Destinations • Weather conditions (heavy rain, snow, fog, on page 150). or extremely hot or cold temperatures) are interfering with sensor or camera Stopping or Canceling Smart operation. Summon • The sensors are affected by other electrical equipment or devices that Smart Summon stops Model X whenever you generate ultrasonic waves. release the button on the mobile app. To • Model X is in Trailer Mode or an accessory resume the Smart Summon session, simply is attached. press the COME TO ME or GO TO TARGET Note: Smart Summon is disabled if Model X is button again. in Valet mode (see Valet Mode on page 47). Warning: Always anticipate when you Warning: The list above does not need to stop Model X. Depending on the represent an exhaustive list of situations quality of the connectivity between the that may interfere with proper operation phone and Model X, there may be a slight of Smart Summon. It is the driver's delay between when you release the responsibility to remain in control of button and when the car stops. Model X at all times. Pay close attention Smart Summon cancels, and requires you to whenever Smart Summon is actively restart it, when: moving Model X and stay prepared to • You press any button on the key. take immediate action. Failure to do so can result in serious property damage, • A door handle is engaged or a door is injury or death. opened. • You interact with the steering wheel, brake pedal, accelerator pedal, or gear stalk. • Model X is blocked by an obstacle. • Smart Summon has moved Model X the maximum distance of approximately 475 feet (145 meters) within a 213 feet (65 meters) radius of the phone's location. To move further than this distance, you must shift Model X into a driving gear (Drive or Reverse) and then re-initiate an Smart Summon session. • Your phone enters sleep mode or loses connectivity to Model X. Limitations Smart Summon is unlikely to operate as intended in the following types of situations: 120 Model X Owner's Manual

Lane Assist Lane Assist The Autopilot cameras and ultrasonic sensors Warning: Never depend on Lane Assist to monitor the markers on the lane you are inform you of unintentionally driving driving in as well as the areas surrounding outside of the driving lane, or informing Model X for the presence of vehicles or other you that a vehicle is in your blind spot or objects. close to the side of your vehicle. Several When an object is detected in your blind spot external factors can reduce the or close to the side of Model X (such as a performance of Lane Assist such as a lack vehicle, guard rail, etc.), colored lines radiate of lane markings or curbs. This may result from the image of your vehicle on the in false, or lack of, warnings (see instrument panel. The location of the lines Limitations and Inaccuracies on page correspond to the location of the detected 122). It is the driver's responsibility to stay object. The color of the lines (white, yellow, alert, pay attention to the driving lane and orange, or red) represent the object's always be aware of other road users. proximity to your vehicle, with white being the Failure to do so can result in serious injury farthest and red being very close, requiring or death. your immediate attention. These colored lines Lane Assist also consists of the following only display when driving between features to assist you in staying safe in the approximately 7 and 85 mph (12 and 140 driving lanes: km/h). When Autosteer is active, these • Lane Departure Avoidance colored lines also display if driving slower than • Emergency Lane Departure Avoidance 7 mph (12 km/h). However, the colored lines do not display if Model X is at a standstill (for • Blind Spot Collision Warning Chime example, in heavy traffic). Lane Departure Avoidance Depending on your vehicle's configuration, this feature may not be available. Lane Departure Avoidance provides steering interventions if Model X drifts into (or close to) an adjacent lane when driving between 40 and 90 mph (64 and 145 km/h) on major roadways with clearly visible lane markings. Touch Controls > Autopilot > Lane Departure Avoidance and choose: • OFF: You are not warned of lane departures or potential collisions with a vehicle in an adjacent lane. • WARNING: The steering wheel vibrates if a front wheel passes over a lane marking Lane Assist also warns you when a desired while the associated turn signal is off. A lane departure is not appropriate. When you visual warning on the instrument panel is engage the turn signal and a vehicle or object also displayed. is detected in the adjacent lane you are • ASSIST: In addition to the steering wheel planning to move into, the instrument panel vibration and a visual warning, Model X displays a red lane line to indicate that a attempts to steer to a safer position in its vehicle or object is detected. When the vehicle driving lane if the vehicle detects drifting or object is no longer detected, the lane line or a potential collision while the returns to normal. associated turn signal is off. Warning: Lane Assist features are for Your setting is retained until you manually guidance purposes only and are not change it. intended to replace your own direct visual When Lane Departure Avoidance detects checks. Before changing lanes, always drifting and applies a steering intervention, visually check the lane you are moving the designated lane line is highlighted in blue into by using side mirrors and performing on the instrument panel. the appropriate shoulder checks. Note: Lane Departure Avoidance is intended to help keep you safe, but it does not work in Autopilot 121

Lane Assist every situation and does not replace the need • Bright light (such as from oncoming to remain attentive and in control. headlights or direct sunlight) is interfering Warning: Keep your hands on the steering with the view of the camera(s). wheel at all times. If the vehicle senses • A vehicle in front of Model X is blocking your hands are not on the steering wheel, the view of the camera(s). Model X sounds a chime and the hazard • The windshield is obstructing the view of warning lights flash. the camera(s) (fogged over, dirty, covered Warning: Steering interventions are by a sticker, etc.). minimal and are not designed to move • Lane markings are excessively worn, have Model X out of its driving lane. Do not visible previous markings, have been rely on steering interventions to avoid adjusted due to road construction, or are side collisions. changing quickly (for example, lanes branching off, crossing over, or merging). Emergency Lane Departure • The road is narrow or winding. • Objects or landscape features are casting Avoidance strong shadows on lane markers. Depending on your vehicle's configuration, Lane Assist may not provide warnings, or may this feature may not be available. apply inappropriate warnings, in these For emergency situations, Emergency Lane situations: Departure Avoidance attempts to prevent a • One or more of the ultrasonic sensors is potential collision with a vehicle in an adjacent damaged, dirty, or obstructed (such as by lane by steering Model X back into your mud, ice, or snow). driving lane when traveling between 40 and • Weather conditions (heavy rain, snow, fog, 90 mph (64 and 145 km/h). This operates if or extremely hot or cold temperatures) the cameras can detect the edge of the lane, are interfering with sensor operation. such as a lane line or curb. When this steering • The sensors are affected by other intervention is applied, you will hear a chime electrical equipment or devices that and the instrument panel displays a warning generate ultrasonic waves. while highlighting the lane line red until • An object that is mounted to Model X is Model X returns to the driving lane. To turn on interfering with and/or obstructing a or off, touch Controls > Autopilot > sensor (such as a bike rack or a bumper Emergency Lane Departure Avoidance. sticker). Blind Spot Collision Warning Chime In addition, Lane Assist may not steer Model X away from an adjacent vehicle, or may apply If you want a chime to sound when a vehicle is unnecessary or inappropriate steering, in in your blind spot and possible collision is these situations: detected, touch Controls > Autopilot > Blind • You are driving Model X on sharp corners Spot Collision Warning Chime. or on a curve at a relatively high speed. Warning: Blind Spot Collision Warning • Bright light (such as from oncoming Chime cannot detect every collision. It is headlights or direct sunlight) is interfering the driver's responsibility to remain alert with the view of the camera(s). and check their blind spots. • You are drifting into another lane but an object (such as a vehicle) is not present. Limitations and Inaccuracies • A vehicle in another lane cuts in front of you or drifts into your driving lane. Lane Assist cannot always clearly detect lane • Model X is traveling slower than 30 mph markings and you may experience (48 km/h) or faster than 90 mph (145 unnecessary or invalid warnings in these km/h). situations: • One or more of the ultrasonic sensors is • Visibility is poor and lane markings are not damaged, dirty, or obstructed (such as by clearly visible (due to heavy rain, snow, mud, ice, or snow). fog, etc.). The exact detection zone of the • Weather conditions (heavy rain, snow, fog, ultrasonic sensors varies depending on or extremely hot or cold temperatures) environmental conditions. are interfering with sensor operation. 122 Model X Owner's Manual

Lane Assist • The sensors are affected by other electrical equipment or devices that generate ultrasonic waves. • An object mounted to Model X (such as a bike rack or a bumper sticker) is interfering with or obstructing a sensor. • Visibility is poor and lane markings are not clearly visible (due to heavy rain, snow, fog, etc.). • Lane markings are excessively worn, have visible previous markings, have been adjusted due to road construction or are changing quickly (for example, lanes branching off, crossing over, or merging). Warning: The lists above do not represent every possible situation that may interfere with Lane Assist warnings. Lane Assist may not operate as intended for many other reasons. To avoid a collision, stay alert and always pay attention to the roadway when driving so you can anticipate the need to take corrective action as early as possible. Autopilot 123

Collision Avoidance Assist Collision Avoidance Assist The following collision avoidance features are Forward Collision Warning designed to increase the safety of you and your passengers: The forward looking camera(s) and the radar • Forward Collision Warning - provides sensor monitor the area in front of Model X for visual and audible warnings in situations the presence of an object such as a vehicle, when Model X detects that there is a high motorcycle, bicycle, or pedestrian. If a collision risk of a frontal collision (see Forward is considered likely unless you take immediate Collision Warning on page 124). corrective action, Forward Collision Warning is designed to sound a chime and highlight the • Automatic Emergency Braking - vehicle in front of you in red on the instrument automatically applies braking to reduce panel. If this happens, TAKE IMMEDIATE the impact of a frontal collision (see CORRECTIVE ACTION! Automatic Emergency Braking on page 125). • Obstacle-Aware Acceleration - reduces acceleration if Model X detects an object in its immediate driving path (see Obstacle-Aware Acceleration on page 126). Warning: Forward Collision Warning is for guidance purposes only and is not a substitute for attentive driving and sound judgment. Keep your eyes on the road when driving and never depend on Forward Collision Warning to warn you of a potential collision. Several factors can reduce or impair performance, causing either unnecessary, invalid, inaccurate, or Warnings cancel automatically when the risk missed warnings. Depending on Forward of a collision has been reduced (for example, Collision Warning to warn you of a you have decelerated or stopped Model X, or potential collision can result in serious the object in front of your vehicle has moved injury or death. out of your driving path). Warning: Automatic Emergency Braking If immediate action is not taken when Model X is not designed to prevent all collisions. In issues a Forward Collision Warning, Automatic certain situations, it can minimize the Emergency Braking (if enabled) may impact of a frontal collision by attempting automatically apply the brakes if a collision is to reduce your driving speed. Depending considered imminent (see Automatic on Automatic Emergency Braking to Emergency Braking on page 125). avoid a collision can result in serious injury or death. By default, Forward Collision Warning is Warning: Obstacle-Aware Acceleration is turned on. To turn it off or adjust its sensitivity, not designed to prevent a collision. In touch Controls > Autopilot > Forward Collision certain situations, it can minimize the Warning. Instead of the default warning level impact of a collision. Depending on of Medium, you can turn the warning Off, or Obstacle-Aware Acceleration to avoid a you can choose to be warned Late or Early. collision can result in serious injury or Note: Your chosen setting for Forward death. Collision Warning is retained until you manually change it. It is also saved in your driver profile. Warning: The camera(s) and sensors associated with Forward Collision Warning are designed to monitor an approximate area of up to 525 feet (160 meters) in your driving path. The area being monitored by Forward Collision Warning can be adversely affected by road and weather conditions. Use appropriate caution when driving. 124 Model X Owner's Manual

Collision Avoidance Assist Warning: Forward Collision Warning is • You turn the steering wheel sharply. designed only to provide visual and • You press and release the brake pedal audible alerts. It does not attempt to while Automatic Emergency Braking is apply the brakes or decelerate Model X. applying the brakes. When seeing and/or hearing a warning, it • You accelerate hard while Automatic is the driver's responsibility to take Emergency Braking is applying the brakes. corrective action immediately. • The vehicle, motorcycle, bicycle, or Warning: Forward Collision Warning may pedestrian is no longer detected ahead. provide a warning in situations where the Automatic Emergency Braking is always likelihood of collision may not exist. Stay enabled when you start Model X. To disable it alert and always pay attention to the area for your current drive, touch Controls > in front of Model X so you can anticipate Autopilot > Automatic Emergency Braking. whether any action is required. Warning: Forward Collision Warning Warning: It is strongly recommended that operates only when driving between you do not disable Automatic Emergency approximately 7 mph (10 km/h) and 90 Braking. If you disable it, Model X does mph (150 km/h). not automatically apply the brakes in situations where a collision is considered Warning: Forward Collision Warning does likely. not provide a warning when the driver is Warning: Automatic Emergency Braking already applying the brake. is designed to reduce the severity of an impact. It is not designed to avoid a Automatic Emergency Braking collision. The forward looking camera(s) and the radar Warning: Several factors can affect the sensor are designed to determine the distance performance of Automatic Emergency from a detected object traveling in front of Braking, causing either no braking or Model X. When a frontal collision is considered inappropriate or untimely braking, such as unavoidable, Automatic Emergency Braking is when a vehicle is partially in the path of designed to apply the brakes to reduce the travel or there is road debris. It is the severity of the impact. driver‡s responsibility to drive safely and When Automatic Emergency Braking applies remain in control of the vehicle at all the brakes, the instrument panel displays a times. Never depend on Automatic visual warning and sounds a chime. You may Emergency Braking to avoid or reduce also notice abrupt downward movement of the impact of a collision. the brake pedal. The brake lights turn on to Warning: Automatic Emergency Braking alert other road users that you are slowing is designed to reduce the impact of down. frontal collisions only and does not function when Model X is in Reverse. Warning: Automatic Emergency Braking is not a substitute for maintaining a safe traveling distance between you and the If driving 35 mph (56 km/h) or faster, the vehicle in front of you. brakes are released after Automatic Warning: The brake pedal moves Emergency Braking has reduced your driving downward abruptly during automatic speed by 30 mph (50 km/h). For example, if braking events. Always ensure that the Automatic Emergency Braking applies braking brake pedal can move freely. Do not place when driving 56 mph (90 km/h), it releases material under or on top of the Tesla- the brakes when your speed has been reduced supplied driver‡s floor mat (including an to 26 mph (40 km/h). additional mat) and always ensure that Automatic Emergency Braking operates only the driver‡s floor mat is properly secured. when driving between approximately 7 mph Failure to do so can impede the ability of (10 km/h) and 90 mph (150 km/h). the brake pedal to move freely. Automatic Emergency Braking does not apply the brakes, or stops applying the brakes, when: Autopilot 125

Collision Avoidance Assist Obstacle-Aware Acceleration Limitations and Inaccuracies Obstacle-Aware Acceleration is designed to Collision Avoidance features cannot always reduce the impact of a collision by reducing detect all objects, vehicles, bikes, or motor torque and in some cases applying the pedestrians, and you may experience brakes, if Model X detects an object in its unnecessary, inaccurate, invalid, or missed driving path. For example, Model X, while warnings for many reasons, particularly if: parked in front of a closed garage door with • The road has sharp curves. the Drive gear engaged, detects that you have • Visibility is poor (due to heavy rain, snow, pressed hard on the accelerator pedal. fog, etc.). Although Model X still accelerates and hits the garage door, the reduced torque may result in • Bright light (such as from oncoming less damage. headlights or direct sunlight) is interfering Obstacle-Aware Acceleration is designed to with the view of the camera(s). operate only when all of these conditions are • The radar sensor is obstructed (dirty, simultaneously met: covered, etc.). • The windshield is obstructing the view of • A driving gear is engaged (Drive or the camera(s) (fogged over, dirty, covered Reverse). by a sticker, etc.). • Model X is stopped or traveling less than Warning: The limitations previously 10 mph (16 km/h). described do not represent an exhaustive • Model X detects an object in its list of situations that may interfere with immediate driving path. proper operation of Collision Avoidance To disable Obstacle-Aware Acceleration, touch Assist features. These features may fail to Controls > Autopilot > Obstacle-Aware provide their intended function for many Acceleration. other reasons. It is the driver‡s Warning: Obstacle-Aware Acceleration is responsibility to avoid collisions by designed to reduce the severity of an staying alert, paying attention, and taking impact. It is not designed to avoid a corrective action as early as possible. collision. Caution: If a fault occurs with a Collision Warning: Obstacle-Aware Acceleration Avoidance Assist feature, Model X may not limit torque in all situations. displays an alert. Contact Tesla Service. Several factors, including environmental conditions, distance from an obstacle, and a driver's actions, can limit, delay, or inhibit Obstacle-Aware Acceleration. Warning: Obstacle-Aware Acceleration may not limit torque when performing a sharp turn, such as into a parking space. Warning: Do not rely on Obstacle-Aware Acceleration to control acceleration or to avoid, or limit, the severity of a collision, and do not attempt to test Obstacle- Aware Acceleration. Doing so can result in serious property damage, injury, or death. Warning: Several factors can affect the performance of Obstacle-Aware Acceleration, causing an inappropriate or untimely reduction in motor torque and/or undesired braking. It is the driver's responsibility to drive safely and remain in control of Model X at all times. 126 Model X Owner's Manual

Speed Assist Speed Assist How Speed Assist Works Warning: Do not rely on Speed Assist to determine the appropriate speed limit or Model X displays a speed limit on the driving speed. Always drive at a safe instrument panel and you can choose if and speed based on traffic and road how you are warned when you exceed the conditions. speed limit. Also, instead of using the detected speed limit, you can base warnings Controlling Speed Assist on an arbitrary speed limit that you enter manually. To adjust the Speed Limit Warning setting, touch Controls > Autopilot > Speed Limit Warning, then choose one of these options: • Off - Speed limit warnings do not display and chimes are not sounded. • Display - Speed limit signs display on the instrument panel and the sign increases in size when you exceed the determined limit. • Chime - In addition to the visual display, a chime is sounded whenever you exceed the determined speed limit. You can also specify how the speed limit is determined: • Relative - You can set a speed limit offset (+ or -) if you want to be alerted only when you exceed the offset speed limit by a specified amount. For example, you can increase the offset to +10 mph (10 km/h) if you only want to be warned when you exceed the speed limit by 10 mph (10 km/h). Note: The offset from speed limit also affects the number shown in the gray speedometer icon on the left side of the In situations where Model X is unable to driving speed on the instrument panel. determine a speed limit, or if Speed Assist is • Absolute - Manually specify any speed uncertain that an acquired speed limit is limit between 20 and 140 mph (30 and accurate, the instrument panel may not 240 km/h). display a speed limit sign and warnings do not Note: Speed Assist is not always accurate. A take effect. road's location can be miscalculated and If you set the speed limit warning to Display instead Speed Assist can display a speed for a (see Controlling Speed Assist on page 127) directly adjacent road that may have a and exceed the determined speed limit, the different speed limit. For example, Speed speed limit sign on the instrument panel Assist can assume Model X is on a freeway or increases in size. highway when it is actually on a nearby surface street, and vice versa. If you set the speed limit warning to Chime Note: Your chosen setting is retained until you (see Controlling Speed Assist on page 127) manually change it. It is also saved in your and exceed the determined speed limit, the driver profile. speed limit sign on the instrument panel increases in size and Model X also sounds a warning chime. Limitations and Inaccuracies Note: Speed limit warnings go away after ten Speed Assist may not be fully functional or seconds, or when Model X slows down below may provide inaccurate information in these the specified limit. situations: Autopilot 127

Speed Assist • Visibility is poor and speed limit signs are not clearly visible (due to heavy rain, snow, fog, etc.). • Bright light (such as from oncoming headlights or direct sunlight) is interfering with the view of the camera(s). • Model X is being driven very close to a vehicle in front of it which is blocking the view of the camera(s). • The windshield is obstructing the view of the camera(s) (fogged over, dirty, covered by a sticker, etc.). • Speed limit signs are concealed by objects. • The speed limits stored in the map database are incorrect or outdated. • Model X is being driven in an area where GPS or map data is not available. • Traffic signs do not conform to standard recognizable formats. • A road or a speed limit has recently changed. Warning: The list above does not represent an exhaustive list of situations that may interfere with proper operation of Speed Assist. Speed Assist may fail to provide warnings for many other reasons. 128 Model X Owner's Manual

Controls Using the Touchscreen Controls Overview Touch Controls on the bottom corner of the touchscreen to control features and customize Model X to suit your preferences. The Controls window appears over the map. Touch an option on the left side of the window to display the associated controls and settings. By default, Quick Controls displays for quicker access to commonly used settings. To close the Controls window, touch the X in the top left corner, touch Controls again, or swipe down on the window. When an information icon displays beside a specific setting, touch it to display a popup that provides helpful details about the associated setting. Note: The following illustrations are for demonstration purposes only. Depending on vehicle options, software version and market region, the options available may be different. Using the Touchscreen 129

Controls Summary of Controls 1. List of available controls. When you select an item from this list, its associated controls display in the main viewing area. 2. Main viewing area. The options available for your chosen controls category display here. Note: Depending on vehicle configuration and market region, some settings may not be available for your vehicle. 130 Model X Owner's Manual

Controls Quick Controls Quick Controls displays by default to provide quick access to commonly- used features. For many of these features, more options are available on the feature-specific tabs below Quick Controls. • Exterior lights OFF Exterior lights will be off until you manually turn them back on. The exterior lights are set to AUTO by default at the start of every drive. PARKING The exterior side marker lights, parking lights, tail lights, and license plates lights turn on. ON Exterior lights are on. AUTO Exterior lights automatically turn on if Model X detects low lighting conditions. Note: For more information on exterior lights, see Lights on page 58. • Front Fog: If equipped (only available in certain regions). • Rear Fog: If equipped (only available in certain regions). • Mirror Fold: Fold or unfold side mirrors. • Front and Rear Trunk: Touch the buttons next to the front or rear trunk to open. • Open Doors: Touch the icons associated with each door to open. For falcon wing doors, you can set the height at which you would like it to open. • Display Brightness: Adjust the brightness of the display. Seats • Adjust the seats: Adjust the second row seats by using the forward and backward buttons. • Easy Entry: When enabled, you can move a second row seat all the way forward or backward by touching the forward/backward button once. When off, you must hold the button to move the second row seats fully forward/backward (see Accessing Third Row Seats (if equipped) - Monopost Seating on page 26). Suspension (if • Ride Height: Adjust the ride height, ranging from Low to Very High. equipped) • Jack: Disables self-leveling of the air suspension. • Suspension Lowering: Selecting NEVER maintains the standard height whereas AUTO adjusts the height based on road type (see Air Suspension on page 157). Note: Model X must be powered on and you must press the brake pedal before you can change suspension settings. Warning: The air suspension system causes Model X to self-level, even when powered off. Therefore, when transporting or lifting, you must engage Jack Mode to disable self-leveling (see Instructions for Transporters on page 215 and Jacking and Lifting on page 196). Using the Touchscreen 131

Controls Lights • Exterior Lights: Described previously in Quick Controls, or see Lights on page 58. • Front Fog: if equipped (available in certain regions). • Rear Fog: if equipped (available in certain regions). • Interior Lights Dome Lights: Turn the overhead lights to OFF, ON, or AUTO. When set to AUTO, the dome lights automatically turn on when you unlock the vehicle, open a door upon exiting, or shift into Park. Overhead Lights: Choose whether you want the overhead lights to illuminate more of the driver's seat or the passenger seat. • Auto High Beam: If on, the high beam headlights can automatically switch to low beam when there is light (for example, from an oncoming vehicle) detected in front of Model X. See High Beam Headlights on page 60. • Headlights after Exit: If on, the headlights remain on when you stop driving and park Model X in low lighting conditions. They automatically turn off after one minute or when you lock Model X. Driving • Acceleration: (If equipped) Choose an acceleration setting that determines whether acceleration is limited or increased (see Acceleration Modes on page 77). Chill limits acceleration for a slightly smoother and gentler ride, whereas Standard or Sport (depending on vehicle configuration) provides the normal level of acceleration. Note: When Chill is selected, Chill displays on the touchscreen above the driving speed. • Steering Mode: Adjust the amount of effort required to turn the steering wheel. Sport feels more responsive whereas Comfort feels easier to drive and park (see Adjusting Steering Effort on page 49). • Regenerative Braking: When you release the accelerator when driving, regenerative braking slows Model X and feeds any surplus energy back to the Battery. If set to LOW, Model X does not slow down as quickly, but also feeds less energy back to the Battery (see Regenerative Braking on page 70). Note: Regardless of the setting selected, the energy gained by regenerative braking is reduced if the Battery is full, or is extremely cold or hot (in which case, surplus energy is used to heat or cool it). • Stopping Mode: Choose how you want Model X to behave once regenerative braking has reduced the driving speed to a very low speed, a driving gear is still engaged, and both the accelerator and brake pedals are released. See Stopping Mode on page 70. You can adjust this setting only when Model X is in Park. • Slip Start: Turn slip start on to allow wheels to spin (see Traction Control on page 73). • Range Mode: If on, Model X conserves energy by limiting the power of the climate control system and turning off signature lighting. Cabin heating and cooling may be less effective, but seat heaters can be used to provide warmth in colder climates. When turned on in an All-Wheel Drive vehicle, torque distribution between the motors is optimized to maximize range. 132 Model X Owner's Manual

Controls Autopilot Control features that provide a safer and more convenient driving experience. Some Autopilot features are not controlled through Controls. See About Autopilot on page 96 for more information. • Autosteer (Beta): Enable the auto steering feature (available only if your vehicle is equipped with an Autopilot package) (see Autosteer on page 106). • Navigate on Autopilot (Beta): Navigate on Autopilot automatically exits at off-ramps and interchanges based on your navigation route and can also make lane changes designed to prepare for exits and minimize the driving time to your destination (available only if your vehicle is equipped with an Autopilot package) (see Navigate on Autopilot on page 109). Customize Navigate on Autopilot: Specify how Navigate on Autopilot performs lane changes, and whether you want it to automatically enable at the start of every trip. • Summon (Beta): Automatically park and retrieve Model X from outside the vehicle (available only if your vehicle is equipped with an Autopilot package) (see Summon on page 115). Customize Summon: Determine the bumper clearance, distance, amount of side clearance, and whether Summon requires continuous press when active. • Speed Limit Warning: Select the type of warnings, if any, you receive if you exceed the detected speed limit (see Speed Assist on page 127). • Speed Limit: Specify if you want Speed Assist to use a relative (with offset) or an absolute speed limit (see Speed Assist on page 127). Offset: If relative speed limit is selected, set a speed limit offset if you want to be alerted only when you exceed the offset speed limit by a specified amount. • Forward Collision Warning: Choose if and when you want to receive visual and audible warnings in situations where there is a high risk of a frontal collision (see Collision Avoidance Assist on page 124). • Lane Departure Avoidance (if equipped): Specify if you want the steering wheel to vibrate slightly if a front wheel passes over a lane marking and the associated turn signal is off (see Lane Assist on page 121). • Emergency Lane Departure Avoidance (if equipped): In emergency situations, Model X attempts to prevent a potential collision with an object in an adjacent lane by steering the vehicle back into your driving lane (see Emergency Lane Departure Avoidance on page 122). • Blind Spot Collision Warning Chime: Choose if you want a chime to sound when a vehicle is in your blind spot and a possible collision is detected (see Blind Spot Collision Warning Chime on page 122). • Automatic Emergency Braking: Specify if you want Model X to automatically apply braking when a frontal collision is imminent (see Collision Avoidance Assist on page 124). • Obstacle-Aware Acceleration: Specify if you want to automatically reduce acceleration when an obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle while driving at low speeds (see Collision Avoidance Assist on page 124). Using the Touchscreen 133

Controls Vehicle • Falcon Door Height: If set to AUTO, the falcon wing doors will open fully (respecting any remembered location-based heights and assuming no obstacle is detected). If set to LOW, the falcon wing doors will open partially, further protecting the vehicle's interior and occupants from inclement weather. • Automatic Doors: If on, the driver's door opens whenever you approach Model X and the key is detected. The door also opens when you double-click the key and the passenger door opens with a subsequent double-click. If not enabled, the door (or doors) unlock, but you'll need to open the driver's door manually. See Opening and Closing Front Doors from Outside Model X on page 9). • Close All With Key Fob: If on, all doors (and the rear trunk) close and lock when you single-click the key's lock/unlock button (if off, you must triple-click this button). • Driver Door Unlock Mode: If on, only the driver's door unlocks when you shift Model X into Park. If off, all doors unlock. • Walk-Away Door Lock: If on, doors automatically lock when you walk away from the vehicle, carrying your key with you (see Walk-Away Locking on page 12). • Lock Confirmation Sound: You can set Model X to sound a soft horn when your car locks or unlocks (see Keyless Locking and Unlocking on page 6). • Unlock on Park: If on, doors automatically unlock when you engage the Park gear (see Interior Locking and Unlocking on page 11). If Driver Door Unlock Mode is on, only the driver's door unlocks. • Child-Protection Lock: If on, safety locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from inside the vehicle (see Child-Protection Lock on page 12). • Mirror Auto-Tilt: If on, exterior mirrors tilt downward when reversing (see Mirrors on page 52). • Mirror Auto-Fold: If on, exterior mirrors fold when you lock Model X with the key, mobile app, or walk-away locking. They extend automatically when you return. You can also fold the mirrors manually by touching the center mirror control button (see Mirrors on page 52). • Smart Preconditioning: If on, Model X learns your driving schedule and automatically prepares your vehicle to drive. This minimizes the pause that you may experience as Model X powers up. Note: Smart Preconditioning operates only when the energy remaining in the Battery is above 20% . • Autowipers (Beta): When on, windshield wipers will activate if rain is detected on the windshield, and will increase in frequency depending on how much rain is detected. 134 Model X Owner's Manual

Controls Display • Display Mode: Customize the DAY (light background) or NIGHT (dark background) setting of the touchscreen. When set to AUTO, the brightness changes automatically between DAY and NIGHT brightness based on ambient lighting conditions. • Brightness: Drag the slider to manually control the brightness level of the touchscreen. When AUTO brightness is on, the touchscreen is further adjusted based on both the surroundings and by your learning preferences (for example, it remembers the type of manual adjustments you make). • Energy Saving: When toggled on, Model X reduces the amount of energy being consumed when not in use (for newer vehicles, this is automated). See Getting Maximum Range on page 80. Customize how the units and language are displayed: • Language: Select the language that is displayed on the touchscreen. Note: Model X must be in Park to change the language. When you change the language, you experience a brief delay as the vehicle shuts down and restarts the touchscreen. • Navigation Language: Choose the language that the navigation voice instructions will be spoken. • Time Format: Choose if time is displayed in 12 or 24 hour format. • Energy Display: Display remaining energy and charging units as either a percentage of battery energy remaining, or as an estimate of the distance you can drive. Select from these options: Rated: Based on EPA/ECE R101 testing. Ideal: Assumes ideal driving conditions based on driving at a steady speed of 55 mph (89 km/h) on a flat road, and using no additional energy (seat heaters, air conditioning, etc.). Typical: Based on US EPA testing. • Distance: Choose if miles or kilometers are used when displaying range. • Temperature: Customize if temperature displays in Fahrenheit or Celsius. • Tire Pressure: Select if tire pressures are displayed in BAR or PSI. Trips • View and reset the trip meters that summarize how far you have driven (see Trip Information on page 79). • Customize which meters to show in the instrument panel. Using the Touchscreen 135

Controls Navigation • Volume Control: Increase or decrease the volume of spoken navigation instructions by touching - or +, respectively. Decreasing all the way to the left mutes the instructions. You can also mute navigation instructions when a navigation route is active by touching the volume icon on the turn-by-turn direction list. Note: The volume setting applies only to the navigation system‡s spoken instructions. Volume for Media Player and Phone remains unchanged. • Automatic Navigation: If your phone's calendar is synced, when you get in your vehicle you will be automatically routed to an event within two hours of its start time, if the event has a valid address. Automatically navigate to Home and Work on weekdays (see Automatic Navigation on page 148). • Trip Planner: (If available in your market region) Use trip planner to plan your driving and charging routes (see Trip Planner on page 150). • Online Routing: When selected, you may be automatically rerouted to avoid heavy traffic (see Online Routing on page 150). • Avoid Ferries: When toggled on, you will be automatically rerouted to avoid ferries. • Avoid Tolls: When toggled on, you will be automatically rerouted to avoid tolls. • Use HOV Lanes : When toggled on, you will be routed to use Occupancy Vehicle (HOV) lanes on your navigation routes. This is particularly useful when using Navigate on Autopilot (see Navigate on Autopilot on page 109). Note: You can also display navigation settings by touching the settings icon on the map (see Maps and Navigation on page 146). 136 Model X Owner's Manual

Controls Safety & • Parking Brake: You can manually apply and release the parking brake Security (see Parking Brake on page 71). • Power Off: Touch to manually power off the vehicle (see Powering Off on page 54). • Speed Limit Mode: Specify if and how much you want to limit acceleration and max speed (see Speed Limit Mode on page 139). • Sentry Mode: When on, Sentry Mode uses the vehicle‡s cameras and sensors to monitor its surroundings while the vehicle is locked and in Park. If a threat is detected, Sentry Mode triggers the Alert or Alarm state, depending on the severity of the threat. You can customize Sentry Mode to automatically enable except in places such as Home, Work, or your Favorites (see Sentry Mode on page 161). • Park Assist Chimes: If on, you will hear an audible beep when approaching an object while parking (see Park Assist on page 74). • Joe Mode: When enabled, Joe Mode lowers the volume of your vehicle's chimes, except for turn signals. • Security Alarm: Enable the security alarm (see Security Settings on page 161). • Passive Entry: If on, doors automatically unlock whenever you approach Model X carrying a key. If off, you must use the key to unlock Model X. See Using the Key on page 6. Note: You must press the brake pedal to power Model X on before you can change the Passive Entry setting. See Starting on page 54. Note: If Passive Entry is off and you do not press the brake pedal to start Model X within approximately five minutes, a message displays on the instrument panel and you must use the key to lock, then unlock Model X again before starting the vehicle. Note: When you enable passive entry, it is recommended that you also enable PIN to Drive to increase security (see PIN to Drive on page 161). • Tilt/Intrusion: (if available) Enable a siren that sounds if Model X detects motion inside the cabin or if the vehicle is moved or tilted (see Security Settings on page 161). • PIN to Drive: Increase security by preventing Model X from being driven until a 4-digit PIN (Personal Identification Number) is entered (see PIN to Drive on page 161). • Cabin Overheat Protection: Reduce the temperature of the cabin in extremely hot ambient conditions for a period of up to twelve hours after you exit Model X (see Cabin Overheat Protection on page 144). • Allow Mobile Access: Allow Tesla's mobile applications to access your Model X (see Mobile App on page 170). Note: To disable Allow Mobile Access, enter your Tesla account credentials on the touchscreen. • DATA SHARING: Allow sharing of road measurement data (see Data Sharing on page 222). Using the Touchscreen 137

Controls Service • Spoiler Mode: If equipped, the spoiler can change position to provide maximum visibility and the most effective aerodynamics for Model X. To enable, choose Automatic (see Active Spoiler on page 85). • Wheel Configuration: Update your vehicle's wheel configuration if you are installing new wheels or swapping them for different ones. This also changes the wheels of your vehicle's avatar on the touchscreen. Note: Changing your vehicle's wheel configuration can impact range estimates, tire pressure warning levels, and vehicle visualization. See Tire Care and Maintenance on page 183 for more information. Warning: Only use Tesla-approved wheels when installing or swapping wheels. Using non Tesla-approved wheels can cause serious damage. Tesla is not liable for damage caused by using wheels not approved by Tesla. • Tow Mode: Prepare Model X for towing by keeping it in Neutral, which disengages the parking brake. See Instructions for Transporters on page 215. • Wiper Service Mode: Make wiper blades easy to access (see Wiper Blades and Washer Jets on page 193). • FACTORY RESET: Erase all personal data (saved addresses, music favorites, imported contacts, etc.) and restore all customized settings to their factory defaults (see Erasing Personal Data on page 139). Software Learn more about your vehicle's software version and the status of software updates. • Get more information about your car such as the VIN, vehicle name, and odometer (for more information, touch the Tesla "T" at the top center of your touchscreen). • View your current software version, map version, and release notes. • See new updates that are available. Your vehicle must be connected to Wi-Fi to start the update (see Software Updates on page 168). • Customize how often you want to receive software updates by touching Software Update Preferences. • Customize how often you want to receive software updates by touching Software Update Preferences. • Observe your software's download progress. The yellow clock icon at the top of the touchscreen is replaced by a green download icon when a software update is available, your vehicle is connected to Wi-Fi, and the update is downloading. A yellow download icon appears when a software update is available, but the vehicle is not connected to Wi-Fi. Ensure your vehicle is connected to Wi-Fi to start the download. Manual Touch to display this manual. Note: You can also display this manual by touching the Tesla "T" at the top of the touchscreen. Naming Your Vehicle To further personalize Model X, you can name it. The name of your Model X appears in the mobile app. To name your vehicle, touch the Tesla “T” at the top center of the touchscreen, then touch Name Your Vehicle (or touch the vehicle's existing name). Enter the new name in the popup, then touch Save. 138 Model X Owner's Manual

Controls Speed Limit Mode Speed Limit Mode allows you to limit the acceleration and maximum speed – between 50 and 90 mph (80 and 145 km/h) – of your Model X. This feature is protected by a 4-digit PIN that you create when enabling it for the first time, and which must be entered whenever you want to disable and enable it. If your Model X comes within approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) of the selected maximum speed, a chime sounds and text appears on the instrument panel above the driving speed. Additionally, your mobile app sends you a notification. To enable Speed Limit Mode: 1. Ensure the vehicle is in Park. 2. Touch Controls > Safety & Security > Speed Limit Mode on the touchscreen or CONTROLS in your mobile app. 3. Select the maximum driving speed that you would like to limit the vehicle to. 4. Drag the slider to the ON position. 5. Enter the 4-digit PIN that you want to use to disable and enable Speed Limit Mode. Note: If you forget the PIN, you can disable Speed Limit Mode by entering the login credentials for your Tesla Account. Note: When Speed Limit Mode is enabled, the acceleration setting (Controls > Driving > Acceleration) is automatically set to Chill (see Acceleration Modes on page 77). Warning: Driving downhill can increase driving speed, causing the vehicle to exceed your chosen maximum speed. Warning: Speed Limit Mode is not a replacement for good judgment, driver training, and the need to closely monitor roadway speed limits and driving conditions. Accidents can occur at any speed. Erasing Personal Data You can erase all personal data (saved addresses, music favorites, HomeLink programming, etc.) and restore all customized settings to their factory defaults. This is useful when transferring ownership of Model X. Touch Controls > Service > FACTORY RESET. Before erasing, Model X verifies your credentials by prompting you to enter the user name and password associated with your Tesla Account. Using the Touchscreen 139

Climate Controls Climate Controls Overview of Climate Controls Climate controls are always available at the bottom of the touchscreen. To turn the climate control system on, touch the fan icon or adjust the cabin temperature. To turn it off, touch the fan icon and then touch the off button near the center of the popup window. By default, climate control is set to the Auto setting, which maintains optimum comfort in all but the most severe weather conditions. When you adjust the cabin temperature in the Auto setting, the system automatically adjusts the heating, air conditioning, air distribution, and fan speed to maintain the cabin at your selected temperature. To override the Auto setting, touch the fan icon, turn off the Auto setting, then manually adjust your settings (see Adjusting Climate Control Settings on page 142). If you've manually adjusted individual settings, you can also revert back to Auto at any time by touching AUTO on the climate control popup window. Note: The following illustration is provided for demonstration purposes only. Depending on vehicle options, software version, market region, and settings, the information displayed may be slightly different. 1. Seat heaters operate at three setting levels from 3 (highest) to 1 (lowest). When operating, the associated seat icon displays twisting lines that turn red to indicate the setting level. If equipped with ventilated seats, a popup appears that allows you to switch between heating and cooling. When cooling, the twisting lines turn blue. Note: If Model X is equipped with rear seat heaters and/or the optional subzero weather package, you can also control seat heaters in the rear seats, heated wipers, and heated steering wheel by touching the fan icon then touching the seat tab. Note: To conserve energy, a seat heater in a passenger seating position automatically turns off if an occupant is not detected when the Drive gear is engaged. 2. Touch an up or down arrow to change the cabin temperature. To apply a temperature setting to both the driver and passenger side, touch SYNC on the popup that appears when you touch an arrow. When you apply the same temperature to both sides, only one temperature setting displays. Touch SYNC again to display separate temperature settings for the driver and passenger. 3. Touch the fan icon to turn on climate control and to manually customize settings to suit your preferences (see Adjusting Climate Control Settings on page 142). Touch and hold the fan icon to quickly turn off climate control. If your vehicle is equipped with the optional cold weather package, touch this icon to access controls for the rear seat heaters. 4. The windshield defroster distributes air flow to the windshield. Touch once to defog the windshield (the icon turns blue). Touch a second time to defrost the windshield (the icon turns red and the heating and fan operate at maximum levels). Touch a third time to turn off and restore the air distribution, heating, and fan to their previous settings. 5. Touch to warm up the rear window. When operating, the icon turns red. After 15 minutes, the rear window defroster automatically turns off. The exterior side mirrors are also heated whenever the rear window defroster is operating. 140 Model X Owner's Manual

Climate Controls Warning: To avoid burns resulting from prolonged use, individuals who have peripheral neuropathy, or whose capacity to feel pain is limited because of diabetes, age, neurological injury, or some other condition, should exercise caution when using the climate control system and seat heaters. Note: The climate control system is powered by the high voltage battery. Therefore, prolonged use decreases driving range. Using the Touchscreen 141

Climate Controls Adjusting Climate Control Settings To adjust individual settings to suit your preferences, touch the fan icon at the bottom of the touchscreen to access individual climate control settings. If Model X is equipped with six or seven seats, a rear climate controls bar also appears immediately below the above window. See Rear Cabin Climate Controls (6 and 7 seat vehicles only) on page 143. In addition to the settings shown, if Model X is in Park, the Keep Climate On and Dog Mode setting displays when you touch the fan icon when the vehicle is in Park (see Keep Climate On and Dog Mode on page 144). 1. Adjust the speed of the fan. Note: Adjusting the fan speed may change your setting for how air is drawn into Model X in order to decrease or increase airflow. For example, if you set the fan speed at the highest setting when the air circulation is set to draw in outside air, the setting may switch to recirculating the air to achieve the high air flow. 2. Touch to turn off the climate control system and close the climate controls popup window. Note: The popup window also closes if you touch the map, choose Media Player or an app, or display a controls window, even if the climate control system is turned on. 3. Turn the air conditioning on and off, respectively. Turning it off reduces cooling, but saves energy. 4. Choose where air flows into the cabin (windshield, face-level, or foot-level vents). You can choose more than one location. Note: When air is directed to the foot-level vents, approximately one third of the air continues to flow to the windshield vents to assist in defogging. However, when air is directed to the face-level vents, air does not flow to the windshield because the air flowing through the face- level vents can assist in defogging the windshield. 5. If your Model X is equipped with the Bioweapon Defense Mode feature, the HEPA (High Efficiency Particulate Air) filter ensures the best possible quality of air inside the cabin. When selected, outside air is filtered through the medical-grade HEPA filter in addition to the secondary filtration systems. The HEPA filter is extremely effective at removing particles, including pollution, allergens, bacteria, pollen, mold spores, and viruses. Both the HEPA filter and the secondary filtration system also contain activated carbon to remove a broad spectrum of odors and gases. When you engage Bioweapon Defense Mode, the fan operates at the highest speed. In addition, the positive pressure inside the cabin minimizes the amount of outside air that can leak into the vehicle. Note: Some gases, such as carbon monoxide, are not effectively removed by activated carbon. 142 Model X Owner's Manual

Climate Controls 6. Choose how air is drawn into Model X: Outside air is drawn into Model X (see Ventilation on page 144). Air inside Model X is recirculated. This prevents outside air (traffic fumes) from entering, but reduces dehumidifying performance. Recirculating the air is the most efficient way to cool the front cabin area. To prevent the windshield from fogging in some conditions, briefly change the setting every hour to draw in outside air. 7. Touch AUTO to change all settings on the currently displayed tab back to their default values. The icon is blue whenever the climate control system is set to AUTO. Note: Because Model X runs much quieter than a gasoline-powered vehicle, you may notice the sound of the A/C compressor as it is operating. To minimize noise, reduce the fan speed. Rear Cabin Climate Controls (6 and 7 seat vehicles only) 1. Touch the power button to turn the rear climate controls on or off. 2. Touch AUTO to change all settings back to their default values. Note: To save energy when set to AUTO, the rear heating and air conditioning turn off when Model X detects that there are no occupants in the second or third row seats. To override this energy saving feature and save the settings until you manually change them, touch the AUTO button a second time. 3. Touch + or - to set the speed of the fan. 4. Touch the arrows to adjust the temperature. Using the Touchscreen 143

Climate Controls Keep Climate On and Dog Mode to receive notifications and allow enough time to return to Model X should the The Keep Climate On and Dog settings allow climate control system stop operating— you to keep the climate control system on hot days, the cabin temperature can running when in Park, even after you've left become dangerously high within a few Model X. Both settings are useful when it is minutes. important to maintain the cabin temperature Warning: Check local laws for any in hot or cold weather conditions (for restrictions on leaving pets unattended in example, when leaving groceries in Model X your vehicle. on hot days, you may want to use Keep Climate On to prevent spoilage). Dog mode Warning: Never leave a child unattended keeps your pet comfortable while also in your vehicle. displaying the current cabin temperature on the touchscreen so people nearby are Ventilation informed that your pet does not need to be rescued. To direct the flow of air inside Model X, move Note: To initiate Keep Climate On or Dog the interior vents up, down, or from side to Mode, the Battery's charge level must be at side. least 20%. To operate Keep Climate On or Dog Mode: 1. Engage the Park gear. The Keep Climate On and Dog settings are available only when Model X is in Park. 2. If necessary, adjust the climate settings. 3. Touch the fan icon then touch Keep Climate On or Dog. The climate control system maintains your climate settings until you shift out of Park or manually turn it off. If the Battery's charge level drops below 20%, the Tesla mobile app repeatedly starts sending you notifications reminding you to check on anything that you have left in Model X. Note: You can direct the outer face level vents The next time you drive Model X, the climate toward the side windows to help defrost or control system continues operating using the defog them. previous settings from your most recent trip. Note: Software updates can not be performed Cabin Air Filter when Smart Preconditioning, Dog Mode or Model X has an air filter that prevents pollen, Keep Climate On is active. industrial fallout, road dust and other particles Warning: You can adjust the climate from entering through the vents. Tesla control system remotely using the mobile recommends replacing the cabin air filter app. However, if you use the mobile app every 2 years. to turn off the climate control system, Tesla recommends replacing the HEPA air Keep Climate On and Dog Mode stop filter (if equipped) every 3 years. operating. Warning: Avoid using Keep Climate On Cabin Overheat Protection and Dog Mode when the battery charge is low. When leaving a dog or pet in The climate control system can reduce the Model X, you must ensure that you have temperature of the cabin in extremely hot your phone with you and that the Tesla ambient conditions for a period of up to mobile app is running. This allows you to twelve hours after you exit Model X. Touch proactively monitor the cabin Controls > Safety & Security > Cabin Overheat temperature. To ensure the safety and Protection and choose: comfort of your dog or pet, always make • OFF: Disable Cabin Overheat Protection. sure you have adequate cellular coverage 144 Model X Owner's Manual

Climate Controls • NO A/C: Only the fan operates when the • To reduce the temperature in the cabin in cabin temperature exceeds 105° F (40° C). hot weather conditions, the fan may turn This option consumes less energy but the on to vent the cabin when the vehicle is cabin temperature may exceed 105° F parked. This occurs only if the battery's (40° C). charge level is above 20%. • ON: The air conditioning operates when the cabin temperature exceeds 105° F (40° C). Note: Cabin Overheat Protection operates only when the energy remaining in the Battery is above 20% . Warning: Never leave children or pets in the vehicle unattended. Due to automatic shut-off or extreme outside conditions, the inside of the vehicle can become dangerously hot, even when Cabin Overheat Protection is enabled. Climate Control Operating Tips • When you use the mobile app to turn on the climate control system, it automatically turns off after four hours or if the charge level drops to 20%. To cool or heat the cabin for a longer period, you must turn it on again. • To conserve energy, you can limit the power of the climate control system by turning on Range Mode. Cabin heating and cooling may be less effective, but seat heaters can be used to provide warmth in colder climates. Touch Controls > Driving > Range Mode. • If the climate control system is louder than you prefer, manually reduce the fan speed. • In addition to cooling the interior, the air conditioning compressor also cools the Battery. Therefore, in hot weather, the air conditioning compressor can turn on even if you turned it off. This is normal because the system‡s priority is to cool the Battery to ensure it stays within an optimum temperature range to support longevity and optimum performance. • To ensure the climate control system operates efficiently, close all windows and ensure that the exterior grill in front of the windshield is free of ice, snow, leaves, and other debris. • In very humid conditions, it is normal for the windshield to fog slightly when you first turn on the air conditioning. • It is normal for a small pool of water to form under Model X when parked. Extra water produced by the dehumidifying process is drained underneath. Using the Touchscreen 145

Maps and Navigation Maps and Navigation Overview Display/hide traffic conditions (if The touchscreen displays a map at all times. equipped with premium Hold and drag a finger to move the map in any connectivity). Green lines indicate direction. Rotate the map in any direction by no traffic; orange lines indicate holding and turning two fingers. light traffic; red lines indicate moderate traffic; and pink lines Touch the icon in the top right corner of the indicate heavy traffic. To ensure map to set the map's orientation: traffic is easy to identify along a navigation route, green traffic lines North Up - North is always at the display under the blue route line, top of the screen. whereas orange, red, and pink traffic lines display on top of the blue route line. Heading Up - The direction you are Display/hide all charging locations driving is always at the top of the and a popup list that includes the screen. The map rotates as you city and proximity of the change direction. This icon has an corresponding stations on the map. integrated compass that indicates Charging locations include Tesla the direction you are driving. Superchargers, destination chargers, and public chargers that Note: When navigating, this icon also allows you have used previously. See you to toggle to the route overview, which Charging Locations on page 149. allows you to view an overview of your Note: Superchargers are always navigation route (see Navigating on page displayed on the map, even when 147). charging locations are not When you rotate or move the map, your displayed. current location is no longer tracked. The message "Tracking Disabled" displays briefly next to the map orientation icon and the icon turns gray. To re-enable tracking, touch the map's orientation icon to choose North Up or Heading Up. Touch the + and - icons to zoom the map in and out on your current or chosen location. When you zoom in or out using these icons, tracking remains enabled. Touch the following icons to customize what the map displays and to access navigation settings: Note: These icons disappear after a few seconds when not in use. Touch anywhere on the map to re-display them. Display/hide satellite imagery (if equipped with premium connectivity). 146 Model X Owner's Manual

Maps and Navigation Increase or decrease the volume of Navigating spoken navigation instructions by To navigate to a location, touch Navigate, touching - or +, respectively. send the destination from your phone, or Decreasing all the way to the left speak a voice command (see Using Voice mutes the instructions. You can Commands on page 51). You can enter or also mute navigation instructions speak an address, landmark, business, etc. You when a navigation route is active can also choose a saved Home or Work by touching the volume icon on the location and select from a list of recently used turn-by-turn direction list. locations (the most recent displays at the top Customize how the navigation of the list), including charging stations you system works by adjusting these have visited. settings: When you specify a location, the touchscreen • Touch Trip Planner (if available zooms out to provide an overview of the route in your market region) to you need to travel, and, after calculating the minimize the time you spend route, zooms back in to your starting point driving and charging (see Trip and begins to provide instructions, and a turn- Planner on page 150). by-turn direction list that displays the first • Touch Online Routing to be navigation instruction and an estimate of total automatically rerouted to avoid mileage, driving time, and arrival time. heavy traffic (see Online Note: You can remotely start navigation in Routing on page 150). your vehicle by using your IOS® or Android™ • Touch Avoid Ferries to be device's "share" functionality after giving automatically rerouted to avoid access to the Tesla mobile app. ferries. You can touch the instruction to expand the • Touch Avoid Tolls to be list to show each turn on your journey. Note automatically rerouted to avoid the following about the turn-by-turn direction tolls. list: • Touch Use HOV Lanes to • A battery displays below the destination include High Occupancy to provide an estimate of how much Vehicle (HOV) lanes on your battery energy will remain when you reach navigation routes. This is your destination. Touch to expand battery particularly useful when using information to show a round trip estimate Navigate on Autopilot (see back to your starting point. See Predicting Navigate on Autopilot on page Energy Usage on page 149. 109). • If charging is needed to reach your Note: You can also access the destination and Trip Planner is enabled above navigation settings by (and available in your market region), the touching Controls > Navigation. navigation route automatically includes Note: The volume setting applies Supercharger stops (see Trip Planner on only to the navigation system's page 150) and you may need to touch spoken instructions. Volume for BEGIN TRIP to initiate navigation. Media Player and Phone remains • If you won't have enough energy to reach unchanged. your destination and there is no Supercharger on the route, an alert tells Drop a pin by pressing and holding your finger you that charging is needed to reach your anywhere on the map. When you drop a pin, destination. or touch an existing pin, the chosen location is • Each turn is preceded by the distance to centered on the map, and a popup window the maneuver. provides information about the location. From • To see the bottom of the list, you may this popup, you can navigate to the location, need to drag the list upward. call the location (if a phone number is • Touch the top of the list again to minimize available) and add or remove the location it. from your list of favorite destinations (see While navigating, the map tracks your location Recent, Favorite, Home and Work Destinations and displays the current leg of your trip. You on page 150). can display the entire route at any time. Using the Touchscreen 147

Maps and Navigation If Navigate on Autopilot is enabled, you can In addition, if you are Home and get in your turn it on for the navigation route by touching vehicle on weekdays (Monday-Friday) from Navigate on Autopilot in the turn-by-turn 5AM-11AM, Model X will automatically route direction list. Navigate on Autopilot is an you to your predetermined Work destination extension of Autosteer that automatically (see Recent, Favorite, Home and Work changes lanes and steers Model X onto the Destinations on page 150). If you are at work appropriate exit(s) when navigating on on weekdays from 3PM-11PM, your vehicle will controlled access roads (such as freeways). automatically route you Home. For details, see Navigate on Autopilot on page To enable Automatic Navigation, touch 109. Controls > Navigation > Automatic Navigation. The route overview icon displays You must have your phone's calendar when a navigation route is active. correctly synced to your vehicle with a Touch this icon at any time to view uniquely specified and valid address for each an overview of your navigation event (see Calendar on page 160). Your route, or to change the orientation Automatic Navigation settings are saved to of the map (see Overview on page your Driver Profile (see Driver Profiles on page 146), which also zooms the map to 46). show the current leg of your trip. Note: If you send navigation instructions to The black pin at the end of the your vehicle or input them manually, your route line represents your instructions override the suggestions of destination. Automatic Navigation. Mute/unmute navigation volume. I'm Feeling Lucky, Hungry Note: You can also mute the In addition to navigating to a destination of volume of the navigation system by your choice, your vehicle can also suggest pressing the scroll button on the unique locations to visit near you. Touch the left side of the steering wheel while navigation search bar and choose between navigation instructions are being Hungry or Lucky. Hungry suggests popular spoken. A volume control specific restaurants, whereas Lucky suggests popular to navigation instructions is also destinations (such as museums and available by touching the settings amusement parks). For a new suggestion, go icon on the map (see Overview on back and touch the Hungry or Lucky icon in page 146). the navigation search bar again for different results. Once you have discovered a place that interests you, touch Navigate to proceed to To stop navigating, touch CANCEL, located your destination. below the turn-by-turn direction list. This feature requires the latest version of Note: If a data connection is not available, Navigation Maps. To download, connect your onboard maps allow you to navigate to any vehicle to Wi-Fi and navigate to Controls > location, but you must enter the location's Software to see if an update is available (see exact and complete address. Map Updates on page 151). Note: Due to market region or vehicle Automatic Navigation configuration, this feature may not be Model X uses Automatic Navigation to route available in your vehicle. you to a predicted destination when you get in your vehicle. If you have an upcoming event shown in a phone's calendar that has been synced to Model X, your vehicle will automatically suggest the location of the event (if it has a valid address) when you are preparing to drive within two hours of the event start time. 148 Model X Owner's Manual

Maps and Navigation Charging Locations The location is equipped with a Superchargers always display on the map, Tesla Wall Connector. Touch to represented by red pins that you can touch to display more information such as display more information about the usage restrictions and available Supercharger location, navigate to it, or mark charge current. The charging list it as a favorite. When you touch the pin for a also displays your proximity to Supercharger location on the map, these charging stations. information about the Supercharger location is Note: When the map is zoomed out displayed, including the total number of and more than one Tesla Wall Superchargers, the number of Superchargers Connector is available in an area, available, the address of the Supercharger, and the pin is round and displays the its approximate distance from you. The popup number of stations. Touch the pin also displays amenities that are available at to zoom in. Then you can touch an the Supercharger location, including individual pins for detail about the restrooms, restaurants, lodging, shopping, and charging location. Wi-Fi. The Supercharger location is Note: When using navigation to direct you to a operational. At locations that have Supercharger, Model X may allocate energy to multiple Superchargers, a row of pre-heat the Battery in certain circumstances bars displays above the icon, with (such as cold weather). It is normal for your each bar representing a vehicle's front motor to make noise because it Supercharger. This provides a quick is generating heat to warm the Battery. In visual to indicate how many these cases, your vehicle ensures you arrive at superchargers are in use. If a the Supercharger with an optimal Battery Supercharger is in use, the bar is temperature, reducing the amount of time it filled in. takes to charge. Note: A supercharger pin is colored Predicting Energy Usage black if the supercharger is on your current navigation route. When navigating to a destination, Model X The Supercharger location may be helps you anticipate your charging needs by out of operation or is operating at calculating the amount of energy that remains a reduced capacity. Touch the pin when you reach your destination. The to display details. calculation is an estimate based on driving style (predicted speed, etc.) and environmental factors (elevation changes, Touch the map's charging icon to display all temperature, etc.). When navigating, the map nearby charging stations of the map. In displays this calculation at the bottom of the addition to the Superchargers that are always expanded turn-by-turn direction list (see displayed, the map shows destination chargers Navigating on page 147). When the turn-by- and any public charging stations that you have turn direction list is compressed, touch the top previously used. Display details about a of the list to expand it. charging location by touching its pin. Throughout your route, Model X monitors energy usage and updates the calculation. A popup warning displays at the bottom of the turn-by-turn direction list in these situations: • A yellow warning displays when you have very little energy remaining to reach your destination and should drive slowly to conserve energy. For tips on conserving energy, see Getting Maximum Range on page 80. • A red warning displays when you must charge to reach your destination. Using the Touchscreen 149

Maps and Navigation If you also want to know if you have enough Note: You can also monitor remaining energy for a round trip, touch the energy charging time needed in the Tesla Mobile App. calculation to display an estimate of your Note: If a Supercharger located on your route round trip energy usage. experiences an outage, Trip Planner displays a notification and reroutes you to a different Online Routing Supercharger location. Model X detects real-time traffic conditions If Trip Planner estimates that you won't have and automatically adjusts the estimated enough energy for your round trip, and there driving and arrival times based on traffic. In are no Superchargers available on your route, situations where traffic conditions will delay Trip Planner displays an alert at the top of the your estimated time of arrival and an alternate turn-by-turn direction list notifying you that route is available, the navigation system can charging is needed to reach your destination. reroute you to your destination. To turn this feature on or off, touch the map's settings Recent, Favorite, Home and Work icon (see Overview on page 146), then touch Destinations Online Routing. You can also specify the minimum amount of minutes that must be When you touch Navigate on the map, a list of saved before you are rerouted by touching the Recent destinations appear and you can easily arrows associated with the Re-Route if it saves navigate to any recent destination by more than setting. selecting it from the list. Trip Planner If you frequently drive to a destination, you may want to add it as a favorite to avoid Trip Planner (available in some market having to enter the location's name or address regions) helps you take longer road trips with each time. When you add a destination as a confidence. If reaching your destination Favorite, you can easily navigate to it by requires charging, Trip Planner routes you touching Navigate > Favorites and then through the appropriate Supercharger selecting it from the list of favorites. locations. Trip Planner selects a route and To add a destination to your provides charging times to minimize the Favorites list touch its pin on the amount of time you spend driving and map, then touch the heart icon on charging. To enable Trip Planner, touch the the popup window that appears. You map's settings icon (see Overview on page will be prompted to name the 146), then touch Trip Planner. Favorite. Enter a name (or leave as-is When Trip Planner is enabled and charging is to accept the default name), then required to reach your destination, the turn- touch Add to Favorites. The heart by-turn direction list includes Supercharger becomes solid gray and the stops and a recommended charging time at destination is included on the each Supercharger, and an estimate of how Favorites list. much energy will be available when you arrive at the Supercharger. To delete a Recent or Favorite destination, To remove Supercharger stops and display touch and hold it down briefly, then touch the only directions, touch Remove charging stops X that appears. at the bottom of the list of directions (if you The top of the navigation list also provides remove charging stops, the turn-by-turn shortcuts for Home and Work locations. Touch direction list may display an alert indicating to set an address to either of these locations. that charging is needed to reach your After entering the address, touch SAVE AS destination). To add Supercharger stops to the HOME or SAVE AS WORK. Then simply touch directions, touch Add charging stops. these shortcuts whenever you want to While charging at a Supercharger, the navigate home or to work. charging screen displays the remaining To change the location associated with Home charging time needed to drive to your next or Work, press and hold the shortcut icon and Supercharger stop, or destination (if no enter a new address in the popup window. To further charging is needed). If you charge for a delete, press and hold the shortcut button, shorter or longer length of time, the charging then touch CLEAR HOME or CLEAR WORK. time for subsequent Supercharger stops is adjusted. 150 Model X Owner's Manual

Maps and Navigation Note: Based on your usage patterns, you may be prompted to save a location as Home or Work. Note: Once a Home or Work location is saved, Model X may prompt you to navigate to your Work location in the mornings and to your Home location in the evenings and tell you how long it will take to arrive based on current traffic conditions. For security reasons, if you sell Model X, it is recommended that you delete your Home and Work Locations. You can delete these individually or you can perform a factory reset to erase all personal data (see Erasing Personal Data on page 139). Map Updates As updated maps become available, they are automatically sent to Model X over Wi-Fi. To ensure you receive them, periodically connect Model X to a Wi-Fi network (see Connecting to Wi-Fi on page 167). The touchscreen displays a message informing you when new maps are installed. Using the Touchscreen 151

Media and Audio Media and Audio Overview Note: Pressing the left scroll button during a phone call mutes both the sound and your Touch the Media Player icon at the microphone. bottom of the touchscreen to Note: If you're playing media and you receive stream music or podcasts (if a phone call, or the navigation system is available), and listen to FM or speaking directions, the volume of what you Internet radio stations. You can also are listening to is temporarily muted. listen to SiriusXM satellite radio (if equipped) and play audio files from Searching Media Content a Bluetooth or USB-connected device. Note: The media options available Touch Media Player's magnifying to you depend on market region glass icon to search for a particular and options chosen at time of song, album, artist, podcast, or purchase. station. Select a filter to narrow the scope of your search, or leave it at its default setting to include top Media Player provides three different levels of results from all available source ® viewing that you can access by dragging the content. If available, touch HD to Media Player window upward or downward. play high definition versions of the Initially, just the Miniplayer displays. The selected frequency. Miniplayer, which occupies the least amount of space on the touchscreen, displays what's Note: Use voice commands to search hands- currently playing and provides only the basic free (see Using Voice Commands on page 51). functions, mostly associated with what's playing. Drag upward to display Recents and FM Radio Favorites and access the icons you can use to change your media source (described next). Drag upward again to browse through all If available in your market region available options for the chosen type of and location, Media Player provides source content. FM radio stations that you can Use the icons across the bottom of Media select from the Radio source. Player to change your media source (for Touch the next or previous arrows example, FM, Streaming, or a Bluetooth- to move from one frequency to the connected device). Use the tabs on the left to next (or previous). Or touch Direct Tune to enter a specific frequency. narrow down the type of content you want to ® browse through—the associated content If available, touch HD to play high displays on the right. For Radio, you can definition versions of the selected browse through Favorite Stations or you can frequency. touch Direct Tune to enter the frequency of a specific channel. For Streaming, you can For easy access to radio stations you listen to browse through Favorites, Top Stations, DJ frequently, mark it as a favorite so it's readily Series, and Genres. available in the Favorites list (see Favorites and Recents on page 153). Volume Control SiriusXM Satellite Radio Roll the scroll button on the left side of the steering wheel up or down to increase or If Model X is equipped with the decrease volume respectively. The scroll optional sound package, you can button adjusts the volume for media, listen to SiriusXM, a subscription- navigation instructions, or phone calls, based based satellite radio service. To on what is currently being heard through the receive satellite radio channels, you speakers. You can also adjust the volume by must provide the radio service touching the arrows associated with the provider with the radio ID for your speaker icon on the bottom of the touchscreen. touchscreen. To mute the volume, press the left scroll To display the radio ID: button. Press again to unmute. 152 Model X Owner's Manual

Media and Audio 1. Touch the radio source icon, then select Note: When playing a podcast (if applicable), SiriusXM from the list. you can rewind or fast forward to any location 2. Move the channel selector to channel 0. in the show. On the Miniplayer, drag the slider 3. The Radio ID displays in the station to the desired location or touch the rewind/ information area. fast forward icons to move back or forward 15 seconds at a time. To select a SiriusXM channel, you can either manually scroll through channel numbers, or Caraoke you can browse channels by category. In addition to various streaming services, your Internet Radio and Music Streaming vehicle is equipped with Caraoke. Navigate to Caraoke by touching the Music icon near the Services bottom of the touchscreen. You can browse If equipped with premium connectivity, through a variety of songs and select the song internet radio and music streaming services you want to sing along to. Enable or disable are available over a data connection. To listen, the main vocals by touching the microphone touch the Media Player icon and choose the icon. Disabling the microphone icon leaves streaming service you want to listen to. only the song's instrumentals and background vocals. You can also enable or disable the Tesla may provide account credentials for song's lyrics by tapping the lyrics icon, located some internet radio and music streaming next to the microphone icon. services. You can use your Tesla account or Note: Depending on vehicle configuration and you can sign in with your own account by market region, Caraoke may not be available scrolling to the bottom of the streaming on your vehicle. service window and entering your account credentials. Warning: Drivers should never read Browse through the available categories Caraoke lyrics while driving and must and/or stations, then touch what you want to always pay attention to the road. Caraoke play. When browsing through a large category Lyrics are only for passengers while the such as genres, you may need to enlarge the vehicle is in drive. window by dragging upward. When you Favorites and Recents choose an option that displays multiple results on a new window, touch the BACK button at For most source content, your favorites the top of the window to return to the main display at the top of Media Player's expanded browse page. view for easy access. You can also use voice commands (available when speaking the English language) to play a To add a currently playing station, specific song, artist, or album from an Internet podcast, or audio file to your radio service (see Using Voice Commands on Favorites list, touch the Favorites page 51). icon on Miniplayer. When listening to some internet radio or To remove an item as a favorite, music streaming services, options available on touch the highlighted Favorites icon Miniplayer may vary depending on what you on Miniplayer. You can also remove are listening to: multiple favorites by expanding • Touch the next (or previous) arrows to Miniplayer one level to show all play the next (and in some cases previous) favorites for the applicable type of available station, episode, or track being source content. Then press and hold provided by the Internet radio service. any favorite. An X appears on all • Like or dislike a song or podcast. When favorites and you can then touch the you like a song, for example, the radio X associated with any favorite you station plays similar songs. When you want to remove from your Favorites dislike a song, the song won't be played list. again. • Touch the DJ icon (if available) to include commentary for the content you are streaming. DJ commentary includes music history and behind-the-scenes stories. Using the Touchscreen 153

Media and Audio ® To see selections that you have recently Bluetooth Connected Devices played, scroll up one level from Miniplayer and If you have a Bluetooth-capable device such touch Recent. Your recently played selections as a phone that is paired and connected to are updated continuously so you don't need to Model X (see Pairing a Bluetooth Phone on remove them. page 155), you can play audio files stored on Note: Selections you play on FM radio stations it and you can stream music from it. Choose do not display in your Recent selections. Media Player's Phone source, then touch the name of your Bluetooth-connected device, Playing Media from Devices and then touch CONNECT. Your Bluetooth device begins playing the You can play audio files from a audio file that is currently active on your Bluetooth-connected device (like a device, and Media Player displays the phone) or a USB-connected flash Miniplayer view. If no audio file is playing on drive. When you connect a your device, use your device to choose the Bluetooth-capable device, the audio file you want to listen to. When the file name of the device displays when begins to play, you can then use Miniplayer's you choose the Phone source. next and previous icons to play other tracks. When you connect a USB flash Note: To play media from a Bluetooth- drive, Media Player displays the connected device, ensure that access to the USB source content. device‡s media is turned on (see Pairing a Bluetooth Phone on page 155). To play the next song in a selected playlist or album, touch the previous or next arrows on Audio Settings the Miniplayer, or use the buttons on the left side of the steering wheel (see Using Left Press the equalizer icon at the Steering Wheel Buttons on page 49). You can bottom corner of Media Player to also shuffle tracks in a playlist or repeat a access audio settings for tone and playlist or track using the shuffle/repeat icons balance. Other settings may be (if available). available based on your vehicle USB Connected Flash Drives features and market region. For example, your vehicle may be Connect a flash drive to a USB connection equipped with options that you can (see USB Ports on page 20). Touch Media turn on or off, such as Dolby Player > USB, and then touch the name of the Surround and DJ Commentary. folder that contains the song you want to play. After you display the contents of a folder on To adjust any of the five frequency bands the USB connected flash drive, you can touch (Bass, Bass/Mid, Mid, Mid/Treble, and Treble) any song in the list to play it. Or use the drag the corresponding slider up or down the previous and next arrows in Miniplayer to decibel (dB) bar. scroll through your songs. Note: To play media from a USB connection, To adjust balance, touch Balance and drag the Model X recognizes flash drives only. You can center circle of the cross bars to the location play media from other types of devices (such in Model X where you want to focus the as an iPod) by connecting to the device using sound. Bluetooth. Note: Media Player supports USB flash drives with FAT32 formatting (NTFS and exFAT are not currently supported). Note: Use a USB connection located at the front of the center console. The USB connections at the rear of the console are for charging only. 154 Model X Owner's Manual

Phone Phone ® 6. Check that the number displayed on your Bluetooth Compatibility phone matches the number displayed on You can use your Bluetooth-capable phone the touchscreen. Then, on your phone, hands-free in Model X provided your phone is confirm that you want to pair. within operating range. Although Bluetooth 7. If prompted on your phone, specify typically supports wireless communication whether you want to allow Model X to over distances of up to approximately 30 feet access your contacts and media files. (9 meters), performance can vary based on the phone you are using. When paired, Model X automatically connects Before using your phone with Model X, you to the phone, and the touchscreen displays must pair it. Pairing sets up Model X to work the Bluetooth symbol next to the phone‡s with your Bluetooth-capable phone (see name to indicate that the connection is active. Pairing a Bluetooth Phone on page 155). You can pair up to ten Bluetooth phones. Importing Contacts and Recent Model X always automatically connects to the Calls last phone that was used (provided it is within Once paired, you can use the Bluetooth range). If you want to connect to a different settings screen (touch the Bluetooth icon on phone, see Connecting to a Paired Phone on the touchscreen's top status bar) to specify page 156. whether you want to allow access to your Note: On many phones, Bluetooth turns off if phone‡s contacts and recent calls. If access is the phone‡s battery is low. turned on, you can use the phone app to Note: In addition to phones, you can also pair display, and make calls to, people in your list Bluetooth-enabled devices with Model X. For of contacts and on your recent calls lists (see example, you can pair an iPod Touch or an Using the Phone App on page 156). iPad or Android tablet to stream music. Note: Before contacts can be imported, you may need to either set your phone to allow Pairing a Bluetooth Phone syncing, or respond to a popup on your phone to confirm that you want to sync contacts. Pairing allows you to use your Bluetooth- This varies depending on the type of phone capable phone hands-free to make and you are using. For details, refer to the receive phone calls, access your contact list, documentation provided with your phone. recent calls, etc. It also allows you to play Note: You can turn access to your contacts media files from your phone. Once a phone is and recent calls on or off at any time by paired, Model X can connect to it whenever displaying the Bluetooth settings screen, the phone is within range. choosing the phone, and then changing the To pair a phone, follow these steps while setting associated with contacts and recent sitting inside Model X: calls. 1. Ensure both the touchscreen and the Unpairing a Bluetooth Phone phone are powered on. 2. On your phone, enable Bluetooth and If you want to disconnect your phone and use ensure it is discoverable. it again later, simply touch Disconnect on the Note: On some phones, this may require Bluetooth settings screen. If you do not want you to go to Bluetooth Settings for the to use your phone with Model X again, touch remainder of the procedure. Forget This Device. Once you forget a device, 3. Touch the Bluetooth icon on the top of the you need to pair it again if you want to use it touchscreen. with Model X (see Pairing a Bluetooth Phone 4. On the touchscreen, touch Add New on page 155). Device > Start Search. The touchscreen Note: Your phone automatically disconnects displays a list of all available Bluetooth whenever you leave Model X. devices within operating distance. 5. On the touchscreen, touch the phone with which you want to pair. Within a few seconds, the touchscreen displays a randomly generated number, and your phone should display the same number. Using the Touchscreen 155

Phone Connecting to a Paired Phone • Choosing a number from your contact or recent calls list in the phone app. Model X automatically connects with the last • Using the Model X on-screen dialer in the phone to which it was connected, provided it phone app. is within operating range and has Bluetooth turned on. If the last phone is not within range, Note: If it is safe and legal to do so, you can it attempts to connect with the next phone also initiate a call by dialing the number or that it has been paired with. selecting the contact directly from your To connect to a different phone, touch the phone. Bluetooth icon on the top of the touchscreen. Note: You can also make a phone call by The Bluetooth window displays a list of paired touching a pin on the map and choosing the phones. Choose the phone you want to phone number (if available) on the popup connect to, then touch Connect. If the phone window. you want to connect to is not listed, you must pair the phone. See Pairing a Bluetooth Phone Receiving a Phone Call on page 155. When connected, the Model X touchscreen When your phone receives an incoming call, displays the Bluetooth symbol next to the the instrument panel and touchscreen display phone name to show that the connection is the caller‡s number or name (if the caller is in active. your phone‡s contact list and Model X has access to your contacts). Using the Phone App Touch one of the options on the touchscreen, or roll the scroll button on the right side of the When your phone is connected to Model X steering wheel to Answer or Ignore the call using Bluetooth, and you have allowed access (see Using Right Steering Wheel Buttons on to your phone's contacts (see Importing page 50). Contacts and Recent Calls on page 155), you Note: Depending on the phone you are using can use the phone app to display and make a and what speakers you used for your most hands-free call to anyone listed on your recent call, your phone may prompt you to phone: choose which speakers you want to use for • Recent Calls list. The list displays calls in the incoming call. chronological order with the most recent Warning: Stay focused on the road at all call listed first. You can display all calls or times while driving. Using or just those that are missed, incoming, or programming a phone while driving, even outgoing. with Bluetooth enabled, can result in • Contacts: Contacts are listed in serious injury or death. alphabetical order and can be sorted by Warning: Follow all applicable laws first name or last name. You can also regarding the use of phones while driving, choose a letter on the right side of the list including, but not limited to, laws that to quickly scroll to the names that begin prohibit texting and require hands-free with the selected character. When you operation at all times. touch a name on your contacts list, the contact's available number(s) displays on the right pane, along with other available In Call Options information (such as address). Touch the contact's number to make a call. When a call is in progress, you can display the call menu on the instrument panel by pressing Making a Phone Call the top button on the right side of the steering wheel. Then roll the right scroll You can make a phone call by: button and choose an option (see Using Right Steering Wheel Buttons on page 50). To • Speaking a voice command (English) (see adjust the call volume, roll the steering wheel's Using Voice Commands on page 51). left scroll button during a call. • Selecting a contact or recent call from the menu on your right scroll button (see Using Right Steering Wheel Buttons on page 50). 156 Model X Owner's Manual

Air Suspension Air Suspension Note: When Model X starts, you may hear the • LOW. Lowering the height can improve sound of the compressor as the air suspension aerodynamics and make it easier to load system‡s reservoir fills with air. or unload cargo and passengers. Adaptive Air Suspension offers a superior ride • VERY LOW. This setting is performed quality and allows you to choose a softer or manually and applies to the current drive firmer ride based on your preference. When only. carrying loads, the system also maintains a When manually raising the height of Model X level height between the front and rear. You to improve ground clearance, you should can manually adjust the ride height to suit lower the vehicle when the extra ground your circumstances (for example, you can clearance is no longer needed. raise Model X when driving at low speeds Caution: Avoid driving aggressively (hard when you need extra ground clearance, such accelerations, sharp turns, etc.) when the as when driving on a steep driveway or ramp, suspension is set to HIGH or VERY HIGH. in deep snow, over large speed bumps, Doing so can cause vibration and increase parking curbs, etc.). You can also specify the the possibility of damage. default ride height when driving at higher speeds. Caution: Acceleration may be reduced when the suspension is set to HIGH or If a fault is detected that reduces the VERY HIGH. performance of the air suspension SUSPENSION LOWERING: When Model X is system, a yellow indicator lights up moving above typical driveway or parking lot on the instrument panel. If the speeds, Adaptive Air Suspension problem persists, contact Tesla. automatically adjusts ride height to improve If a fault is detected that disables the aerodynamics and handling. When you air suspension system, a red manually raise the ride height, the suspension indicator lights up on the instrument automatically adjusts the ride height at panel. Contact Tesla. increased driving speeds. Choose from the following options to specify how you want the Suspension Settings air suspension system to adjust the ride height: Caution: Before adjusting the suspension • NEVER. The ride height is set to height, ensure Model X is clear of all STANDARD for each drive and never obstacles, above and below. automatically transitions to LOW. If you With Model X powered on and the brake pedal set the ride height to HIGH or VERY HIGH pressed, touch Controls > Suspension on the and exceed the maximum speed for these touchscreen to manually adjust the ride settings, the ride height transitions back height, to specify how you want the to STANDARD. If you manually change the suspension to feel, and to choose how you setting to LOW or VERY LOW, it resets want adaptive suspension to lower when back to STANDARD on your next drive. driving at higher speeds. • ALWAYS. The ride height is set to LOW for each drive and if you set it to HIGH or Choose from the following options to VERY HIGH and exceed the maximum manually change the ride height. speed for these settings, the ride height • VERY HIGH. When set to Very High, the transitions back to LOW. If you manually suspension automatically lowers to High change the setting to STANDARD or when driving speed reaches 35 mph VERY LOW, it resets back to LOW on your (56 km/h). next drive. • HIGH. When set to High, the suspension • HIGHWAY. This is the default setting. Ride automatically lowers to Standard or Low height automatically adjusts between (based on the Suspension Lowering STANDARD and LOW to balance ride setting described below) when driving comfort and energy usage. speed reaches 45 mph (73 km/h). • STANDARD. The Standard setting ensures optimum comfort and handling under all loading conditions. Using the Touchscreen 157

Air Suspension ADAPTIVE SUSPENSION DAMPING: Choose from STANDARD or SPORT to adjust the feel of the suspension system. STANDARD provides a softer and more fluid ride whereas SPORT provides a firmer, more controlled ride that increases driver engagement and connection to the road. Note: When returning to a saved location and driving faster than the High and Very High suspension settings allow, the suspension does not raise until Model X slows down. Note: After leaving a saved location, the suspension may not lower until you are driving faster than the speed threshold at which the suspension lowers. Note: If Model X reaches a saved location and the existing suspension setting is already higher than the level that has been saved for that location, the ride height is not adjusted. To remove an auto-raising location If you do not want the suspension to auto- raise at a saved location, touch the X in the auto-raising location status message that displays at a saved location. Doing so removes the auto-raise location and the suspension no longer raises automatically when you arrive at the location. Note: Available settings depend on your driving speed and other conditions. For example, the suspension does not lower if a door is open. Note: Your chosen Suspension Lowering and Adaptive Suspension Damping settings are saved to your driver profile (see Driver Profiles on page 46). Auto-Raising Suspension Auto-raising suspension saves you from manually having to raise the suspension every time you arrive at a frequently-used location where you have previously raised the suspension. Whenever you raise the suspension to HIGH or VERY HIGH, Model X saves the location. When you return to the saved location, Model X raises the suspension and the instrument panel displays this message: Note: Manually lowering the suspension to STANDARD, LOW, or VERY LOW while at a saved location also removes the auto-raising location. 158 Model X Owner's Manual

Air Suspension Jack Mode Before jacking or lifting, set the suspension to Jack mode to prevent the self-leveling that occurs even when Model X is powered off. Press the brake pedal, then touch Controls > Suspension > Jack. To deactivate, touch Jack again. Note: Jack mode automatically cancels when you drive over 4 mph (7 km/h). Note: Model X also sets Jack mode automatically if it detects that the vehicle cannot lower to its target height, or if it detects that an object is supporting the vehicle's weight (for example the bumper of the vehicle is resting on a curb). Using the Touchscreen 159

Calendar Calendar Overview Touch an event's information icon to display all notes associated with the event. If the The Calendar app allows you to view notes include one or more phone numbers, ® scheduled events from your phone‡s (iPhone the information icon shows a phone icon and ™ or Android ) calendar for the current and next the calendar displays the first phone number day. The Calendar is conveniently integrated found. Touch to initiate a phone call. You can with navigation and the Phone app so you can also initiate a phone call by touching any navigate to, or dial into, your next meeting. number in an event's notes popup window The Calendar app requires that: (this is especially useful for conference calls). • The Tesla mobile app is running, you are If the notes contain a web link, you can touch logged in, and the Calendar Sync setting the link to open it in the web browser (if is enabled. The mobile app can then equipped). periodically (and automatically) send If events are displayed from multiple calendar data from your phone to calendars, touch the list icon in the top right Model X. corner to filter the list of events to show only Note: To ensure you have access to all those from one or more specified calendars. features of the Calendar app, it is recommended that you use the most recent version of the mobile app. • Your phone is connected to Model X via Bluetooth (for privacy reasons, calendar data displays only from a connected phone). • Mobile access to Model X is turned on (touch Controls > Safety & Security > Allow Mobile Access). • Both your phone and Model X have good connectivity. When you enter Model X, the touchscreen can display a reminder of the day's events. You can customize if and when your calendar events are displayed by touching the settings icon located in the top left corner of the Calendar app, then choosing from one of the options available for the Show Calendar Upon Entry setting. If a calendar event includes an address, a navigation arrow displays to indicate that you can touch the address to navigate to the event's location. When an event on your Calendar takes place within the next hour and has a uniquely specified address, the touchscreen notifies you if there is a better route due to traffic, even when you‡re not currently using navigation. If an event has a uniquely specified address and takes place within two hours of you entering your vehicle and preparing to drive, Model X will automatically route you to the event's address (see Automatic Navigation on page 148). 160 Model X Owner's Manual

Security Settings Security Settings About the Security System If you forget your driving PIN, or to disable PIN to Drive, return to this setting, touch the If Model X does not detect a key nearby and a link to enter your Tesla login credentials, then locked door or trunk is opened, an alarm follow the on-screen prompts. sounds and the headlights and turn signals Note: In the unlikely event that your flash. To deactivate the alarm, press any touchscreen is unresponsive, you may be button on the key. unable to enter the PIN. In this case, first try to To manually enable or disable the alarm restart the touchscreen (see Restarting the system, touch Controls > Safety & Security > Touchscreen on page 54). If the touchscreen is Security Alarm. When enabled, Model X still unresponsive, you can still bypass PIN to activates its alarm one minute after you exit, Drive by enabling Keyless Driving in your the doors lock, and a recognized key is no mobile app. longer detected. If your Model X is equipped with the Enhanced Sentry Mode Anti-Theft upgrade, the horn sounds in situations where a locked door or trunk is In Sentry Mode, cameras and sensors remain opened and Model X does not detect a key powered on and ready to record suspicious nearby. If the Tilt/Intrusion setting is on, the activity when the vehicle is locked and in Park. horn also sounds if Model X detects motion To turn Sentry Mode on or off, touch the inside the cabin, or if the vehicle is moved or Sentry Mode icon at the top of your tilted (for example, with a tow truck or jack). touchscreen. Alternatively, you can use voice To turn the Tilt/Intrusion detection system on commands, the mobile app, or you can touch or off, touch Controls > Safety & Security > Controls > Safety & Security > Sentry Mode. To Tilt/Intrusion. activate Sentry Mode using voice commands, Note: If you plan to leave something that say "Keep Tesla safe", "Keep my car safe", moves inside your locked Model X, remember "Sentry on", or "Enable Sentry" (for details to turn off Tilt/Intrusion. Motion detected using voice commands, see Using Voice inside Model X activates the intrusion alarm. Commands on page 51). Note: The Security Alarm must be on to Note: Sentry Mode requires the Battery's enable Tilt/Intrusion. charge level to be at least 20%. If the Battery Note: The Intrusion Sensor automatically falls below 20%, Sentry Mode turns off and the disables in situations where the climate mobile app sends you a notification. control system is operating when you have left Note: Power consumption may increase while your vehicle (see Keep Climate On and Dog Sentry Mode is active. Mode on page 144). To override, you can Note: Software updates cannot be installed manually turn the Intrusion Sensor on again while Sentry Mode is activated. after choosing Keep Climate On or Dog Mode (touch Controls > Safety & Security > Tilt/ Warning: Do not rely on Sentry Mode to Intrusion). protect Model X from all possible security threats. While it may help deter some PIN to Drive threats, no security system can prevent all attacks. To increase security, you can prevent Model X from being driven until a 4-digit PIN (Personal Standby, Alert, and Alarm States Identification Number) is entered. To enable When in Sentry Mode, Model X may go this setting, touch Controls > Safety & through three states depending on its Security > PIN to Drive and follow the on- surroundings—Standby, Alert, and Alarm: screen prompts to create a driving PIN. Note: When enabled, in addition to having to • Standby - Your vehicle automatically enter the 4-digit driving PIN to drive, you must enters the Standby state when you also use it to enter Valet mode for the first activate Sentry Mode. In the Standby time and create the 4-digit valet PIN that you state, the cameras constantly monitor the can use to enter and exit Valet mode. When in area surrounding Model X for possible Valet mode, Model X can be driven without security threats. the need for the valet to enter a driving PIN. In addition, the PIN to Drive setting is disabled whenever Valet mode is active. Using the Touchscreen 161

Security Settings • Alert - If Sentry Mode detects a threat, • Exclude Favorites- Sentry Mode does not such as someone leaning on Model X, automatically activate at the locations in Sentry Mode switches to the Alert state. your Favorites list, but activates at every The touchscreen then displays a message other location where you park. indicating that the cameras are recording Model X must be parked within 32 feet (10 the event. meters) of a location listed as a Home, Work, • Alarm - For major threats, such as or Favorite for Sentry Mode to recognize the someone breaking a window, Sentry Mode location. triggers the Alarm state. In the Alarm state, the security alarm activates, the USB Flash Drive Requirements for audio system generates a loud and unexpected sound, and the message on Videos and Recording the touchscreen displays in maximum brightness. After 30 seconds, Sentry Mode Flash drives used to store video from your returns to the Standby state. vehicle's cameras must meet these When in the Alert or Alarm state, Sentry Mode requirements: saves the most recent ten minutes of footage • Use a flash drive with as much available prior to the event that triggered either state, storage as possible, since video footage provided that a properly configured USB flash takes up a large amount of space (Tesla drive is inserted into one of the USB ports recommends using a flash drive with at (see USB Flash Drive Requirements for Videos least 32 GB of storage). Some personal and Recording on page 162). computer operating systems may not be Note: When the Alarm state is triggered, the able to format flash drives larger than 32 most recent six seconds prior to the security GB as FAT 32. Consider using a third party event may be sent to Tesla for temporary application to format flash drives larger backup for approximately 72 hours. You can than 32 GB. enable or disable the collection of this video • The flash drive must have a sustained at any time by touching "DATA SHARING" in write speed of at least 4 MB/s. A Controls > Safety & Security. sustained write speed is different from the peak write speed. Check the product Note: Sentry Mode can operate without a flash details of your flash drive for more drive installed. If your vehicle enters the Alarm information. state, the security alarm activates and you will • The flash drive must be USB 2.0 receive a notification on your phone. However, compatible. If using a USB 3.0 flash drive, video recordings of the event will not be it must be able to support USB 2.0. available. • Use a dedicated flash drive exclusively for saving footage for your vehicle. Location-Based Settings • The flash drive must be properly You can customize Sentry Mode to formatted (see Formatting the USB Flash automatically activate at specific locations Drive on page 162). where you park Model X: • Exclude Home- Sentry Mode does not Formatting the USB Flash Drive automatically activate at the location you To correctly save and retrieve video footage, set as Home in your Favorites list (see your vehicle requires a properly formatted Recent, Favorite, Home and Work USB flash drive containing a base-level folder Destinations on page 150), but activates at called “TeslaCam” (without quotation marks). every other location where you park. In addition, the flash drive must be formatted Note: To set up your Home location, touch as FAT 32 (for Windows), MS-DOS FAT (for Navigate and hold down Home, then enter Mac), ext3, or ext4 in order to save videos. your address. Touch Save as Home. NTFS and exFAT are not currently supported. • Exclude Work- Sentry Mode does not For MacOS: automatically activate at the location you set as Work in your Favorites list, but 1. Insert the USB flash drive into your activates at every other location where personal computer. you park. Set your Work location the same 2. Navigate to Utilities > Disk Utility (or you way you set up your Home location, as can conduct a Spotlight Search for this). previously described. 3. Select your flash drive in the left menu. 162 Model X Owner's Manual

Security Settings 4. Navigate to Erase in the top menu ribbon. Once you have created the “TeslaCam” folder 5. In the pop-up menu, select the correct in your USB flash drive and ejected it from format (MS-DOS FAT) and click Erase. your personal computer, insert the flash drive Note: Selecting Erase completely erases into one of the front USB ports in Model X. Do all content on your flash drive. If you have not use the rear USB ports, as they are solely other content stored on the flash drive, meant for charging devices. It may take your migrate it to a different device before vehicle up to 15 seconds to recognize the flash erasing it. drive. When recognized, icons for dashcam and Sentry Mode appear at the top of your 6. Once the flash drive is successfully erased, touchscreen (note that you may need to navigate to Finder and select your USB enable to Sentry Mode by going to Controls > flash drive from the left menu. The flash Safety & Security > Sentry Mode). Your vehicle drive should not contain any files. is ready to record video. 7. Right-click in the empty space of the flash drive and select New Folder. A folder Retrieving Footage appears in your flash drive space. To retrieve video footage from the flash drive, 8. Right-click on the folder, select Rename, remove the flash drive from the front USB port and name the folder to “TeslaCam” and use a personal computer or other device (without quotation marks). Click "Save". to access the files. Navigate to the “TeslaCam” This folder will contain all of the recent folder on the flash drive. and saved clips from Sentry Mode and dashcam. Within the “TeslaCam” folder, there are three 9. Properly eject the USB flash drive from sub-folders: Recent Clips, Saved Clips, and your personal computer. Sentry Clips. The footage in Recent Clips constantly loops in a 60-minute cycle when For Windows: the cameras are activated. Therefore, the footage is constantly being overwritten every 1. Insert the USB flash drive into your hour unless the footage is saved. When an personal computer. event is recorded, one video is recorded for 2. Navigate to File Explorer. each of the front, rear (if equipped), left, and 3. Right-click on your USB flash drive and right cameras. select "Format...". Saved footage is located in either the Saved 4. In the pop-up menu, under the File Clips or Sentry Clips folder. Footage in the System section, select “FAT 32”. Saved Clips folder contains all saved Note: You can also name your USB (under recordings from dashcam, which have been Volume Label) for easier recognition. manually saved by touching the dashcam icon 5. Check the “Quick format box” and click on the touchscreen. Sentry Clips contains all Start. saved footage from Sentry Mode events, which have been automatically saved when 6. Go back to File Explorer, click on your the Alert or Alarm state was triggered. Once flash drive, and right-click to create a footage of a particular event is saved, the folder, or select “New Folder” in the top latest 10 minutes of video is archived in your menu. flash drive labeled with a unique timestamp. 7. Name the folder “TeslaCam” (without Note: If your USB flash drive is getting full, the quotation marks) and click "Save". This oldest footage in Sentry Clips will be deleted folder will contain all of the recent and to make room for new footage. Once the older saved clips from Sentry Mode and footage is deleted, you will not be able to dashcam. retrieve them. When the flash drive is full, 8. Properly eject the USB flash drive from Sentry Mode and dashcam can no longer save your personal computer. video footage to your flash drive. Note: To prevent the flash drive from getting full, move the saved videos to another device as soon as possible. Note: You are responsible for complying with all local laws, regulations, and property restrictions regarding video. The cameras do not record audio. Using the Touchscreen 163

® HomeLink Universal Transceiver HomeLink®Universal Transceiver About HomeLink 8. Ensure HomeLink works as expected. In ® some cases the programming process If your vehicle is equipped with the HomeLink may require multiple attempts before Universal Transceiver, you can operate up to succeeding. three Radio Frequency (RF) devices, including Once programmed, you can operate the garage doors, gates, lights, and security device by touching its corresponding systems. HomeLink icon on the touchscreen's status Note: Depending on date of manufacture, bar. HomeLink remembers the location of your market region, and options selected at time of programmed devices. When you approach a purchase, some vehicles are not equipped known location, the HomeLink control on the with a HomeLink Universal Transceiver. touchscreen automatically drops down. When Warning: Do not use the HomeLink you drive away, it disappears. Universal Transceiver with a device that Note: For additional assistance or does not have safety stop and reverse compatibility questions, contact HomeLink features. Using a device without these (www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515). safety features increases the risk of injury or death. Auto Opening and Closing ® To operate a HomeLink device without Programming HomeLink ® touching the touchscreen, you can automate To program HomeLink (if equipped): the device to open as you approach and close 1. Park Model X so that the front bumper is as you drive away: in front of the garage door, gate, or light 1. Touch the HomeLink icon on the top of you want to program. the touchscreen and choose the device Caution: Your device might open or you want to automate. close during programming. Before 2. Select the Auto-open when arriving programming, make sure that the checkbox if you want the device to open device is clear of any people or as you approach. objects. 3. Touch the arrows to specify the distance 2. Get the device's remote control and you want your vehicle to be from the ensure it has a healthy battery. Tesla device before it opens. recommends replacing the battery in the 4. Select the Auto-close when leaving device's remote control before checkbox if you want the device to close Programming HomeLink. as you drive away. 3. Touch the HomeLink icon on the top of As you approach (or drive away from) a the touchscreen. device that is set to operate automatically, the 4. Touch Create HomeLink, then use the HomeLink status icon displays a count-down keyboard on your touchscreen to enter a message to let you know when the device will name for your HomeLink device. automatically open/close. In situations where 5. Touch Enter on the keyboard or touch you don't want the device to automatically Create HomeLink. open or close, touch Skip Auto-Open or Skip 6. Touch Start then follow the onscreen Auto-Close at any time during the count-down instructions. message. Note: If you see a screen called “Train the receiver” while programming the device, remember that this is a time-sensitive step. After pressing the Learn/Program/ Smart button on the device's remote, you only have approximately 30 seconds to return to your vehicle, press Continue, and then press the trained HomeLink device name twice. Consider having an assistant help with this step. 7. Once your device is programmed, touch Save to complete the HomeLink programming routine. 164 Model X Owner's Manual

® HomeLink Universal Transceiver Resetting the Location of the 2. The device's receiver learns Model X. The HomeLink Device touchscreen instructs you to press the LEARN button on the device's receiver. If If you experience situations in which you training the receiver does not work, refer sometimes drive up to your HomeLink device to the guidelines in After programming, and it doesn't open, or the HomeLink icon on the device does not work on page 165. the touchscreen's status bar does not display Note: Only devices that are equipped with the dropdown when you approach the device, a “rolling code” remote need to learn you may need to reset the device's location. Model X. If you have an old device that is To do so, park as close as possible to the not equipped with a "rolling code" remote, HomeLink device (garage door, gate, etc.) and the device does not need to learn Model X display the HomeLink settings page by and you can skip this part of the process. touching the HomeLink icon on the top of the You can also skip this part if your receiver touchscreen. Touch the name of the device is "Quick-Train" compatible. you want to reset, then Reset Location. Headlights do not flash Deleting a Device • Check the batteries in the remote. It is a To delete a HomeLink device, touch the good idea to replace the batteries before HomeLink icon on the top of the touchscreen. you start programming. Touch the name of the device you want to • Standing in front of the vehicle, press and delete, then touch Delete. hold the button on your device's remote Note: You can also perform a factory reset to with the remote approximately 2 inches (5 erase your HomeLink settings, along with all cm) in front of the Tesla emblem. In some other personal data (saved addresses, music cases you must hold the button on the favorites, imported contacts, etc.). See Erasing remote for up to three minutes. Personal Data on page 139. • If you see a screen called “Train the Note: For security reasons, delete your receiver” while programming the device, HomeLink devices if you sell your Model X. remember that this is a time-sensitive step. After pressing the Learn/Program/ Smart button on the device's remote, you Troubleshooting HomeLink only have approximately 30 seconds to return to your vehicle, press Continue, and When programming a HomeLink device, the then press the trained HomeLink device touchscreen walks you through a two-part name twice. Consider having an assistant programming process: help with this step. 1. Model X records the signal from the • Canada only: certain garage door remotes remote. The touchscreen instructs you to may require multiple short remote presses stand in front of the vehicle, point the (approximately 1 second for each press) remote at the front bumper and press and instead of one long duration press. hold the button until the headlights flash. • For additional assistance or compatibility When the headlights flash, Model X has questions, contact HomeLink learned the remote and you can touch (www.homelink.com or call Continue on the touchscreen. If the 1-800-355-3515). headlights do not flash, refer to the guidelines in Headlights do not flash on After programming, the device does not work page 165. • Park Model X with its front bumper as close as possible to the garage door, gate, etc. that you are trying to program. • Make sure you are pressing the receiver's Learn/Program/Smart button. For instructions on how to put the receiver into learning mode, refer to the owner documentation provided with the garage door, gate, etc. that you are trying to program. Using the Touchscreen 165

® HomeLink Universal Transceiver • Most devices stay in learning mode for only three to five minutes. Immediately after pressing the device's Learn/ Program/Smart button, follow the instructions displayed on the vehicle's touchscreen. 166 Model X Owner's Manual

Connecting to Wi-Fi Connecting to Wi-Fi Wi-Fi is available as a data connection method and is often faster than cellular data networks. Connecting to Wi-Fi is especially useful in areas with limited or no cellular connectivity. To ensure fast, reliable delivery of software and map updates, Tesla recommends leaving your vehicle connected to a Wi-Fi network whenever possible (for example, if parked in your garage overnight). To connect to a Wi-Fi network: 1. Touch the cellular icon (usually LTE or 3G) on the top corner of your touchscreen. Model X will start scanning and display the detected Wi-Fi networks that are within range. 2. Select the Wi-Fi network you want to use, enter the password (if necessary), then touch Confirm. 3. Your vehicle connects to the Wi-Fi network and will automatically connect to it whenever the network is within range. You can also connect to a hidden network that isn't shown on the list of scanned networks. Just touch Wi-Fi Settings, enter the name of the network in the resulting dialog box, select the security setting, then touch Add Network. Note: If more than one previously connected network is within range, Model X connects to the one most recently used. Note: You can also use a mobile hotspot or your phone's Internet connection via Wi-Fi tethering (subject to fees and restrictions of your mobile carrier). Note: At Tesla Service Centers, Model X automatically connects to the Tesla Service Wi-Fi network. Using the Touchscreen 167

Software Updates Software Updates Loading New Software The yellow clock icon becomes a green download icon when a software update is Model X updates its software wirelessly, downloading. If a yellow download icon constantly providing new features for your displays, a software update is available but vehicle. Tesla recommends you install software your vehicle is not connected to Wi-Fi. updates as soon as they are available on your Connect your vehicle to Wi-Fi to start the vehicle. To ensure the fastest and most reliable download. delivery of software updates, leave the Wi-Fi turned on and connected whenever possible. Software Update Preferences Your vehicle must be connected to Wi-Fi to start an update (see Connecting to Wi-Fi on You can choose how quickly and often you page 167). receive software updates. To change your Note: Software updates using cellular data are preference, navigate to Controls > Software > also available if your vehicle is equipped with Software Update Preferences and select from premium connectivity. the following: Note: Software updates are not performed • STANDARD: receive software updates when Keep Climate On or Smart using the normal rollout timeframe for Preconditioning is active. your region and vehicle configuration. Warning: Do not attempt to use the When a software release is made available vehicle while the software is being it has generally been running on other updated. Vehicle functions, including customer vehicles for a period of time. some safety systems, may be limited or • ADVANCED: receive the latest software disabled while a software update is in updates for your region and vehicle progress and you could damage the configuration as soon as they are vehicle. available. Tesla determines how, when, and where to send updates to vehicles based When a software update is available, a yellow on a variety of factors, which are unique clock icon appears at the top of the to each release. Keep in mind that touchscreen. There are three ways you can although you will receive the latest install software updates on Model X: software as soon as it is available for your • Touch the yellow clock icon at the top of vehicle, you may not be the first Tesla the touchscreen to navigate to the owner to receive the update. This does scheduling window, which prompts you to not enroll your vehicle in the early access select a time to install the update (SET program. FOR THIS TIME) or install it now (INSTALL Note: Tesla does not update software upon NOW). Once scheduled, the yellow clock request for those wanting to receive the latest icon changes to a white clock icon until features and improvements. Selecting the the update begins. You can reschedule the ADVANCED software update preference and update any time before it begins. consistently connecting to Wi-Fi (see • Go to Controls > Software to determine if Connecting to Wi-Fi on page 167) is the best there is an update available for your way to receive the latest software updates vehicle. If available, touch Software available. Update Available to navigate to the Note: This software update window will persist scheduling window, as mentioned until you complete the installation of the previously. software update. You must install all software • Start updates using the Tesla mobile app. updates as soon as they are available and any Note: Some software updates can take up to harm relating to the failure to install a three hours to complete. Model X must be in software update will not be covered by the Park while the new software is being installed. vehicle‡s warranty. Failure or refusal to install To ensure the fastest and most reliable such updates may result in the inaccessibility delivery of software updates, leave the Wi-Fi of certain vehicle features (including turned on and connected whenever possible incompatibility with digital media devices) or (see Connecting to Wi-Fi on page 167). in Tesla being unable to diagnose and service your vehicle. Note: If software updates are not installed, some vehicle features may become inaccessible and digital media devices may 168 Model X Owner's Manual

Software Updates become incompatible. Reverting to a previous software version is not possible. If the touchscreen displays a message indicating that a software update was not successfully completed, contact Tesla. Charging If Model X is charging when the software update begins, charging stops. Charging resumes automatically when the software update is complete. If you are driving Model X at the scheduled update time, the update is canceled and you need to reschedule it. Viewing Release Notes When a software update is complete, learn about the new features by reading the release notes. To display release notes about your current software version at any time touch the Tesla “T” at the top center of the touchscreen, then touch Release Notes. You can also navigate to the Software tab to view the release notes. Tesla strongly recommends reading all release notes. They may contain important safety information or operating instructions regarding your Model X. Using the Touchscreen 169

Mobile App Mobile App Overview • Receive notifications when the security alarm has been triggered. The Tesla mobile app allows you to • Receive notifications of software updates. communicate with Model X remotely using • Start software updates from afar. ® ™ your iPhone or Android phone. With this • Access your Tesla Inbox. app, you can: • View the vehicle's estimated range. • Enable/disable Speed Limit Mode and • Check charging progress, stop charging, receive notifications when the vehicle's and receive notifications when charging is driving speed is within approximately 3 started, interrupted, almost complete, or mph (5 km/h) of your selected maximum complete. speed (see Speed Limit Mode on page 139). Note: When Supercharging, additional • View the odometer, VIN, and current notifications alert you when you will be software version. charged idle fees for parking at a Note: Some of these features require supercharger after charging is complete. installation of the latest version of the mobile The idle fees are waived if your vehicle is app. moved within five minutes of when the vehicle finishes charging. See Note: The above list may not represent an Supercharger Usage Fees and Idle Fees on exhaustive list of the functions available on the page 180. Tesla mobile app. To ensure access to new and • Check the interior temperature and heat improved features, download updated or cool the cabin before driving (even if versions of the mobile app as they become it's in a garage). available. • Locate Model X with directions, or track its movement across a map. To use the mobile app • Flash lights or honk the horn to find Follow these steps to allow the Tesla mobile Model X when parked. app to communicate with your Model X: • Lock or unlock Model X from afar. • Open the front or rear trunk. 1. Download the Tesla mobile app to your • Enable valet mode. phone. • Enable Keyless Driving. 2. Log in to the Tesla mobile app by entering your Tesla account credentials. Note: Keyless Driving can be used when 3. Enable mobile access to your Model X by you do not have your key or to bypass PIN touching Controls > Safety & Security > to Drive in cases where you forgot your Mobile Access (see Controls on page 129). PIN or your touchscreen is unresponsive. Note: Your phone and vehicle must both be • Park or unpark Model X using Summon actively connected to cellular service to allow (see Summon on page 115). the mobile app to communicate with your • Retrieve Model X using Smart Summon vehicle. Tesla recommends that you always (see Smart Summon on page 118). have a functional physical key readily available • Support the Model X Calendar app by if parking in an area with limited or absent allowing the mobile app to send your cellular service, such as an indoor parking phone's calendar data to Model X. garage. In the event that you require lockout • Enable/disable Sentry Mode. assistance from Tesla due to a non-warranty • Open and close your garage door if your issue, such as having limited cellular vehicle has a programmed HomeLink connectivity and having no secondary key connection, if available (see HomeLink available, your expenses are not covered Universal Transceiver on page 164). under the Roadside Assistance policy. • Enable maximum defrost to warm your Note: Tesla does not support the use of third vehicle in cold conditions. party applications to contact Model X. • View available software downloads and download progress. • Vent and close all windows. • For supported video sources, send videos to play in the Tesla Theater by sharing the link through the mobile app. 170 Model X Owner's Manual

Electric Vehicle Components Charging Electric Vehicle Components High Voltage Components 1. Front Motor 2. Air Conditioning Compressor 3. Forward Junction Box 4. High Voltage Cabling 5. Battery Coolant Heater 6. DC-DC Converter 7. Cabin Heater 8. High Voltage Battery 9. On-board Charger 10. Charge Port 11. Rear Motor 12. HV Cable to Rear HVAC Assembly Warning: The high voltage system has no user serviceable parts. Do not disassemble, remove or replace high voltage components, cables or connectors. High voltage cables are typically colored orange for easy identification. Warning: Read and follow all instructions provided on the labels that are attached to Model X. These labels are there for your safety. Warning: In the unlikely event that a fire occurs, immediately contact your local fire emergency responders. Charging 171

Electric Vehicle Components Charging Equipment Charging equipment designed specifically to charge your Model X is available from Tesla. A Tesla Wall Connector, which installs in your garage, is the fastest way to charge Model X at home. In most market regions, Model X is equipped with a Mobile Connector and the adapter(s) needed to plug into the most commonly used power outlets. When using the Mobile Connector, first plug the Mobile Connector into the power outlet, and then plug in Model X. For more information about your Mobile Connector, see the Mobile Connector Owner‡s Manual (available on the touchscreen). Additional adapters can be purchased from Tesla. Tesla offers additional adapters (for example, J1772, CHAdeMO, and CCS Combo) to allow you to plug into the most commonly used public charging stations in your region. Connect the adapter to the charging station‡s charge cable, open the charge port door using the touchscreen (see Charging Instructions on page 175), and then plug in Model X. For information on the charging equipment available for your region, go to www.tesla.com, choose your region, and then view the available charging options. More details on public charging station adapters is available at https:// www.tesla.com/chademo. 172 Model X Owner's Manual

Battery Information Battery Information About the Battery Battery Care Model X has one of the most sophisticated Never allow the Battery to fully discharge. battery systems in the world. The most Even when Model X is not being driven, its important way to preserve the Battery is to Battery discharges very slowly to power the LEAVE YOUR VEHICLE PLUGGED IN when onboard electronics. The Battery can you are not using it. This is particularly discharge at a rate of approximately 1% per important if you are not planning to drive day, though the discharge rate may vary Model X for several weeks. When plugged in, depending on environmental factors (such as Model X wakes up when needed to cold weather), vehicle configuration, and your automatically maintain a charge level that selected settings on the touchscreen. maximizes the lifetime of the Battery. Situations can arise in which you must leave Note: When left idle and unplugged, your Model X unplugged for an extended period of vehicle periodically uses energy from the time (for example, at an airport when Battery for system tests and recharging the traveling). In these situations, keep the 1% in 12V battery when necessary. mind to ensure that you leave the Battery with a sufficient charge level. For example, over a There is no advantage to waiting until the two week period (14 days), the Battery may Battery‡s level is low before charging. In fact, discharge by approximately 14%. the Battery performs best when charged Discharging the Battery to 0% may result in regularly. damage to vehicle components. To protect Note: If you allow the Battery to discharge to against a complete discharge, Model X enters 0%, other components may become damaged a low-power consumption mode when the or require replacement (for example, the 12V displayed charge level drops to approximately battery). In these cases, you are responsible 0%. In this mode, the Battery stops supporting for repair and/or transporting expenses. the onboard electronics and auxiliary 12V Discharge-related expenses are not covered battery. Once this low-power consumption by the warranty or under the Roadside mode is active, immediately plug in Model X to Assistance policy. prevent a jump-start and 12V battery The peak charging rate of the Battery may replacement. decrease slightly after a large number of DC Note: If the vehicle is unresponsive and will Fast Charging sessions, such as those at not unlock, open, or charge, then the 12V Superchargers. To ensure maximum driving battery may have become discharged. In this range and Battery safety, the Battery charge situation, contact Tesla. rate is decreased when the Battery is too cold, when the Battery‡s charge is nearly full, and Temperature Limits when the Battery conditions change with For better long-term performance, avoid usage and age. These changes in the condition exposing Model X to ambient temperatures of the Battery are driven by battery physics above 140° F (60° C) or below -22° F (-30° C) and may increase the total Supercharging for more than 24 hours at a time. duration by a few minutes over time. Energy Saving Feature Model X has an energy-saving feature that reduces the amount of energy being consumed by the displays when Model X is not in use. On newer vehicles, this feature is automated to provide an optimal level of energy saving. However, on older vehicles, you can control the amount of energy being consumed by the displays by touching Controls > Display > Energy Saving. For more information on maximizing range and saving energy, see Getting Maximum Range on page 80. Charging 173

Battery Information Battery Warnings and Cautions Warning: The Battery has no parts that an owner or a non-Tesla authorized service technician can service. Under no circumstances should you open or tamper with the Battery. Always contact Tesla to arrange for Battery servicing. Caution: If the Battery‡s charge level falls to 0%, you must plug it in. If you leave it unplugged for an extended period, it may not be possible to charge or use Model X without jump starting or replacing the 12V battery. Leaving Model X unplugged for an extended period can also result in permanent Battery damage. If you are unable to charge Model X, contact Tesla immediately. Caution: The Battery requires no owner maintenance. Do not remove the coolant filler cap and do not add fluid. If the instrument panel warns you that the fluid level is low, contact Tesla immediately. Caution: Do not use the Battery as a stationary power source. Doing so voids the warranty. 174 Model X Owner's Manual

Charging Instructions Charging Instructions Opening the Charge Port port door, the charge port door closes. If this happens, use the touchscreen to open the The charge port is located on the left side of charge port door again. Model X, behind a door that is part of the rear Caution: Do not try to force the charge tail light assembly. Before charging, park port door open. Model X to ensure that the charge cable easily reaches the charge port. With Model X unlocked (or a recognized key is Plugging In within range) and in Park, press and release If desired, use the touchscreen to change the the button on the Tesla charge cable to open charge limit and the charging current (see the charge port door. Changing Charge Settings on page 177). To charge at a public charging station, attach an adapter to the station‡s charging connector. The most commonly used adapter(s) for each market region are provided. Depending on the charging equipment you are using, you may need to start and stop charging using a control on the charging equipment. If you are using the Mobile Connector, plug it into the power outlet before plugging it into Model X. Align the connector to the charge port and You can also open the charge port door using insert fully. When the connector is properly any of these methods: inserted, charging begins automatically after • On the touchscreen, use the app launcher Model X: to open the Charging app, then touch • Engages a latch that holds the connector Open Charge Port. in place; • On the Model X touchscreen, touch • Shifts into Park (if it was in any other Controls > Charging > Open Charge Port. gear); • Press the charge port door when Model X • Heats or cools the Battery, if needed. If is unlocked or a recognized key is nearby. the Battery requires heating or cooling, • On the key, hold down the rear trunk you may notice a delay before charging button for 1-2 seconds. begins. Note: The following image is provided for Note: Whenever Model X is plugged in but not demonstration purposes only. Depending on actively charging, it draws energy from the market region, your charge port may be wall outlet instead of using energy stored in slightly different. the Battery. For example, if you are sitting in Model X and using the touchscreen while parked and plugged in, Model X draws energy from the wall outlet instead of the Battery. Caution: The connector end of the charge cable can damage the paint if dropped onto the vehicle. During Charging During charging, the charge port light pulses green, and the instrument panel displays the charging status. The frequency at which the charge port light pulses slows down as the charge level approaches full. When charging is Note: The charge port lights up white when complete, the light stops pulsing and is solid you open the charge port door. If you do not green. insert a charge cable into the charge port Note: If Model X is locked, the charge port within a few minutes after opening the charge light does not light up. Charging 175

Charging Instructions If the charge port light turns red while Caution: Tesla strongly recommends charging, a fault is detected. Check the leaving Model X plugged in when not in instrument panel or touchscreen for a use. This maintains the Battery at the message describing the fault. A fault can optimum level of charge. occur due to something as common as a power outage. If a power outage occurs, Manually Releasing Charge Cable charging resumes automatically when power is restored. If the usual methods for releasing a charge Note: When charging, particularly at high cable from the charge port (using the charge currents, the refrigerant compressor and fan handle release button, touchscreen, or mobile operate as needed to keep the Battery cool. app) do not work, carefully follow these steps: Therefore, it is normal to hear sounds during 1. Ensure that Model X is not actively charging. charging by displaying the charging Note: Air conditioning performance is screen on the touchscreen. If necessary, generally not affected by charging. However, touch Stop Charging. under certain circumstances (for example, you 2. Open the rear trunk. are charging at high currents during a 3. Pull the charge port's release cable particularly warm day), the air coming from downwards to unlatch the charge cable. the vents may not be as cool as expected and a message displays on the instrument panel. This is normal behavior and ensures that the Battery stays within an optimum temperature range while charging to support longevity and optimum performance. Warning: Never spray liquid at a high velocity (for example, if using a pressure washer) towards the charge port while charging. Failure to follow these instructions can result in serious injury or damage to the vehicle, charging equipment, or property. Stopping Charging Stop charging at any time by disconnecting the charge cable or touching Stop Charging on the touchscreen. Note: The release cable may be recessed Note: To prevent unauthorized unplugging of within the opening of the trim. the charge cable, the charge cable latch 4. Pull the charge cable from the charge remains locked and Model X must be unlocked port. or able to recognize your key before you can Caution: The release cable is designed for disconnect the charge cable. use only in situations where the charge To disconnect the charge cable: cable cannot be released from the charge 1. Press and hold the button on the port using the usual methods. Continuous connector handle to release the latch. use may result in damage to the release Alternatively, unlock the vehicle by cable or charging equipment. opening a door, using a key fob, or Warning: Do not perform this procedure touching Stop Charging on the while your vehicle is charging or if any touchscreen. These methods unlock the orange high voltage conductors are charge port as well. exposed. Failure to follow these 2. Pull the connector from the charge port. instructions can result in electric shock 3. Push the charge port door closed. and serious injury or damage to the vehicle. If you have any uncertainty as to Note: If Model X is equipped with a motorized how to safely perform this procedure, charge port door, it automatically closes contact your closest Service Center. shortly after you remove the charge cable. 176 Model X Owner's Manual

Charging Instructions Warning: Do not attempt to remove the charge cable at the same exact time as you begin to pull the release cable. Always pull the release cable down and hold it before you begin to remove the charge cable from the charge port. Failure to follow these instructions can result in electric shock and serious injury. Charge Port Light • WHITE: The charge port door is open. Model X is ready to charge and the connector is not inserted, or the charge port latch is unlocked and the connector is Note: If charging at a Tesla Supercharger, and ready to be removed. paid supercharging is potentially in effect, the • BLUE: Model X detects that a connector charging screen also displays information has been plugged in. about your previous or current Supercharger • BLINKING BLUE: Model X is session (see Supercharger Usage Fees and communicating with the connector. Either Idle Fees on page 180). Model X is preparing to charge, or a charging session is scheduled to begin at Note: To reduce congestion at high-usage a specified future time. supercharger sites, you may be automatically • BLINKING GREEN: Charging is in progress. limited to a maximum charge of 80% when As Model X approaches a full charge, the not using Trip Planner (see Trip Information). frequency of the blinking slows. You can manually increase the limit by tapping • SOLID GREEN: Charging is complete. “Set Limit” on the touchscreen or mobile app. • SOLID AMBER: The connector is not fully 1. Charge status messages (such as plugged in. Realign the connector to the Charging Scheduled, Charging) display charge port and insert fully. here. • BLINKING AMBER: Model X is charging at 2. To adjust the charge limit, touch Set Limit, a reduced current (AC charging only). and drag the arrow to change the charge • RED: A fault is detected and charging has limit setting. The setting you choose stopped. Check the instrument panel or applies to immediate and scheduled touchscreen for a fault message. charging sessions. Changing Charge Settings The charging screen displays on the touchscreen whenever the charge port door is open. To display the charging screen at any time: Touch the Apps icon, then touch the charging icon. Note: The following illustration is provided for demonstration purposes only and may vary slightly depending on software version and market region. Charging 177

Charging Instructions 3. The current automatically sets to the • Scheduled Charging: When you set a maximum current available from the scheduled charging time, Model X displays attached charge cable, unless it was the set time to begin charging when you previously reduced to a lower level. If are parked at the scheduled location. If, at needed, touch - or + to change the current the scheduled time, Model X is not (for example, you may want to reduce the plugged in at the location, charging starts current if you are concerned about as soon as you plug it in, provided you overloading a domestic wiring circuit plug it in within six hours of the scheduled shared by other equipment). It is not time. If plugged in after six hours, possible to set the charging current to a charging does not start until the level that exceeds the maximum available scheduled time on the next day. To from the attached charge cable. When override this setting, touch Start Charging you change the current, Model X or Stop Charging. When you set a remembers the location. If you charge at scheduled charging time, Model X displays the same location, you do not need to the set time on the instrument panel and change it again. touchscreen. Note: If Model X automatically reduced • Scheduled Departure: For any location, the current at a charging location because such as Home, you can simply plug in of fluctuations in input power (see the Model X and select a time for when you note in Charging Status on page 179), want your vehicle to be ready to drive. Tesla recommends charging at the lower Once your specified time is set, Model X current until the underlying problem is prepares itself by determining the best resolved and the charging location can time to start charging to optimize energy provide consistent power. costs, battery longevity, and ensure 4. Touch to open the charge port door or to charging is complete in time for your start (or stop) charging. drive. Your vehicle also pre-conditions the 5. Energy level. cabin to a comfortable temperature and wamrs the battery. To set up a scheduled 6. Charging rate per hour, estimated increase departure time, go to Charging > in driving distance (or energy) achieved Scheduled Departure > Schedule and so far in this charging session, current follow the onscreen instructions to supplied/available from the connected customize your schedule. power supply, and voltage supplied by the Scheduled Charging is best used to determine charge cable. when your vehicle should start charging; 7. Location-specific schedule. With Model X Scheduled Departure is best used to in Park, set a specific time to begin determine when charging should complete for charging at the current location (see your drive. Scheduled Charging and Scheduled Departure on page 178). Note: Your vehicle aims to finish charging before 6am (end of off-peak hours). If given Scheduled Charging and Scheduled sufficient time to charge, charging may stop at Departure 6am, even if your scheduled departure is later. If the vehicle does not have enough time to There are two ways in which you can schedule complete charging before 6am, it will continue your vehicle's charging: to charge until it reaches the target battery percentage. Note: If your vehicle is not plugged into a charger, Scheduled departure will not pre- condition the cabin or battery. 178 Model X Owner's Manual

Charging Instructions Charging Status The following illustration is provided for demonstration purposes only and may vary slightly depending on the software version and market region. 1. Charging status information. For example, when Model X is charging, it displays the time remaining until fully charged at the currently selected charge level. When a charging session is scheduled, it displays when charging starts. 2. Total estimated driving distance (or energy) available. To choose between displaying distance or energy percentage, touch Controls > Display > Energy Display. Note: A portion of the battery image may appear blue. This indicates that a small portion of the energy stored in the battery is not available because the battery is cold. This is normal and no reason for concern. When the battery warms up, the blue portion no longer displays. 3. Charging rate per hour. 4. Estimated increase in driving distance (or energy) achieved so far in this charging session. 5. Current supplied/available from the connected power supply (see Changing Charge Settings on page 177). 6. Voltage supplied by the charge cable. Note: If Model X is charging and detects unexpected fluctuations in input power, the charging current is automatically reduced by 25%. For example, a 40 amp current is reduced to 30 amps. This automatic current reduction increases robustness and safety in situations when an external problem exists (for example, a home wiring system, receptacle, adapter or cord is unable to meet its rated current capacity). As a precaution, when Model X automatically reduces current, it saves the reduced current at the charging location. Although you can manually increase it, Tesla recommends charging at the lower current until the underlying problem is resolved and the charging location can provide consistent power. Charging 179

Charging Instructions Supercharger Usage Fees and Idle Fees When charging using a Tesla supercharger, SUPERCHARGING information displays at the bottom of the charging screen. This information includes the location, the time that charging started, and an estimate of how much the session will cost. When you stop supercharging, the estimated cost of that session displays until a new supercharging session begins. If free charging is applicable, the estimated cost displays as zero. Note: Estimated pricing is displayed for your convenience only and may not reflect the actual final price you will be charged for that supercharging session. Final pricing for supercharging sessions can be found in your Tesla Account. When charging at a Tesla supercharger, you are subject to idle fees. Idle fees are designed to encourage drivers to move their vehicle from the Supercharger when charging is complete. Idle fees are in effect only when half of the Superchargers at a site are occupied. The Tesla mobile app notifies you when charging nears completion, and again when charging is complete. Additional notifications are sent if idle fees are incurred. Idle fees are waived if you move your vehicle within five minutes of charging completion. Log into your Tesla Account to view fees and details about Supercharger sessions, track the remaining balance of free credits, set up a payment method, and make payments. Once a payment method is saved, fees are automatically paid from your account. 180 Model X Owner's Manual

Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Maintenance Schedule Service Intervals • Look around the exterior of Model X and immediately remove any corrosive Your vehicle should generally be serviced on substances (such as bird droppings, tree an as-needed basis. However, Tesla resin, tar spots, dead insects, industrial recommends the following maintenance items fallout, etc.) to prevent damage to the and intervals, as applicable to your vehicle, to paint (see Cleaning on page 190). ensure continued reliability and efficiency of your Model X. Monthly Checks • Brake fluid health check every 2 years (replace if necessary) or, if the vehicle is • Check windshield washer fluid level and used for towing, replace the brake fluid top up if necessary (see Topping Up every 2 years Windshield Washer Fluid on page 195). • A/C desiccant bag replacement every 4 • Check that the air conditioning system is years operating correctly (see Climate Controls • Cabin air filter replacement every 2 years on page 140). • HEPA filter replacement every 3 years Warning: Contact Tesla immediately if you • Clean and lubricate brake calipers every notice any significant or sudden drop in year or 12,500 miles (if in an area where fluid levels or uneven tire wear. roads are salted during the Winter) Note: The above intervals are based on normal Fluid Replacement Intervals driving behaviors and scenarios. Additionally, Your Battery coolant does not need to be the above list should not be considered replaced for the life of your vehicle under comprehensive and does not include most circumstances. Brake fluid should be consumable parts such as windshield wipers, checked every 2 years, replacing if necessary*. brake pads, etc. Note: Damages or failures caused by *If the vehicle is used for towing, the brake maintenance or repairs performed by non- fluid should be replaced every 2 years Tesla certified technicians are not covered by regardless of the health check. the warranty. Note: Any damage caused by opening the Battery coolant reservoir is excluded from the Daily Checks warranty. • Check the Battery‡s charge level, High Voltage Safety displayed on the instrument panel or mobile app. Your Model X has been designed and built • Check the condition and pressure of each with safety as a priority. However, be aware of tire (see Tire Care and Maintenance on these precautions to protect yourself from the page 183). risk of injury inherent in all high-voltage • Check that all exterior lights, horn, turn systems: signals, and wipers and washers are • Read and follow all instructions provided working. on the labels that are attached to Model X. • Check for any unexpected indicator lights These labels are there for your safety. or vehicle alerts on the touchscreen or • The high voltage system has no user- instrument panel. serviceable parts. Do not disassemble, • Check the operation of the brakes, remove or replace high voltage including the parking brake. components, cables or connectors. High • Check the operation of the seat belts voltage cables are colored orange for easy (see Seat Belts on page 29). identification. • Look for abnormal fluid deposits • If a collision occurs, do not touch any high underneath Model X that might indicate a voltage wiring, connectors, or leak. It is normal for a small pool of water components connected to the wiring. to form (caused by the air conditioning • In the unlikely event that a fire occurs, system‡s dehumidifying process). immediately contact your local fire emergency responders. Warning: Always disconnect the charge cable before working underneath Maintenance 181

Maintenance Schedule Model X, even if charging is not in progress. Warning: Keep your hands and clothing away from cooling fans. Some fans operate even when Model X is powered off. Warning: Some fluids (battery acid, Battery coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer additives, etc.) used in vehicles are poisonous and should not be inhaled, swallowed, or brought into contact with open wounds. For your safety, always read and follow instructions printed on fluid containers. 182 Model X Owner's Manual

Tire Care and Maintenance Tire Care and Maintenance Maintaining Tire Pressures Warning: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and can If you are not towing a trailer, keep tires cause a tire to overheat, resulting in inflated to the pressures shown on the Tire severe tire cracking, tread separation, or and Loading Information label, even if it differs blowout, which causes unexpected loss of from the pressure printed on the tire itself. The vehicle control and increased risk of Tire and Loading Information label is located injury. Under-inflation also reduces the on the center door pillar and is visible when vehicle's range and tire tread life. the front door is open. Warning: Check tire pressures using an If you are towing a trailer, do not use the tire accurate pressure gauge when tires are pressures printed on the Tire and Loading cold. It takes only about one mile (1.6 km) Information Label. Instead, refer to the tire of driving to warm up the tires sufficiently pressures published in the towing topic (see to affect tire pressures. Parking the Towing and Accessories on page 86). vehicle in direct sunlight or in hot weather can also affect tire pressures. If you must check warm tires, expect increased pressures. Do not let air out of warm tires in an attempt to match recommended cold tire pressures. A hot tire at or below the recommended cold tire inflation pressure is dangerously under-inflated. Warning: Do not use any tire sealant other than the type provided in a Tesla tire repair kit. Other types can cause tire pressure sensors to malfunction. If your Model X did not include a tire repair kit, you can purchase one from Tesla. The Tire Pressure indicator light on the instrument panel alerts you if one or more tires is under- or over- inflated. The Tire Pressure indicator light does not immediately turn off when you adjust tire pressure. After inflating the tire to the recommended pressure, you must drive over 15 mph (25 km/h) for more than 10 minutes to activate the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), which turns off the Tire Pressure indicator light. If the indicator light flashes for one minute whenever you power on Model X, a fault with the TPMS is detected (see TPMS Malfunction on page 188). You can display tire pressures on the instrument panel by choosing to display Car Status using the right or left steering wheel buttons (see Using Left Steering Wheel Buttons on page 49 or Using Right Steering Wheel Buttons on page 50). You can also choose whether you want to display tire pressures using BAR or PSI by touching Controls > Display > Tire Pressure. Maintenance 183

Tire Care and Maintenance Checking and Adjusting Tire Pressures Inspecting and Maintaining Tires Follow these steps when tires are cold and Regularly inspect the tread and side walls for Model X has been stationary for over three any sign of distortion (bulges), foreign objects, hours: cuts or wear. 1. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Warning: Do not drive Model X if a tire is label located on the driver‡s center door damaged, excessively worn, or inflated to pillar for the target tire pressure. an incorrect pressure. Check tires 2. Remove the valve cap. regularly for wear, and ensure there are 3. Firmly press an accurate tire pressure no cuts, bulges or exposure of the ply/ gauge onto the valve to measure pressure. cord structure. 4. If required, add or remove air to reach the recommended pressure. Tire Wear Note: You can release air by pressing the Adequate tread depth is important for proper metal stem in the center of the valve. tire performance. Tires with a tread depth less 5. Re-check pressure using the accurate tire than 4/32” (3 mm) are more likely to gauge. hydroplane in wet conditions and should not 6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary until be used. Tires with a tread depth less than the tire pressure is correct. 5/32” (4 mm) do not perform well in snow and 7. Reinstall the valve cap to prevent dirt from slush and should not be used when driving in entering. Periodically check the valve for winter conditions. damage and leaks. Model X is originally fitted with tires that have wear indicators molded into the tread pattern. When the tread has been worn down to 4/32” (3 mm), the indicators start to appear at the surface of the tread pattern, producing the effect of a continuous band of rubber across the width of the tire. For optimal performance and safety, Tesla recommends replacing tires before the wear indicators are visible. Tire Rotation, Balance, and Wheel Alignment Model X tires cannot be rotated, as tires are asymmetrical and front tires are a different size from rear tires. Unbalanced wheels (sometimes noticeable as vibration through the steering wheel) affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required. If tire wear is uneven (on one side of the tire only) or becomes abnormally excessive, check the alignment of wheels. Note: When replacing only two tires, always install the new tires on the rear. 184 Model X Owner's Manual

Tire Care and Maintenance Punctured Tires Replacing Tires and Wheels A puncture eventually causes the tire to lose Tires degrade over time due to the effects of pressure, which is why it is important to check ultraviolet light, extreme temperatures, high tire pressures frequently. Permanently repair loads, and environmental conditions. It is or replace punctured or damaged tires as recommended that tires are replaced every six soon as possible. years, or sooner if required. Your tubeless tires may not leak when Wheel and tires are matched to suit the penetrated, provided the object remains in the handling characteristics of the vehicle. tire. If, however, you feel a sudden vibration or Replacement tires must comply with the ride disturbance while driving, or you suspect original specification. If tires other than those a tire is damaged, immediately reduce your specified are used, ensure that the load and speed. Drive slowly, while avoiding heavy speed ratings marked on the tire (see braking or sharp steering and, when safe to do Understanding Tire Markings on page 208) so, stop the vehicle. Arrange to have Model X equal or exceed those of the original transported to a Tesla Service Center, or to a specification. nearby tire repair center. Note: In some cases, you can temporarily Ideally, you should replace all four tires at the repair small tire punctures (under 1/4” (6 same time. If this is not possible, replace the mm)) using an optional tire repair kit available tires in pairs, placing the new tires on the rear. from Tesla. This allows you to slowly drive Always balance the wheel after replacing a Model X to Tesla or to a nearby tire repair tire. facility. If you replace a wheel, the TPMS (Tire Pressure Warning: Do not drive with a punctured Monitoring System) sensors need to be reset tire, even if the puncture has not caused to ensure they provide accurate warnings the tire to deflate. A punctured tire can when tires are under- or over-inflated (see deflate suddenly at any time. Automatic Reset of TPMS Sensors on page 187). Flat Spots For the specification of the original wheels and tires installed on Model X, see Wheels and If Model X is stationary for a long period in Tires on page 206. high temperatures, tires can form flat spots. Warning: For your safety, use only tires When Model X is driven, these flat spots cause and wheels that match the original a vibration which gradually disappears as the specification. Tires that do not match the tires warm up and regain their original shape. original specification can affect the To minimize flat spots during storage, inflate operation of the TPMS. tires to the maximum pressure indicated on Warning: Never exceed the speed rating the tire wall. Then, before driving, release air of your vehicle's tires. The speed rating is to adjust tire pressure to the recommended shown on the sidewall of your tires (see levels. Understanding Tire Markings on page Improving Tire Mileage 208). To improve the mileage you get from your Asymmetric Tires tires, maintain tires at the recommended tire Model X tires are asymmetric and must be pressures, observe speed limits and advisory mounted on the wheel with the correct speeds, and avoid: sidewall facing outward. The sidewall of the • Pulling away quickly, or hard acceleration. tire is marked with the word OUTSIDE. When • Fast turns and heavy braking. new tires are installed, make sure that the tires • Potholes and objects in the road. are correctly mounted on the wheels. • Hitting curbs when parking. • Contaminating tires with fluids that can cause damage. Maintenance 185

Tire Care and Maintenance Warning: Road holding is seriously Removing and Installing Lug Nut Covers impaired if the tires are incorrectly If your Model X is equipped with lug nut installed on the wheels. covers, you must remove them to access the lug nuts. To remove a lug nut cover: 1. Insert the curved part of the lug nut cover tool (located in your glovebox) into the hole at the base of the Tesla "T". 2. Maneuver the lug nut cover tool so that it is fully inserted into the hole in the lug nut cover. 3. Twist the lug nut cover tool so that the curved part is touching the middle of the lug nut cover. 4. Firmly pull the lug nut tool away from the wheel until the lug nut cover is released. To install the lug nut cover: 1. Align the lug nut cover into position. 2. Push firmly on the lug nut cover until it fully snaps into place. 186 Model X Owner's Manual

Tire Care and Maintenance Wheel Configuration As an added safety feature, your vehicle has If you are installing new wheels or swapping been equipped with a TPMS that displays a them for different ones, update your vehicle's tire pressure telltale (Tire Pressure Warning) wheel configuration by touching Controls > on the instrument panel when one or more of Service > Wheel Configuration. This allows your tires is significantly under- or over- Model X to learn the new wheels and provide inflated. Accordingly, when the Tire Pressure more accurate status updates on your vehicle. indicator light displays on the instrument Select a wheel from the drop down menu that panel to alert you about tire pressure, stop matches the new wheels you plan to install on and check your tires as soon as possible, and Model X. Selecting new wheels in the wheel inflate them to the proper pressure (see configuration also changes the wheels that Maintaining Tire Pressures on page 183). appear on your vehicle's avatar on the Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire touchscreen. causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces range Ensure you are aware if your vehicle is efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect equipped with staggered wheels, meaning the the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. wheels are different sizes in the front and rear. Check the front and rear tire sizes marked on If Model X detects a fault with the the tire sidewall to see if they match or are TPMS, this indicator flashes for one different sizes. If the wheels are staggered, minute whenever you power on take extra precaution to ensure the new Model X. wheels you install are staggered in the same way as the previous wheels. Note: Installing accessories that are not Note: Changing your vehicle's wheel approved by Tesla can interfere with the configuration can impact range estimates, tire TPMS. pressure warning levels, and vehicle Warning: The TPMS is not a substitute for visualization. proper tire maintenance, including Warning: Only use Tesla-approved wheels manually checking tire pressures and when installing or swapping wheels. Using regularly inspecting the condition of tires. non Tesla-approved wheels can cause It is the driver's responsibility to maintain serious damage. Tesla is not liable for correct tire pressure, even if under- or damage caused by using wheels not over-inflation has not reached the level approved by Tesla. for the TPMS to trigger the Tire Pressure Warning on the instrument panel. Tire Pressure Monitoring Automatic Reset of TPMS Sensors Each tire should be checked monthly when After replacing one or more wheels (but not cold and inflated to the recommended after replacing a tire or rotating wheels), the pressures that are printed on the Tire and TPMS sensors are reset to ensure tire pressure Loading Information label located on the warnings are accurate. TPMS sensors reset driver‡s door pillar (see Maintaining Tire automatically after driving over 15 mph Pressures on page 183). If your vehicle has (25 km/h) for longer than 10 minutes. tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure Note: After replacing a wheel, false tire label, determine the proper tire inflation pressure warnings may display before you've pressure for those tires. driven 15 mph (25 km/h) for longer than 10 minutes. Replacing a Tire Sensor If the Tire Pressure warning indicator displays frequently, contact Tesla to determine if a tire sensor needs to be replaced. If a non-Tesla Service Center repairs or replaces a tire, the tire sensor may not work until Tesla performs the setup procedure. Maintenance 187

Tire Care and Maintenance TPMS Malfunction Seasonal Tire Types Model X has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the Summer Tires system is not operating properly. Your Model X may be originally equipped with The TPMS malfunction indicator is high performance summer tires, all season combined with the tire pressure tires, or winter tires. Summer tires and all indicator light. When the system season tires are designed for maximum dry detects a malfunction, the indicator and wet road performance but are not flashes for approximately one minute designed to perform well in winter conditions. after Model X powers on, and then Tesla recommends using winter tires if driving remains continuously lit. This in cold temperatures or on roads where snow sequence continues upon or ice may be present. If not equipped with subsequent vehicle start-ups as long winter tires, contact Tesla for winter tire as the malfunction exists. When the recommendations. TPMS malfunction indicator is on, Warning: In cold temperatures or on snow the system might not be able to or ice, summer tires do not provide detect or signal under- and over- adequate traction. Selecting and installing inflated tires as intended. the appropriate tires for winter conditions is important to ensure the safety and TPMS malfunctions can occur for a variety of optimum performance of your Model X. reasons, including installing replacement or All-Season Tires alternate tires or wheels that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check Your Model X may be originally equipped with the TPMS malfunction indicator light after all-season tires. These tires are designed to replacing one or more tires or wheels on your provide adequate traction in most conditions vehicle to ensure that the replacement tires or year-round, but may not provide the same wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function level of traction as winter tires in snowy or icy properly. conditions. All-season tires can be identified Note: If a tire has been replaced or repaired by “ALL SEASON" and/or "M+S” (mud and using a different tire sealant than the one snow) on the tire sidewall. available from Tesla, and a low tire pressure is detected, it is possible that the tire sensor has Winter Tires been damaged. Contact Tesla to have the fault Use winter tires to increase traction in snowy repaired as soon as possible. or icy conditions. When installing winter tires, always install a complete set of four tires at the same time. Winter tires must be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels. Contact Tesla for winter tire recommendations. Winter tires can be identified by a mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire's sidewall. When driving with winter tires, you may experience more road noise, shorter tread life, and less traction on dry roads. 188 Model X Owner's Manual

Tire Care and Maintenance Driving in Low Temperatures Caution: Do not use chains on a Model X equipped with 22" tires and do not use Tire performance is reduced in low ambient tire chains on front tires. temperatures, resulting in reduced grip and an Caution: Never deflate your tires to put on increased susceptibility to damage from tire chains. When re-inflated, the chains impacts. Performance tires can temporarily might fit too tightly and cause tire harden when cold, causing you to hear damage. rotational noise for the first few miles (kilometers) until the tires warm up. Caution: Ensure that the tire chains cannot touch suspension components or Using Tire Chains brake lines. If you hear the chains making unusual noises that would indicate Tesla has tested and approved Maggie Group contact with Model X, stop and Trak Special LT51 tire chains to increase investigate immediately. traction in snowy conditions. These chains should only be installed on rear 19 or 20" tires. Do not use chains on 22" tires or on front tires. The approved tire chains can be purchased from Tesla. When installing tire chains, follow the instructions and warnings provided by the tire chain manufacturer. Mount them evenly and as tight as possible. When using tire chains: • Inspect the tire chains for loose fittings and damaged links before each use. • Ensure air suspension is set to STANDARD and Suspension Lowering is set to NEVER for vehicles equipped with air suspension (see Air Suspension on page 157). • Avoid heavily loading Model X (heavy loads can reduce the clearance between the tires and the body). • Do not drive the vehicle without the chains properly installed. • Drive slowly. Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). • Remove the tire chains as soon as conditions allow. Note: Tire chains are prohibited in some jurisdictions. Check local laws before installing tire chains. Caution: Vehicles equipped with air suspension should remain in the STANDARD ride height setting to avoid damage. Caution: Using non-recommended tire chains, or using tire chains on other sized tires can damage the suspension, body, wheels, and/or brake lines. Damage caused by using non-recommended tire chains, or incorrectly installing tire chains, is not covered by the warranty. Maintenance 189

Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning the Exterior Cautions for Exterior Cleaning To prevent damage to the paint, immediately Caution: Do not use windshield treatment remove corrosive substances (bird droppings, fluids. Doing so can interfere with wiper tree resin, dead insects, tar spots, road salt, friction and cause a chattering sound. industrial fallout, etc.). Do not wait until Caution: Do not use hot water or Model X is due for a complete wash. If detergents. necessary, use denatured alcohol to remove Caution: Do not wash in direct sunlight. tar spots and stubborn grease stains, then immediately wash the area with water and a Caution: If using a pressure washer, mild, non-detergent soap to remove the maintain a distance of at least 12" (30 cm) alcohol. between the nozzle and the surface of Follow these steps when washing the exterior Model X. Keep the nozzle moving and do of Model X: not concentrate the water jet on any one 1. Rinse Thoroughly area. Before washing, flush grime and grit from Caution: Do not aim water hoses directly the vehicle using a hose. Flush away at window, door, or hood seals. accumulations of mud in areas where Caution: Do not aim water hoses at debris easily collects (such as wheel wells electronic modules or exposed cabling. and panel seams). If salt has been used on Caution: To avoid corrosive damage that the highways (such as during winter may not be covered by the warranty, rinse months), thoroughly rinse all traces of away any road salt from the underside of road salt from the underside of the the vehicle, wheel wells, and brakes. After vehicle, wheel wells, and brakes. cleaning the vehicle, dry the brakes by 2. Hand Wash going on a short drive and applying the Hand wash Model X using a clean soft brakes multiple times. cloth and cold or lukewarm water Caution: Avoid using tight-napped or containing a mild, high-quality car rough cloths, such as washing mitts. shampoo. 3. Rinse with Clean Water Caution: If washing in an automatic car wash, use Touchless car washes only. After washing, rinse with clean water to These car washes have no parts (brushes, prevent soap from drying on the surfaces. etc.) that touch the surfaces of Model X. 4. Dry Thoroughly and Clean Exterior Glass Using any other type of car wash could After washing and rinsing, dry thoroughly cause damage that is not covered by the with a chamois. If necessary, dry the warranty. brakes by going on a short drive and Caution: Ensure the wipers are off before applying the brakes multiple times. washing Model X to avoid the risk of Clean windows and mirrors using an damaging the wipers. automotive glass cleaner. Do not scrape, Caution: Do not use chemical based or use any abrasive cleaning fluid on glass wheel cleaners. These can damage the or mirrored surfaces. finish on the wheels. Caution: Avoid using a high pressure power washer on the camera(s) or parking sensors (if equipped) and do not clean a sensor or camera lens with a sharp or abrasive object that can scratch or damage its surface. Warning: Never spray liquid at a high velocity (for example, if using a pressure washer) towards the charge port while Model X is charging. Failure to follow these instructions can result in serious injury or damage to the vehicle, charging equipment, or property. 190 Model X Owner's Manual

Cleaning Cleaning the Interior Carpets Frequently inspect and clean the interior to Avoid over-wetting carpets. For heavily soiled maintain its appearance and to prevent areas, use a diluted upholstery cleaner. premature wear. If possible, immediately wipe up spills and remove marks. For general Seat Belts cleaning, wipe interior surfaces using a soft Extend the belts to wipe. Do not use any type cloth (such as microfiber) dampened with a of detergent or chemical cleaning agent. mixture of warm water and mild non- Allow the belts to dry naturally while detergent cleaner (test all cleaners on a extended, preferably away from direct concealed area before use). To avoid streaks, sunlight. dry immediately with a soft lint-free cloth. Interior Glass Touchscreen and Instrument Panel Do not scrape, or use any abrasive cleaning Clean the touchscreen and instrument panel fluid on glass or mirrored surfaces. This can using a soft lint-free cloth specifically damage the reflective surface of the mirror designed to clean monitors and displays. Do and the heating elements in the rear window. not use cleaners (such as a glass cleaner) and do not use a wet wipe or a dry statically- charged cloth (such as a recently washed Airbags microfiber). To wipe the touchscreen without Do not allow any substance to enter an airbag activating buttons and changing settings, you cover. This could affect correct operation. can enable Screen Clean Mode. Touch Controls > Display > Screen Clean Mode. The Dashboard and Plastic Surfaces display darkens to make it easy to see dust and smudges. To exit Screen Clean Mode, Do not polish the upper surfaces of the press and hold HOLD TO EXIT. dashboard. Polished surfaces are reflective and could interfere with your driving view. Chrome and Metal Surfaces Leather Seats Polish, abrasive cleaners or hard cloths can damage the finish on chrome and metal Leather is prone to dye-transfer which can surfaces. cause discoloration, particularly on light colored leather. White and tan leather is Cautions for Interior Cleaning coated with an anti-soiling treatment. Wipe Caution: Using solvents (including spills as soon as possible using a soft cloth alcohol), bleach, citrus, naphtha, or moistened with warm water and non- silicone-based products or additives on detergent soap. Wipe gently in a circular interior components can cause damage. motion. Then wipe dry using a soft, lint-free cloth. Using detergents or commercially Caution: Statically-charged materials can available leather cleaners and conditioners is cause damage to the touchscreen or not recommended because they can discolor instrument panel. or dry out the leather. Warning: If you notice any damage on an Polyurethane Seats airbag or seat belt, contact Tesla immediately. Wipe spills as soon as possible using a soft Warning: Do not allow any water, cloth moistened with warm water and non- cleaners, or fabric to enter a seat belt detergent soap. Wipe gently in a circular mechanism. motion. After cleaning, allow the seats to air dry. Warning: Exposure to chemical cleaners can be hazardous and can irritate eyes Cloth Seats and skin. Read and observe the Wipe spills as soon as possible using a soft instructions provided by the manufacturer cloth moistened with warm water and non- of the chemical cleaner. detergent soap. Wipe gently in a circular motion. Then wipe dry using a soft, lint-free cloth. Vacuum the seats as needed to remove any loose dirt. Maintenance 191

Cleaning Polishing, Touch Up, and Body Floor Mats Repair To extend the life of your carpet and make To preserve the cosmetic appearance of the them easier to clean, use genuine Tesla floor body, you can occasionally treat the paint mats (see Parts and Accessories on page surfaces with an approved polish containing: 197). Maintain floor mats by regularly cleaning them and checking that they are properly • Very mild abrasive to remove surface attached. Replace floor mats if they become contamination without removing or excessively worn. damaging the paint. Warning: To avoid potential interference • Filling compounds that fill scratches and with a foot pedal, ensure that the driver‡s reduce their visibility. floor mat is securely fastened, and never • Wax to provide a protective coating place an additional floor mat on top of it. between the paint and environmental Floor mats should always rest on top of elements. the vehicle carpeting surface and not on Regularly inspect the exterior paint for another floor mat or other covering. damage. Treat minor chips and scratches using a paint touch-up pen (available for purchase from Tesla). Use the touch-up pen after washing but before polishing or waxing. Repair rock chips, fractures or scratches. Body repairs should be performed only by a Tesla approved body shop. Contact Tesla for a list of approved body shops. Caution: Do not use cutting pastes, color restoration compounds, or polishes containing harsh abrasives. These can scour the surface and permanently damage the paint. Caution: Do not use chrome polish or other abrasive cleaners. Using a Car Cover To preserve the cosmetic appearance of the body when Model X is not being used, use a genuine Tesla car cover. Car covers can be purchased from Tesla. See Parts and Accessories on page 197. Caution: Use only a Tesla-approved car cover when Model X is plugged in. Using a non-Tesla car cover can prevent the Battery from being adequately cooled during charging. 192 Model X Owner's Manual

Wiper Blades and Washer Jets Wiper Blades and Washer Jets Checking and Cleaning Wiper Blades Periodically clean the edge of the wiper blades and check the rubber for cracks, splits, and roughness. If damaged, contact Tesla Service to have the blades replaced. Contaminants on the windshield, or on the wiper blades, can reduce the effectiveness of the wipers. Contaminants include ice, wax spray from car washes, washer fluid with bug and/or water repellent, bird droppings, tree sap, and other organic substances. Follow these guidelines for cleaning: • Clean the windshield and wiper blades using washer fluid, isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol, or non-abrasive glass cleaner approved for use on automotive glass and rubber. Inappropriate products can cause damage or smears, and create glare on the windshield. • Lift the wiper arm a short distance away from the windshield, just far enough to access the wiper blade. Do not lift a wiper arm beyond its intended position. If the wipers remain ineffective after cleaning, the wipers may need to be replaced. The wiper washing system is an integrated part of the wiper blades and therefore it is not possible to replace just the wiper blades. For wiper replacement, contact Tesla Service. Maintenance 193

Fluid Reservoirs Fluid Reservoirs Removing the Maintenance Panel Checking Brake Fluid To check fluid levels, remove the maintenance Warning: Contact Tesla immediately if you panel: notice increased movement of the brake 1. Open the hood. pedal or a significant loss of brake fluid. 2. Pull the maintenance panel upward to Driving under these conditions can result release the clips that hold it in place. in extended stopping distances or complete brake failure. A red brake indicator on the instrument panel alerts you if the quantity of fluid in the brake reservoir drops below the recommended level. If it displays while driving, stop as soon as safety permits by gently applying the brakes. Do not continue driving. Contact Tesla immediately. Fluid Level Check Caution: The maintenance panel protects Tesla checks the brake fluid level and health at the front trunk from water. When re- the regularly scheduled maintenance intervals. attaching, make sure it is fully seated. Topping Up the Brake Fluid Checking Battery Coolant Do not top up your brake fluid. The following Your Battery coolant should not need to be instructions are provided for information replaced for the life of your vehicle under purposes and future reference only: most circumstances. However, if the quantity 1. Clean the filler cap before removing it to of fluid in the cooling system drops below the prevent dirt from entering the reservoir. recommended level, the instrument panel 2. Unscrew the cap and remove it. displays a warning message. Stop driving 3. Top up the reservoir to the MAX mark Model X as soon as safety permits and contact using the appropriate brake fluid. Tesla. 4. Replace the filler cap, ensuring it is fully Fluid Level Check secured. DO NOT REMOVE THE FILLER CAP AND DO Warning: Only use new fluid from a sealed NOT ADD FLUID. Doing so can result in air-tight container. Never use previously damage not covered by the warranty. used fluid or fluid from a previously opened container—fluid absorbs moisture Do Not Top Up Battery Coolant which decreases braking performance. Warning: Battery coolant can be Warning: Brake fluid is highly toxic. Keep hazardous and can irritate eyes and skin. containers sealed and out of the reach of Under no circumstances should you children. In the event of accidental remove the filler cap and/or add coolant. consumption, seek medical attention If the instrument panel warns you that the immediately. fluid level is low, contact Tesla Caution: Brake fluid damages painted immediately. surfaces. Immediately soak up any spills To maximize the performance and life of the with an absorbent cloth and wash the Battery, the cooling system uses a specific area with a mixture of car shampoo and mixture of G-48 ethylene-glycol coolant water. (HOAT). Contact Tesla for more specific information about the coolant. 194 Model X Owner's Manual

Fluid Reservoirs Topping Up Windshield Washer Warning: Windshield washer fluid can Fluid irritate eyes and skin. Read and observe the instructions provided by the washer The only reservoir into which you can add fluid fluid manufacturer. is the windshield washer fluid reservoir, which is located behind the front trunk. When the level is low, a message displays on the instrument panel. To top up the washer fluid: 1. Open the hood. 2. Clean around the filler cap before opening it to prevent dirt from entering the reservoir. 3. Open the filler cap. 4. While avoiding spilling, fill the reservoir until the fluid level is visible just below the filler neck. 5. Wipe up any spills immediately and wash the affected area with water. 6. Replace the filler cap. Note: Some national or local regulations restrict the use of Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs). VOCs are commonly used as antifreeze in washer fluid. Use a washer fluid with limited VOC content only if it provides adequate freeze resistance for all climates in which you drive Model X. Caution: Do not add formulated washer fluids that contain water repellent or bug wash. These fluids can cause streaking, smearing, and squeaking or other noises. Warning: In temperatures below 40° F (4° C), use a washer fluid with antifreeze. In cold weather, using a washer fluid without antifreeze can impair visibility through the windshield. Maintenance 195

Jacking and Lifting Jacking and Lifting Jacking Procedure attempt to self-level, causing serious damage, bodily injury, or death. Follow the steps below to lift Model X. Ensure Warning: Never raise Model X when the that any non-Tesla repair facility is aware of charge cable is connected, even if these lifting points. charging is not in progress. 1. Position Model X centrally between the lift Warning: Do not work on an incorrectly posts. supported vehicle. Doing so can cause 2. If your Model X is equipped with air serious damage, bodily injury, or death. suspension, it automatically self-levels, even when power is off. Use the Caution: DO NOT lift from under the touchscreen to set the suspension as Battery. Place the lift arm pads under the follows: designated body lift points only. The • Touch Controls > Suspension. locations shown are the only approved • Press the brake pedal, then touch Very lifting points for Model X. Lifting at any High to maximize the height of the other points can cause damage. Damage suspension. caused by incorrectly lifting Model X is not covered by the warranty. • Touch Jack to disable self-leveling. 3. Close the falcon wing doors. 4. Position the lift arm pads under the designated body lift points at the locations shown. Warning: DO NOT position the lift arm pads under the Battery. 5. Adjust the height and position of the lift arm pads to ensure that they are correctly located. 6. With assistance, raise the lift to the desired height, ensuring the lift arm pads remain in their correct positions. 7. Engage any lift safety locks. Follow the lift manufacturer's instructions. Note: Jack mode cancels when Model X is driven over 4 mph (7 km/h). Note: Jack mode may be unexpectedly enabled in situations where an object is supporting the vehicle's weight (for example the bumper of the vehicle is resting on a curb). Warning: If your Model X is equipped with air suspension, it automatically self-levels, even when power is off. You MUST disable this system by engaging Jack mode before lifting or jacking. If you do not disable air suspenion, Model X can 196 Model X Owner's Manual

Parts and Accessories Parts and Accessories Parts, Accessories, and Body Repairs Modifications If your Model X is in a collision, contact Tesla Use only genuine Tesla parts and accessories. or a Tesla-approved Body Shop to ensure that Tesla performs rigorous testing on parts to it is repaired with genuine Tesla parts. Tesla ensure their suitability, safety, and reliability. has selected and approved body shops that Purchase these parts from Tesla, where they meet strict requirements for training, are professionally installed and where you can equipment, quality, and customer satisfaction. receive expert advice about modifications to Some repair shops and insurance companies Model X. Accessories are available for might suggest using non-original equipment purchase from Tesla stores or online at or salvaged parts to save money. However, www.tesla.com. these parts do not meet Tesla's high standards Note: Some accessories may not be available for quality, fit and corrosion resistance. In in your market region. addition, non-original equipment and salvaged parts (and any damage or failures they might Tesla is unable to assess parts manufactured cause) are not covered by the warranty. by other distributors and therefore accepts no responsibility if you use non-Tesla parts on Using RFID Transponders Model X. Warning: Installing non-approved parts When attaching an RFID transponder (used by and accessories, or performing non- many automated toll systems) inside Model X, approved modifications, can affect the place the transponder in the topmost area of performance of Model X and the safety of the windshield as shown. This ensures best its occupants. Any damage caused by results and minimizes any obstruction to your using or installing non-approved parts, or driving view. by performing non-approved Note: You can also attach a weather-proof modifications, is not covered by the transponder to the front license plate. warranty. Warning: Tesla does not accept liability for death, personal injury or damage that occurs if you use or install non-approved accessories or make non-approved modifications. Maintenance 197

Identification Labels Specifications Identification Labels Vehicle Identification Number • Stamped on the chassis under the sill panel on the rear passenger door. To You can find the VIN at the following remove the sill panel, gently pry it upward locations: using a flat-bladed tool. • Touch the Tesla "T" at the top center of Note: The VIN was not stamped on the the touchscreen. The popup window chassis on vehicles manufactured between displays the VIN. approximately June 2, 2016 and Feb 28, • Stamped on a plate located at the top of 2017. the dashboard. Can be seen by looking Caution: Removing the sill panel to through the windshield. view the VIN is not recommended • Printed on the Vehicle Certification label, because damage is likely to occur. located on the door pillar. Can be seen The panel is held in place with fragile when the driver‡s door is open. clips that break easily. Damage caused by removing the sill panel is not covered by the warranty. Emission Control Label The emission control label is located on the opening face of the liftgate. 198 Model X Owner's Manual

Vehicle Loading Vehicle Loading Load Capacity Labeling Towing Label It is important to understand how much If equipped with the towing package, the weight your Model X can safely carry. This Towing Label instructs you to refer to this weight is called the vehicle capacity weight owner's manual for tire pressures that should and includes the weight of all occupants, be used when towing a trailer. Do not use the cargo and any additional equipment added to tire pressures printed on the Tire and Loading your Model X since it was manufactured. Information Label. One or more labels attached to the center door pillar indicate how much weight Model X can safely carry. Labels are visible when the front door is open. Note: Towing capability is available only if Model X is equipped with the Towing Package. Tire pressure information, along with other information related to towing, is located in the topic "Towing a Trailer" in the Driving section of the onscreen owners manual. Tire and Loading Information Label The Tire and Loading Information label provides: • The maximum number of occupant seating positions. 1. Towing label (if equipped) • The maximum vehicle capacity weight. 2. Tire and Loading Information label • The size of the original tires. 3. Vehicle Certification label • The cold inflation pressures for the original front and rear tires. These Note: Towing capability is available only if pressures are recommended to optimize Model X is equipped with the Towing Package. ride and handling characteristics. Warning: Overloading Model X has an adverse effect on braking and handling, which can compromise your safety or cause damage. Caution: Never load more than 175 lbs (80 kg) on the rear load floor (above the lower trunk compartment) or more than 285 lbs (130 kg) in the lower trunk Never change this label, even if you use compartment. Doing so can cause different tires in the future. damage. Caution: Never load more than 300 lbs Note: If Model X is loaded to its full capacity, (136 kg) in the front trunk. Doing so can double check all tires to ensure they are cause damage. inflated to their recommended pressure levels. Caution: Never store large amounts of Warning: Tire pressures printed on the liquid in Model X. A significant spill can Tire and Loading Information label DO cause electrical components to NOT APPLY to towing. When towing, tire malfunction. pressures must be increased. For information about the tire pressures required when towing, see Towing and Accessories on page 86. Specifications 199

Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label 5. Determine the combined cargo weight being loaded on the vehicle. That weight The Vehicle Certification label provides: must not exceed the available cargo load • GVWR - Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. The capacity calculated in Step 4. maximum allowable total mass of Model X. Warning: Trunks are the preferred places This is calculated as the weight of to carry objects. In a collision, or during Model X, all passengers, fluids, and cargo. hard braking and sharp turns, loose items • GAWR FRT and GAWR RR - Gross Axle in the cabin could injure occupants. Weight Rating for the front and rear axles. The GAWR is the maximum distributed Example Load Limit Calculations weight that each axle can support. How much cargo Model X can carry depends United States: on the number and weight of passengers. The following calculated load limit examples assume passengers weigh 150 lbs (68 kg). If passengers weigh more or less, available cargo weight decreases or increases respectively. Driver and one passenger Description Total Canada: Vehicle capacity weight 954 lbs (433 kg) Subtract occupant weight 300 lbs (2 x 150 lbs/68 kg) (136 kg) Available cargo weight 654 lbs (297 kg) Driver and four passengers Description Total Caution: To prevent damage, never load Model X so that it is heavier than GVWR Vehicle capacity weight 954 lbs or exceeds the individual GAWR weights. (433 kg) Calculating Load Limits Subtract occupant weight (5 x 750 lbs 150 lbs/68 kg) (340 kg) 1. Locate the statement “The combined Available cargo weight 204 lbs weight of occupants and cargo should (93 kg) never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg” on the “Tire and Loading Information” label. 2. Determine the combined weight of all The cargo weight should be distributed occupants that will ride in the vehicle. between the front and rear trunks. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the Caution: Never load more than 175 lbs (80 occupants from XXX lbs or XXX kg (see kg) on the rear load floor (above the Step 1). lower trunk compartment) or more than 4. The resulting figure equals the available 285 lbs (130 kg) in the lower trunk cargo load capacity. For example, if the compartment. Doing so can cause “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs (635 kg) damage. and there will be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in the vehicle, the amount of available cargo capacity is 650 lbs (1400 ‑ 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs) or 295 kg (635 ‑ 340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg). 200 Model X Owner's Manual

Dimensions and Weights Dimensions and Weights Exterior Dimensions A Overall Length 198.3 in 5,036 mm Overall Width (including mirrors) 89.4 in 2,271 mm B Overall Width (including folded 81.6 in 2,072 mm mirrors) 78.7 in 1,999 mm Overall Width (excluding mirrors) C Overall Height 66 in* 1,684 mm* D Wheel Base 116.7 in 2,965 mm E Overhang - Front 38.3 in 974 mm F Overhang - Rear 43.2 in 1,097 mm Ground Clearance: 171 mm Standard, with skis 7 in 183 mm G Standard, without skis 7 in 211 mm Very high, with skis 8 in 223 mm Very high, without skis 9 in H Track - Front 67.1 in 1,705 mm Track - Rear 67.3 in 1,710 mm *Values are approximate. Dimensions can vary depending on a vehicle's options and various other factors. Interior Dimensions Head Room Front 41.7 in 1059 mm Rear 40.9 in 1039 mm Third 37.1 in 942 mm Leg Room 41.2 in 1046 mm Front Rear 38.4 in 975 mm Third 32.7 in 831 mm Specifications 201

Dimensions and Weights Shoulder Room Front 60.7 in 1542 mm Rear 56.8 in 1442 mm Third 40 in 1016 mm Front 55.6 in 1412 mm Hip Room Rear 59 in 1498 mm Third 38.5 in 978 mm Cargo Volume Front Trunk Rear* Total Seven Seat Vehicles 6.6 cu ft (187 L) 76.5 cu ft (2166 L)** 83.1 cu ft (2353 L) Six Seat Vehicles 6.6 cu ft (187 L) 70.7 cu ft (2002 L)** 77.3 cu ft (2189 L) Five Seat Vehicles 6.6 cu ft (187 L) 81.2 cu ft (2299.5 L)** 87.8 cu ft (2486.5 L) * Maximum cargo volume behind the front row seats. Includes the 12.6 cu ft (357 L) cargo area in the rear trunk (area behind the third row seats, if equipped). ** Second row seats fully forward and/or folded. Weights Curb Weight* - Model X 5,631 lbs 2,554 kg Curb Weight* - Model X Performance 5,741 lbs 2,604 kg GVWR** - Model X 6,788 lbs 3,079 kg GVWR** - Model X Performance 6,878 lbs 3,120 kg Gross Axle Weight Rating - Front 3,241 lbs 1,470 kg Gross Axle Weight Rating - Model X - Rear (at nominal tire pressure of 42 3,792 lbs 1,720 kg psi) Gross Axle Weight Rating - Model X Performance- Rear (at nominal tire 3,807 lbs 1,727 kg pressure of 42 psi) Towing Capacity (if equipped) See Towing and Accessories on page 86. *Curb Weight = weight of the vehicle with correct fluid levels, no occupants and no cargo **GVWR = Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Note: Values are approximate. Weights can vary depending on a vehicle's options. 202 Model X Owner's Manual

Subsystems Subsystems Motor Type Front Motor AC permanent magnet synchronous motor, liquid-cooled, with variable frequency drive Rear Motor AC induction motor, liquid-cooled, with variable frequency drive Nominal Voltage 320 volts Maximum Motor Power Rated Max Power* Standard Range Front 205 kW Rear 193 kW Long Range Front 205 kW Rear 193 kW Performance Front 205 kW Rear 375 kW *Tested in accordance with ECE R85. Maximum Motor Torque Nm Standard Range Front 420 Rear 335 Long Range Front 420 Rear 335 Performance Front 420 Rear 720 Specifications 203

Subsystems Transmission Type Single speed fixed gear Overall Final Drive Ratio Small motor: 9.325:1 Large motor: 9.734:1 Reverse Gear Reverse direction of motor, limited to 15 mph (24 km/h) Steering Type Rack and pinion with electronic power steering, speed sensitive Number of turns lock to lock 2.05 Turning Circle (curb to curb) 40.8 ft (12.4 m) Brakes 4-wheel anti-lock braking system (ABS) with Electronic Brake Force Distribution, Type Integrated Advanced Stability Control and Electronic Accelerator pedal actuated regenerative braking system Calipers Front: Four piston, fixed Rear: Single piston, floating Rotor Diameters (ventilated) Front: 13.98”/355 mm Rear: 14.37”/365 mm Front Rotor thickness New: 1.26”/32 mm Service limit: 1.18”/30 mm Rear Rotor thickness New: 1.10”/28 mm Service limit: 1.02”/26 mm Front Brake Pad Thickness (excluding back plate) 0.346”/8.8 mm Rear Brake Pad Thickness (excluding back plate) 0.354”/9 mm Parking brake Electrically actuated parking brake calipers 204 Model X Owner's Manual

Subsystems Suspension Front Independent, virtual pivot double wishbone Rear Independent, virtual pivot double wishbone Battery - 12V Rating 33 amp hour or higher Voltage and Polarity 12V negative (-) ground Battery - High Voltage Type Liquid-cooled lithium ion (Li-ion) Temperature Range Do not expose Model X to ambient temperatures above 140° F (60° C) or below -22° F (-30° C) for more than 24 hours at a time. Specifications 205

Wheels and Tires Wheels and Tires Wheel Specifications (Factory) Wheel Type Size Offset 20" - All Season - Front 9.0J x 20 1.378" 35 mm 20" - All Season - Rear 9.5J x 20 1.575" 40 mm 20" - Summer - Front 9.0J x 20 1.378" 35 mm 20" - Summer - Rear 10.0J x 20 1.378" 35 mm 22" - Summer - Front 9.0J x 22 1.378" 35 mm 22" - Summer - Rear 10.0J x 22 1.378" 35 mm Lug Nut Torque 129 lb. ft (175 Nm) Lug Nut Socket Size 21 mm Note: For instructions on how to jack/lift Model X, see Jacking and Lifting on page 196. 206 Model X Owner's Manual

Wheels and Tires Tire Specifications (Factory) Tire Type Size Load Index / Speed Rating 20" - Continental - Front 265/45R20 108 / V 20" - Continental - Rear 275/45R20 110 / V 22" - Goodyear or Pirelli - Front 265/35R22 102 / W 22" - Goodyear or Pirelli - Rear 285/35R22 106 / W Refer to the tire pressures printed on the Tire and Loading Information label. This label is located on the driver‡s door pillar and is visible when the driver‡s door is open (see Maintaining Tire Pressures on page 183). Winter tires can be purchased from a Tesla store. Specifications 207

Wheels and Tires Understanding Tire Markings Laws require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire. It also provides the tire identification number (TIN) for certification of safety standards, and in case of a recall. 1 Tire category. P indicates that the tire is for passenger vehicles. 2 Tire width. This 3-digit number is the width (in millimeters) of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. 3 Aspect ratio. This 2-digit number is the sidewall height as a percentage of the tread width. So, if the tread width is 205 mm, and the aspect ratio is 50, the sidewall height is 102 mm. 4 Tire construction. R indicates that the tire is of Radial ply construction. 5 Wheel diameter. This 2-digit number is the diameter of the wheel rim in inches. 6 Load index. This 2 or 3-digit number is the weight each tire can support. This number is not always shown. 208 Model X Owner's Manual

Wheels and Tires 7 Speed rating. When stated, indicates the maximum speed (in mph) at which the tire can be used for extended periods. Q=99 mph (160 km/h), R=106 mph (170 km/h), S=112 mph (180 km/h), T=118 mph (190 km/h), U=124 mph (200 km/h), H=130 mph (210 km/h), V=149 mph (240 km/h), W=168 mph (270 km/h), Y=186 mph (300 km/h). 8 Tire composition and materials. The number of plies in both the tread area and the sidewall area indicates how many layers of rubber coated material make up the structure of the tire. Information is also provided on the type of materials used. 9 Maximum tire load. The maximum load which can be carried by the tire. 10 Maximum permissible inflation pressure. This pressure should not be used for normal driving. 11 U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN). Begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next 2 digits/letters represent the plant code where it was manufactured, and the last 4 digits represent the week and year of manufacture. For example, the number 1712 is used to represent the 17th week of 2012. The other numbers are marketing codes used at the manufacturer‡s discretion. This information can be used to contact consumers if a tire defect requires a recall. 12 Treadwear grade. This number indicates the tire‡s wear rate. The higher the treadwear number is, the longer it should take for the tread to wear down. A tire rated at 400, for example, lasts twice as long as a tire rated at 200. 13 Traction grade. Indicates a tire‡s ability to stop on wet roads. A higher graded tire should allow you to stop your vehicle in a shorter distance than a tire with a lower grade. Traction is graded from highest to lowest as AA, A, B, and C. 14 Temperature grade. The tire‡s resistance to heat is grade A, B, or C, with A indicating the greatest resistance. This grading is provided for a correctly inflated tire, which is being used within its speed and loading limits. Specifications 209

Wheels and Tires Uniform Tire Quality Grading acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics. The following information relates to the tire grading system developed by the National Temperature Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which grades tires by tread wear, The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, traction and temperature performance. Tires and C, representing the tire‡s resistance to the that have deep tread, and winter tires, are generation of heat and its ability to dissipate exempt from these marking requirements. heat when tested under controlled conditions Where applicable, quality grades are found on on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. the tire‡s sidewall between the tread shoulder Sustained high temperature can cause the tire and maximum section width. For example: to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire • TREADWEAR 180 failure. • TRACTION AA The grade C corresponds to the minimum • TEMPERATURE A level of performance that all passenger car The quality grades are described next. tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A Note: In addition to the marking requirements, represent levels of performance on the passenger car tires must conform to Federal laboratory test wheel that exceed the Safety Requirements. minimum requirements. Treadwear Warning: A tire‡s temperature grade is established for a tire that is properly The treadwear grade is a comparative rating inflated and not overloaded. Excessive based on the wear rate of the tire when tested speed, under-inflation, or excessive under controlled conditions on a specified loading, either separately or in government test course. combination, can cause heat buildup and For example, a tire graded 150 wears one and possible tire failure. a half times better on a government test course than a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends on the actual conditions of their use, however, and can depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, road characteristics, and climate. Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are: AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent a tire‡s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C might have poor traction performance. Warning: Defective tires are dangerous. Do not drive if a tire is damaged, excessively worn, or is inflated to an incorrect pressure. The safety of the vehicle and occupants can be adversely affected. Check tires regularly for wear and to ensure there are no cuts, bulges or exposure of the ply/cord structure. Warning: The traction grade assigned to the tire is based on straight-ahead braking tests, and does not include: 210 Model X Owner's Manual

Wheels and Tires Tire and Loading Glossaries General Wheel and Tire Terms Accessory Weight The combined weight (in excess of those items replaced) of items available as factory installed equipment. Bead The inner edge of a tire that is shaped to fit to the rim and form an air tight seal. The bead is constructed of steel wires which are wrapped, or reinforced, by the ply cords. Cold Tire Pressure The air pressure in a tire that has been standing in excess of three hours, or driven for less than one mile. Curb Weight The weight of a standard vehicle, including any optional equipment fitted, and with the correct fluid levels. Gross Vehicle Weight The maximum permissible weight of a vehicle with driver, passengers, load, luggage, and equipment. kPa (kilo pascal) A metric unit used to measure pressure. One kilo pascal equals approximately 0.145 psi. Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum pressure to which the tire should be inflated. 2 This pressure is given on the tire side wall in psi (lbf/in ). Caution: This pressure marked on the tire is the maximum allowed by the tire manufacturer. It is not the pressure Tesla recommends using for Model X. Maximum Loaded Vehicle The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity Weight weight, and production options weight. Production Options Weight The combined weight of options installed which weigh in excess of 3 lb more than the standard items that they replaced, and are not already considered in curb or accessory weights. 2 PSI (lbf/in ) Pounds per square inch (the unit used to measure tire pressure). Recommended Tire Inflation Tire inflation pressure, established by Tesla, which is based on Pressure the type of tires that are mounted on the vehicle at the factory. This information can be found on the Tire and Loading Information label located on the door pillar. Rim The metal support for a tire, or tire and tube, upon which the tire beads are seated. Vehicle Capacity Weight The number of seats multiplied by 150 lbs plus the rated amount of load/luggage. Load Carrying Definitions Normal occupant weight 68 kilograms (150 lbs) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of the tables for calculating load limits (see Vehicle Loading on page 199). Occupant distribution Distribution of occupants in a vehicle. Passenger car tire A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 pounds or less. Specifications 211

Wheels and Tires Rim diameter Nominal diameter of the bead seat. Rim size designation Rim diameter and width. Rim type designation The manufacturing industry's designation for a rim by style or code. Rim width Nominal distance between the rim's flanges. Vehicle maximum load on the Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to tire each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two. Vehicle normal load on the tire Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight and dividing by two. Pneumatic Radial Tire Definitions Bead separation A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead. Bias ply tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the center line of the tread. Carcass The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, that when inflated, bears the load. Chunking The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall. Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire. Cord separation The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds. Cracking Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or inner liner of the tire extending to cord material. Extra load tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and higher inflation pressure than the corresponding standard tire. Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs. Inner liner The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire. Inner liner separation The parting of the inner liner from cord material in the carcass. Load rating The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure. Maximum load rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. Measuring rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements. Open splice Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or inner liner that extends to the cord material. Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire. 212 Model X Owner's Manual

Wheels and Tires Overall width The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs. Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords. Ply separation A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies. Pneumatic tire A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load. Radial ply tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the center line of the tread. Reinforced tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire. Section width The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands. Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and bead. Sidewall separation The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall. Snow tire A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E1136-93 (re-approved 2003, incorporated by reference, see §571.5) Standard Reference Test Tire when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F1805-00 (incorporated by reference, see §571.5), and that is marked with an Alpine Symbol specified in S5.5(i) on at least one sidewall. Test rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire. Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road. Tread rib A tread section running around the circumference of a tire. Tread separation The pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass. Tread wear indicators (TWI) The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread. Wheel-holding fixture The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing. Specifications 213

Contacting Tesla Roadside Assistance Roadside Assistance Contacting Tesla Roadside Assistance Tesla Roadside Assistance is available to you, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, for the duration of your warranty period. When contacting Tesla Roadside Assistance, please provide: • The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). The VIN is displayed when you touch the Tesla "T" at the top of the touchscreen. The VIN can also been seen on the upper dashboard by looking through the driver's side of the windshield. • Your exact location. • The nature of the problem. Tesla Roadside Assistance is available to speak with roadside service professionals 24/7/365 to answer any questions and explain the proper procedure for transporting your Model X. Regional Phone Number(s) Mexico: 1-800-228-8145 United States and Canada: 1-877-79TESLA (1-877-798-3752) Note: The phone number is also available by touching the Tesla "T" at the top center of the touchscreen. 214 Model X Owner's Manual

Instructions for Transporters Instructions for Transporters DO NOT TRANSPORT WITH WHEELS ON THE GROUND The front motor in Model X generates power when the wheels spin. Always transport Model X with all four tires off the ground. Ensure that the tires are unable to spin at any If Model X must be transported without a time during transport. flatbed truck, then wheel lifts and dollies must Warning: NEVER TRANSPORT YOUR be used to ensure that all four wheels are off VEHICLE WITH THE TIRES IN A of the ground. This method may only be used POSITION WHERE THEY CAN SPIN. for a maximum of 35 miles (55 km), and must DOING SO CAN LEAD TO SIGNIFICANT not exceed the manufacturer speed rating of DAMAGE AND OVERHEATING. IN RARE the dollies. With this method, Tesla CASES EXTREME OVERHEATING MAY recommends the vehicle facing forward so CAUSE THE SURROUNDING that the front wheels are lifted and the rear COMPONENTS TO IGNITE. wheels are on dollies. Note: Transporting Model X with the front wheels on dollies is not recommended, but may be done if an external steering wheel lock is applied and care is taken to prevent the front wheels from spinning. DO NOT TRANSPORT YOUR VEHICLE IF THERE IS ANY CHANCE OF THE FRONT WHEELS SPINNING. Do not transport Model X using any method that is not specified by Tesla. Adhere to the instructions provided in the following sections Caution: Enable Transport Mode (see and observe all warnings and cautions Activate Transport Mode on page 216) provided. Damage caused by improper before winching Model X onto a flatbed transporting of your vehicle is not covered by truck (see Pull onto the Flatbed Truck - the warranty. With Tow Eye on page 216). If Transport Note: Tesla is not liable or responsible for Mode is not available or the touchscreen reimbursing services not dispatched through is not accessible, self-loading dollies or Tesla Roadside Assistance. tire skates must be used to load the vehicle into the approved transportation position. Tesla is not responsible for any Approved Methods for Transporting damage caused by or during the Note: The tires are allowed to rotate slowly transport of Model X, including personal (under 3 mph or 5 km/h) and for a very short property damage or damage caused by distance (less than 30 feet or 10 meters) only using self-loading dollies or tire skates. when Transport Mode is enabled (see Activate Warning: Model X is equipped with high Transport Mode on page 216) while the vehicle voltage components that may be is being winched onto a flatbed truck or compromised as a result of a collision pulled out of a parking space for (see High Voltage Components on page repositioning. Exceeding these boundaries can 171). Before transporting Model X, it is lead to significant damage and overheating important to assume these components that is not covered by the warranty. are energized. Always follow high voltage A flatbed truck or comparable transport safety precautions (wearing personal vehicle is the recommended method of protection equipment, etc.) until transporting Model X. The vehicle can face emergency response professionals have either direction when using a flatbed. evaluated the vehicle and can accurately confirm that all high voltage systems are no longer energized. Failure to do so may result in serious injury. Roadside Assistance 215

Instructions for Transporters Disable the Self-Leveling Air To cancel Transport Mode, shift Model X into Suspension System Park. If Model X is equipped with the air suspension Note: If Model X loses 12V power after system, it automatically self-levels, even when Transport Mode is enabled, Transport Mode power is off. To prevent damage, you must will cancel and the parking brake will be re- activate Jack Mode to disable self-leveling: applied. 1. Touch Controls > Suspension on the Caution: If the electrical system is not touchscreen. working, and you therefore cannot use 2. Press the brake pedal, then touch Very the touchscreen to activate Transport High to maximize height. Mode, use self-loading dollies or tire skates. Before doing so, always check the 3. Touch Jack. manufacturer's specifications and recommended loading capacity. When Jack Mode is active, Model X displays this red indicator light on Pull onto the Flatbed Truck - With the instrument panel, along with a message telling you that active Tow Eye suspension is disabled. 1. Locate the tow eye. Note: Jack Mode cancels when driving speed 2. Remove the tow eye cover by inserting a exceeds 4 mph (7 kph). small flat screwdriver into the slot located along the top of the cover, then prying Warning: Failure to activate Jack Mode on gently to release the cover from the top a vehicle equipped with the air snap. suspension system can result in the vehicle becoming loose during transport, which may cause significant damage. Activate Transport Mode Transport Mode keeps the parking brake disengaged while winching Model X onto a flatbed truck. When active, Transport Mode displays a message indicating that the vehicle will remain free-rolling. The following are required to enable Transport Mode: • 12V power is required. You are unable to use the touchscreen to activate Transport Mode if Model X has no power. • Model X must detect a key. Transport Mode is available only when a key is detected. To activate Transport Mode: Note: Keep the tow eye cover in a safe place so you can replace it when towing is 1. Ensure the vehicle is in Park. complete. 2. Chock the tires or otherwise ensure Model X is secure. 3. Press and hold the brake pedal, then on the touchscreen, touch Controls > Service > Towing. The touchscreen displays a message reminding you how to properly transport Model X. 4. Press and hold the Transport Mode button until it turns blue. Model X is now free- rolling and can slowly be rolled (no faster than walking speed) or winched. 216 Model X Owner's Manual

Instructions for Transporters 3. Fully insert the tow eye into the opening, 2. To protect the underbody from damage, then turn it counter-clockwise until place a protective barrier (such as a piece securely fastened. of wood) between the tow strap and underbody. 3. Activate Transport Mode by touching Controls > Service > Towing. 4. Pull Model X slowly onto the flatbed truck. Secure the Tires The vehicle's tires must be secured onto the truck using the eight-point tie-down method. • Ensure any metal parts on the tie-down straps do not contact painted surfaces or the face of the wheels. • Do not place tie-down straps over body panels or through the wheels. Caution: Attaching the tie-down straps to the chassis, suspension or other parts of the vehicle's body may cause damage. 4. Attach the winch cable to the tow eye. Caution: Before pulling, make sure the tow eye is securely fastened. 5. Activate Transport Mode by touching Controls > Service > Towing. 6. Pull Model X slowly onto the flatbed truck. Pull onto the Flatbed Truck - Without Tow Eye It is strongly recommended that you connect the winch to your vehicle's tow eye, as described previously. However, if a situation arises in which the tow eye is not available (lost, misplaced, etc.), the following instructions describe how to attach tow straps. 1. Attach the tow straps to each of the lower suspension arms underneath the front of the vehicle. Roadside Assistance 217

Easter Eggs Consumer Information Easter Eggs But wait, there's more! Below is a list of the Easter Eggs that have been discovered so far and how to access them. Alternatively, touch the Tesla "T" (top center of the touchscreen) then drag the About Your Tesla box downwards for one-touch access to all discovered Easter Eggs. Note: For a shortcut to Easter Egg fun, touch the Toybox icon in the application launcher (see Touchscreen Overview on page 4). For This... Do This... Arcade Feeling nostalgic? While in Park, access games from the app launcher or your Easter Egg tray then select a game from the menu to play. Note that, depending on the game, you may need to use your steering wheel buttons or a USB controller to play. Santa Mode "What have you been longing for?" Enjoy the holidays year- round with this one! Simply initiate a voice command and say "Ho Ho Ho". Or, if you are feeling extra sour, you can say "Ho Ho Ho Not Funny" instead. Rainbow Road Need more cowbell? Visit Rainbow Road by pulling the cruise stalk toward you four times in quick succession while Autosteer is enabled. Sketchpad Triple-tap the Tesla "T" (top center of the touchscreen) and channel your inner Picasso. Show us what you got! Touch Publish to submit your artistic compositions to Tesla for critiquing. Mars Press and hold the Tesla "T" (top center of the touchscreen) then enter mars in the access code popup. The map shows your Model X as a rover on the Martian landscape, and the About Your Tesla box displays SpaceX's interplanetary spaceship. 007 Press and hold the Tesla "T" (top center of the touchscreen) and enter 007 in the access code popup. You are no longer a "Driver", you're a "Diver"! Touch Controls > Suspension to change your depth. Ludicrous Speed (P100D vehicles Press and hold the Ludicrous setting (Controls > Driving > only) Acceleration > Ludicrous) for approximately five seconds. Touch Yes, bring it on! if you want to go fast. To display power and acceleration readings on the instrument panel, press either scroll button briefly until the available options are displayed. Then, roll the scroll button to highlight Readout then press the scroll button again. The Answer to the Ultimate Rename your car to 42 (see Naming Your Vehicle on page Question of Life, The Universe, 138) and notice the new name of your Model X. and Everything Holiday Show Park outside, turn the volume up, roll down your windows, then press and hold the Tesla "T" (top center of the touchscreen) and enter modelxmas in the access code popup. Enjoy the show. Rainbow Charge Port When Model X is locked and charging, press the button on the mobile connector ten times in quick succession. Neat, huh? 218 Model X Owner's Manual

Easter Eggs Romance Mode You can‡t roast chestnuts by an open fire in your car, but you can still cozy up with your loved ones by this virtual fireplace. While in Park, access Romance Mode from your Easter Egg tray. Queue the music and get your romance on! Emissions Testing Mode Holiday fun can come in surprising ways. Access Emissions Testing Mode from your Easter Egg tray, then select your preferred fart style and a target seat. Activate by pressing the left scroll wheel button when you‡re ready to “release” your prank. Consumer Information 219

About this Owner Information About this Owner Information Document Applicability Owner information is updated regularly to reflect updates to your vehicle. However, in some cases, recently released features may not be described. To display information about recently released features, view the Release Notes on the touchscreen. Release Notes are displayed on the touchscreen after a software update, and can be displayed at any time by touching the Tesla "T" at the top of the touchscreen, then touching the Release Notes link. If information related to how to use the touchscreen conflicts with information in the Release Notes, the Release Notes take Copyrights and Trademarks precedence. © 2013-2019 Tesla, Inc. All information in this Illustrations document and all vehicle software is subject to copyright and other intellectual property Illustrations are provided for demonstration rights of Tesla, Inc. and its licensors. This purposes only. Depending on vehicle options, material may not be modified, reproduced or software version, region of purchase, and copied, in whole or in part, without the prior specific settings, your vehicle may appear written permission of Tesla, Inc. and its slightly different. Although the owner licensors. Additional information is available information is applicable to both right-hand upon request. Tesla uses software created by drive and left-hand drive vehicles, many the Open Source community. Please visit illustrations show only left-hand drive vehicles. Tesla‡s Open Source software website at However, the essential information that the http://www.tesla.com/opensource. HD Radio illustrations are providing is correct. is a registered trademark of iBiquity Digital Corporation. The following are trademarks or Errors or Inaccuracies registered trademarks of Tesla, Inc. in the United States and other countries: All specifications and descriptions are known to be accurate at time of publishing. However, because continuous improvement is a goal at Tesla, we reserve the right to make product modifications at any time. To communicate any inaccuracies or omissions, or to provide general feedback or suggestions regarding the quality of this owner information, send an email to [email protected]. Location of Components Owner information may specify the location of a component as being on the left or right side of the vehicle. As shown, left (1) and right (2) represent the side of the vehicle when sitting inside. All other trademarks contained in this document are the property of their respective owners and their use herein does not imply sponsorship or endorsement of their products or services. The unauthorized use of any trademark displayed in this document or on the vehicle is strictly prohibited. 220 Model X Owner's Manual

Disclaimers Disclaimers Event Data Recorder (EDR) Vehicle Telematics Model X is equipped with an event data Model X is equipped with electronic modules recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR that monitor and record data from various is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like vehicle systems, including the motor, Autopilot situations, such as an air bag deployment or components, Battery, braking and electrical hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in systems. The electronic modules record understanding how a vehicle's systems information about various driving and vehicle performed. The EDR is designed to record conditions, including braking, acceleration, trip data related to vehicle dynamics and safety and other related information regarding your systems for a short period of time, typically 30 vehicle. These modules also record seconds or less. The EDR in Model X is information about the vehicle‡s features such designed to record data such as: as charging events and status, the enabling/ • How various systems in your vehicle were disabling of various systems, diagnostic operating; trouble codes, VIN, speed, direction and • Whether or not the driver and passenger location. safety belts were buckled/fastened; The data is stored by the vehicle and may be • How far (if at all) the driver was accessed, used and stored by Tesla service depressing the accelerator and/or brake technicians during vehicle servicing or pedal; and, periodically transmitted to Tesla wirelessly • How fast the vehicle was traveling. through the vehicle‡s telematics system. This data may be used by Tesla for various The data can help provide a better purposes, including, but not limited to: understanding of the circumstances in which providing you with Tesla telematics services; crashes and injuries occur. troubleshooting; evaluation of your vehicle‡s Note: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle quality, functionality and performance; only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no analysis and research by Tesla and its partners data is recorded by the EDR under normal for the improvement and design of our driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., vehicles and systems; and as otherwise may name, gender, age, and crash location) is be required by law. In servicing your vehicle, recorded. However, other parties, such as law Tesla can potentially resolve issues remotely enforcement, could combine the EDR data simply by reviewing your vehicle‡s data log. with the type of personally identifying data Tesla‡s telematics system wirelessly transmits routinely acquired during a crash vehicle information to Tesla on a periodic investigation. basis. The data is used as previously described To read data recorded by an EDR, special and helps ensure the proper maintenance of equipment is required, and access to the your vehicle. Additional Model X features may vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to use your vehicle‡s telematics system and the the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such information provided, including features such as law enforcement, that have the special as charging reminders, software updates, and equipment, can read the information if they remote access to, and control of, various have access to the vehicle or the EDR. systems of your vehicle. Tesla does not disclose the data recorded in your vehicle to any third party except when: • An agreement or consent from the vehicle‡s owner (or the leasing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained. • Officially requested by the police or other authorities. • Used as a defense for Tesla in a lawsuit. • Ordered by a court of law. • Used for research purposes without disclosing details of the vehicle owner or identification information. Consumer Information 221

Disclaimers • Disclosed to a Tesla affiliated company, California Proposition 65 including their successors or assigns, or our information systems and data Warning: Operating, servicing and management providers. maintaining a passenger vehicle or off- In addition, and subject to local law, Tesla does highway motor vehicle can expose you to not disclose the data recorded to an owner chemicals including phthalates and lead, unless it pertains to a non-warranty repair which are known to the State of California service and in this case, will disclose only the to cause cancer and birth defects or other data that is related to the repair. For additional reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, information regarding how Tesla processes wear gloves or wash your hands data collected from your vehicle, please frequently when servicing your vehicle. review Tesla‡s privacy policy at For more information go to: www.tesla.com/about/legal. www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- vehicle. Data Sharing Warning: Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules and seat For quality assurance and to support the belt pre-tensioners may contain continuous improvement of advanced features Perchlorate Material. Special handling such as Autopilot, Tesla measures road may be required for service or vehicle end segment data of all participating vehicles. All of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/ Tesla vehicles can learn from the experience of hazardouswaste/perchlorate. the billions of miles that Tesla vehicles have Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and driven. Although Tesla shares this data with related accessories contain lead and lead partners that contribute similar data, the data compounds. Wash hands after handling. does not include any personally identifiable information about you or your vehicle. To allow data sharing, touch Controls > Safety & Security > Data Sharing, touch the Yes buttons to confirm that you agree to allow Tesla to collect the associated type of data, then submit your response. Note: Although Model X uses GPS in connection with driving and operation, as discussed in this owner's manual, Tesla does not record or store vehicle-specific GPS information. Consequently, Tesla is unable to provide historical information about a vehicle's location (for example, Tesla is unable to tell you where Model X was parked/traveling at a particular date/time). Quality Control You might notice a few miles/km on the odometer when you take delivery of your Model X. This is a result of a comprehensive testing process that ensures the quality of your Model X. The testing process includes extensive inspections during and after production. The final inspection takes place at Tesla and includes a road test conducted by a technician. 222 Model X Owner's Manual

Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects Contacting Tesla For detailed information about your Model X, go to www.tesla.com, and log on to your Tesla Account, or sign up to get an account. If you have any questions or concerns about your Model X, call 1-877-79TESLA (1-877‑798-3752). Note: You can also use voice commands to provide feedback to Tesla. Say "Note", "Report", "Bug note", or "Bug report" (in the English language) followed by brief comments in your language of choice. Model X takes a snapshot of its systems, including your current location, vehicle diagnostic data, and screen captures of the touchscreen and instrument panel. Tesla periodically reviews these notes and uses them to continue improving Model X. Reporting Safety Defects - US If you believe that Model X has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Tesla. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation. If it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Tesla. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety, 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from www.safercar.gov. Reporting Safety Defects - Canada If you believe that your Model X has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada, in addition to notifying Tesla. To contact Transport Canada, call their toll-free number: 1-800-333-0510. Consumer Information 223

Declarations of Conformity Declarations of Conformity Key and Passive Unlocking System FCC Certification Model Number Mfr GHz Tested For Key fob 1048598 Tesla 2.4 USA Canada Per FCC ID 2AEIM-1048598, the device(s) listed above complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Tesla could void your authority to operate the equipment. IC Certification The following device is used in vehicles in Canada: • Key fob Model Number: 1048598 (2.4 GHz) • Key fob Manufacturer: Tesla Per IC 20098-1048598, this device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 224 Model X Owner's Manual

Declarations of Conformity Central Body Controller FCC Certification Model Number Mfr MHz / GHz Tested For Central Body Controller Tesla 315 / 2.4 USA 1031503 Canada Per FCC ID 2AEIM-1031503, the devices listed above comply with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Tesla could void your authority to operate the equipment. IC Certification The following device is used in vehicles in Canada: • Central Body Controller Model Number: 1031503 (315 MHz / 2.4 GHz) • Central Body Controller Manufacturer: Tesla Per IC 20098-1031503, this device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Integral Component Only The Central Body Controller is an integral part of the vehicle that is installed and secured around other interior trim components. The Central Body Controller is designed and intended for use only as an integral component and cannot be sold and/or marketed separately. Tire Pressure Monitoring System FCC IDs: TZSTPMS201, Z9F-201FS43X IC ID: 11852A-201FS4X The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS-210 of Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Tesla could void your authority to operate the equipment. HomeLink This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules, RSS-210 Industry Canada, and with EU Directive 2014/53/EU. Operation is subject to the following conditions: Consumer Information 225

Declarations of Conformity • This device may not cause harmful interference. • This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any changes or modifications to the device not expressly approved by the manufacturer or Tesla could void your authority to operate the equipment. Radio Frequency Information This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 226 Model X Owner's Manual

Index Index A B ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) 69 backup camera 82 absolute speed limit 127 battery (12V) Acceleration settings 77 complete discharge 173 access panel, removing 194 specifications 205 accessories Battery (high voltage) plugging into power socket 20 care of 173 accessory carrier 86 coolant 194 adaptive headlights 60 specifications 205 Adaptive Suspension Damping 157 temperature limits 173 air circulation 142 battery (key), replacing 7 air conditioning 140 bicycle carrier 86 air distribution 142 blind spot collision warning 121 air filter 144 blind spot collision warning chime 121 air suspension 157 Bluetooth air vents 144 devices, playing audio files from 154 airbags 41 general information 155 alarm 161 phone, pairing and using 155 all-season tires 188 body repairs 197 always connected, setting 80 body touch up 192 Always Show Estimated Round Trip Energy brakes 149 automatic in emergencies 125 anti-lock braking (ABS) 69 fluid level 194 application launcher 4 overview of 69 audio specifications 204 playing files 152 Bumper Clearance (Summon) 115 steering wheel buttons 49 volume control 152 Auto High Beam 60 C Auto Lane Change 108 auto-raising suspension 157 cabin air filter 144 automatic emergency braking 125 cabin temperature control 140 automatic navigation 146 Calendar app 160 Autopark 113 calibration of doors 6 autopilot California Proposition 65 222 blind spot collision warning 121 camera (rear view) 82 side collision warning 121 cameras (autopilot) 96 staying inside lane markings 121 car cover 192 Autopilot car status, displaying 49, 50 Auto Lane Change 108 car washes 190 automatic emergency braking 124 cargo area 17 Autopark 113 cargo volume 202 Autosteer 106 carpets, cleaning 191 collision avoidance assist 124 CCS (Combo) 172 forward collision warning 124 CE certifications 224 Navigate on Autopilot 109 CHAdeMO 172 overtake acceleration 99 chains 189 overview 96 change of ownership 139 speed assist 127 charge port 175 speed limit warning 127 charge port light 177 staying within speed limits 127 charge port manual release 176 Summon 115 charge port release cable 176 Traffic-Aware Cruise Control 99 charging Autopilot components 96 charge settings 177 Autosteer 106 components and equipment 171 average range 80 instructions 175 public charging stations 172 scheduling 177 Index 227

Index charging (continued) E status of 179 charging locations, finding 149 Easter Eggs 218 child protection Easy Entry 26, 27 disabling rear window switches 15 easy entry, driver profile 46 child seats EDR (event data recorder) 221 installing and using 32 electric parking brake 71 child-protection emergency braking 124 disabling liftgate and rear door handles emergency flashers 61 12 emergency rear door opening 14 Chill acceleration 77 emission label 198 cleaning 190 energy climate controls 140 gained from regenerative braking 70 collision avoidance assist 124 range information 62 connecting to Wi-Fi 167 Energy app 80 console energy saving mode 80 12V power socket 20 energy use predictions (navigating) 149 cup holders 22 Erase & Reset 139 USB ports 20 event data recording 221 consumption chart 80 exterior contact information car cover 192 roadside assistance 214 cleaning 190 Tesla 223 dimensions 201 copyrights 220 lights 58 Creep 70 overview 3 cruise control 99 polishing, touch up, & repair 192 cup holders 22 D F dashboard overview 2 factory defaults, restoring 139 Dashcam 83 factory reset 139 data recording 221 fan speed, interior 142 data sharing 221 favorites (Media Player) 153 declarations of conformity 224 Favorites (navigation) 147 delivery mileage 222 FCC certifications 224 devices features, downloading new 168 Bluetooth, playing audio files 154 firmware (software) updates 168 connecting 20 flash drives, playing audio files from 154 playing audio files from 154 flashers, warning 61 dimensions 201 floor mats 192 Dog Mode 144 fluids dome (map) lights 58 replacement intervals 181 door labels 199 reservoirs, checking 194 Door Unlock Mode 12 fog lights 58 doors 6 forward collision warning 124 doors, opening 6 front passenger detection 43 drive away locking 12 front trunk 18 Drive gear 56 driver G profiles 46 driving garage doors, opening 164 seating position 24 gates, opening 164 starting 54 GAWR 200 tips to maximize range 80 gears 56 glove box 20 Gross Axle Weight Rating 200 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 200 228 Model X Owner's Manual

Index ground clearance 201 K GVWR 200 Keep Climate On 144 H key FCC and IC certifications 224 hazard warning flashers 61 how to use 6 headlights key not inside 54 adaptive 60 ordering extras 9 after exit 60 replacing battery 7 high beams 60 keyless entry 6 heated wipers 68 heating 140 L height adjustments (suspension) auto-raising 157 label disabling (Jack mode) 159 Tire and Loading Information 199 high beam headlights 60 vehicle certification 200 high voltage lane assist 121 Battery specifications 205 lane change, automatic 108 components 171 lane departure warning 121 safety 181 LATCH/ISOFIX child seats, installing 35 hills, stopping on 76 Launch Mode 77, 78 Hold 70 liftgate Home location 150 adjust opening height 17 HomeLink opening 16 FCC certification 225 lifting 196 programming and using 164 lights when using Summon 115 adaptive headlights 60 hood 18 hazard warning 61 horn 51 headlights after exit 60 turn signals 61 I load limits 199 location tracking 146 I'm Feeling Lucky, Hungry 146 location-based suspension 157 IC certifications 224 locking and unlocking doors 6 identification labels 198 Ludicrous acceleration 77 Insane acceleration 77 lug nut covers 186 instant range 80 lumbar adjustment (premium) 24 instrument panel charging status 179 M cleaning 191 overview of 62 maintenance interior brake fluid, checking 194 cleaning 191 cleaning 190 dimensions 201 daily checks 181 lights 58 fluid replacement intervals 181 overview 2 monthly checks 181 temperature control 140 panel, removing 194 internet radio 153 service intervals 181 ISOFIX/LATCH child seats, installing 35 tires 183 washer fluid, topping up 195 J map orientation 146 map updates 151 J1772 172 mats 192 Jack mode 159 media 152 jacking 196 mileage upon delivery 222 mirrors 52 mobile app 170 Index 229

Index Mobile Connector radio 152 description 172 Radio Frequency information 224 using 175 range modifications 197 displayed on instrument panel 62 motor specifications 203 driving tips to maximize 80 my car does what? 218 regenerative braking 70 range assurance 80 Range mode 80 N Re-route 150 rear seats, accessing 26, 27 naming 138 rear view camera 82 Navigate on Autopilot 109 rear window switches, disabling 15 navigating 146, 147 recent (Media Player) 153 NCC certifications 224 Recents (navigation) 147 Neutral gear 56 regenerative braking 70 NHTSA, contacting 223 relative speed limit 127 release notes 169 restarting the touchscreen 54 O Reverse gear 56 RFID transponders 197 Obstacle-Aware Acceleration 124 roadside assistance 214 occupancy sensor 43 Roll 70 odometer 5, 79 rotating tires 184 offset from speed limit 127 Round Trip Energy (navigating) 149 Online Routing 150 overhang dimensions 201 S overtake acceleration 99 Owner Information, about 220 safety defects, reporting 223 safety information P airbags 44 child seats 40 Park Assist 74 seat belts 31 Park gear 56 satellite radio 152 parking brake 71 scheduled charging 178 parking, using Autopark 113 scheduled departure parking, using Summon 115 using 178 parking, when towing a trailer 91 seat belts parts replacement 197 cleaning 191 passenger detection 43 in a collision 30 passenger front airbag 43 overview of 29 personal data, erasing 139 pre-tensioners 30 phone wearing when pregnant 30 steering wheel buttons 50 seat covers 28 using 155 seat heaters 140 phone app 156 seating capacity 199 PIN 47 seats PIN to Drive 161 heaters 140 power management 80 seats, second row 25 power socket 20 security settings 161 power windows 15 sensors 96 powering on and off 54 Sentry Mode 161 Proposition 65 222 service data recording 221 public charging stations 172 service intervals 181 Settings, erasing 139 shifting gears 56 R Show Calendar Upon Entry 160 Side Clearance (Summon) 115 radar 96 side collision warning 121 230 Model X Owner's Manual

Index SiriusXM 152 temperature (continued) slip start 73 heated steering wheel 51 Smart Summon 118 outside 62 software reset 139 tires 210 software update preferences 168 Teslacam 83 software updates 168 third row seats, folding and raising 28 software version 5 tie-down straps 217 specifications Tire and Loading Information label 199 12V battery 205 tire noise 189 brakes 204 Tire Pressure Monitoring System cargo volume 202 FCC certification 225 dimensions 201 overview of 187 exterior 201 tire pressures, checking 183 High Voltage Battery 205 tire pressures, when towing 88 interior 201 tires motor 203 all-season 188 steering 204 balancing 184 subsystems 203 chains 189 suspension 205 inspecting and maintaining 184 tires 207 pressures, how to check 183 transmission 204 quality grading 210 wheels 206 replacing 185 speed assist 127 replacing a tire sensor 187 Speed Limit Mode 139 rotation 184 speed limit warning 127 specification 207 spoiler 85 summer 188 Sport acceleration 77 temperature grades 210 stability control 73 tire markings 208 Standard acceleration 77 traction grade 210 starting 54 treadwear grade 210 steering specifications 204 wheel configuration 183 steering wheel winter 188 adjusting position 49 toll system transponders, attaching 197 adjusting sensitivity 49 torque specifications 203 buttons 49 touch up body 192 heated 49 touchscreen scroll buttons 49 cleaning 191 steering, automatic 106 overview 4 Stopping Mode 70 software updates 168 streaming radio 153 tow eye, locating 216 streaming services 153 tow hitch, connecting 91 summer tires 188 tow hitch, disconnecting 93 Summon 115 towing 216 Summon Distance 115 towing a trailer 86 sun visors 23 towing capacity 87 supercharging towing guidelines 91 described 180 towing instructions 215 idle fees 180 Towing Label 199 pay-per-use fees 180 TPMS suspension (air), settings for 157 FCC certification 225 suspension specifications 205 overview of 187 Tracking Disabled 146 traction control 73 T trademarks 220 Traffic-Aware Cruise Control 99 telematics 221 Trailer Brakes for towing 89 temperature Trailer Mode 89 Battery (high voltage), limits 173 trailer, towing 86 cabin, controls for 140 transmission specifications 204 transponders, attaching 197 Index 231

Index Transport Canada, contacting 223 Work location 150 Transport Mode 216 transporting 215, 216 trip chart 80 trip meter 79 Trip Planner 150 trunk, front 18 trunk, rear child-protection lock 12 disabling interior handle 12 turn signals 61 U ultrasonic sensors 96 uniform tire quality grading 210 Unlock on Park 6 unlocking when key doesn't work 13 USB devices connecting 20 playing audio files from 154 USB ports 20 V Valet mode 47 vehicle certification label 200 Vehicle Hold 76 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 198 vehicle loading 199 ventilation 144 VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) 198 voice commands 49 volume control 4 volume control (media) 152 W walk away locking 12 Wall Connector 172 warning flashers 61 washer fluid, topping up 195 washers, using 68 wheel chocks 217 wheels alignment 184 lug nut covers, removing and installing 186 replacing 185 specifications 206 torque 206 Wi-Fi, connecting to 167 windshield washer fluid, topping up 195 winter tires 188 wipers, de-icing 68 wipers, using 68 232 Model X Owner's Manual

Model S Quick Guide - NA Rev C.book Page 2 Wednesday, December 18, 2013 12:40 PM PUBLISHED OCTOBER 30, 2019